Home

Ford 2002 Escort Automobile User Manual

Contents

1. 23 ILLUMINATION Press to illuminate the remote control and backlight all of the buttons for night use 54 Entertainment Systems Battery replacement Batteries are supplied with the remote control unit Since all batteries have a limited shelf life replace them when the unit fails to control the DVD player al LY Remove the screw and unlatch the battery cover to access the batteries The remote control unit uses two AAA batteries which are supplied with the unit Headphones Wireless headphones WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road Your FES system is equipped with two sets of battery powered infrared wireless headphones Two AAA batteries are needed to operate the headphones Batteries are included Additional infrared wireless headphones may be purchased for use with the system Also wired headphones may be purchased and plugged in where indicated on the left and right hand sides of the system Refer to Wired Headphones following 55 Entertainment Systems To install the batteries remove the screw on the cover and remove the cover Then gently lift the top of the cover away from the housing to expose the battery compartment When replacing
2. 358 Maintenance and Specifications and other factors If this occurs there is no need to pull off the road The vehicle can continue to be driven while this message is active WARNING To reduce the risk of collision and injury be prepared that the vehicle speed may reduce and the vehicle may not be able to accelerate with full power until the fluid temperatures reduce The air conditioning may also cycle on and off during severe operating conditions to protect overheating of the engine When the engine coolant temperature decreases to a more normal operating temperature the air conditioning will turn on once again If you notice any of the following e the engine coolant temperature gauge moves fully into the red hot area e the coolant temperature warning light illuminates e the service engine soon indicator illuminates 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and place the vehicle in P Park 2 Leave the engine running until the coolant temperature gauge needle moves away from the H range After several minutes if this does not happen follow the remaining steps 3 Turn the engine off and wait for it to cool before checking the coolant level WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 4 If the coolant level is normal you may restart your engine and continue on 5 If the coolant is low add coolant restart the engine and take your vehicle to an authorized dea
3. Note Automotive fluids are not interchangeable do not use engine coolant antifreeze or windshield washer fluid outside of its specified function and vehicle location Adding engine coolant When adding coolant make sure it is a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water Add the mixture to the coolant reservoir when the engine is cool until the appropriate fill level is obtained WARNING Do not add engine coolant when the engine is hot Steam and scalding liquids released from a hot cooling system can burn you badly Also you can be burned if you spill coolant on hot engine parts WARNING Do not put engine coolant in the windshield washer fluid container If sprayed on the windshield engine coolant could make it difficult to see through the windshield 355 Maintenance and Specifications e Do not mix coolants Add the coolant type originally equipped in your vehicle Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Note Do not use stop leak pellets or cooling system sealants additives as they can cause damage to the engine cooling and or heating systems This damage would not be covered under your vehicle s warranty e A large amount of water without engine coolant may be added in case of emergency to reach a vehicle service location In this instance the cooling system must be drained and refilled with a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water as soon as possible Wa
4. 396 Tilt steering wheel 0 008 92 Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Tires Wheels and Loading 236 TIVES direnenen 220 221 302 AL SNIMENC sscsxinscesscanednerpseseess tee 228 CALE E A A E 224 Changing svirrer 302 304 305 checking the pressure 224 MYM AUIS iaee i aR 222 label verirsen enine EO RR 235 replacing sess ecaxsederesdervovessteracsss 226 TOUATING sevcsseheacstestscncovcaaceoansnarns 229 safety practices cccceeee 228 sidewall information 230 snow tires and chains 241 Spare MGs A tee coecca satan rE 302 Temporary mobility kit 309 GEYIMINOLOBY inrcis 221 tire grades sicsss dhssecwdsacesssvecates 221 treadwear sesirnrereiire 220 225 TOWNE accessccsaaseieabneswsee carves n 249 recreational towing 5 253 trailer tOWINY eee 249 WEECKED svecetadscsacevetstvenersciaviots 325 Transaxle fluid refill capacities 379 lubricant specifications 379 TraNSMISSION cceeeeeeeeeeeeees 270 brake shift interlock BSD 269 fluid checking and adding automatic 2 eee 374 T r SIGMA eeducscsayiveasevedensedsdeviracee 84 U Universal garage door opener 109 USB POLG d isssesdighieiwsssdekicshiisccassie 39 vV Vehicle Identification Number VIN J riirn oa e 384 Vehicle loading sssrinin 242 Ventilating your vehicle 258 WwW Warning lights see Lights 12 Wash
5. Attaching child safety seats with LATCH Lower Anchors and Tethers for CHildren attachments The LATCH system is composed of three vehicle anchor points two 2 lower anchors located where the vehicle seat back and seat cushion meet called the seat bight and one 1 top tether anchor located behind that seating position LATCH compatible child safety seats have two rigid or webbing mounted attachments that connect to the two lower anchors at the LATCH equipped seating positions in your vehicle This type of attachment method eliminates the need to use safety belts to attach the child seat however the safety belt can still be used to attach the child seat For forward facing child seats the top tether strap must also be attached to the proper top tether anchor if a top tether strap has been provided with your child seat See Attaching child safety seats with tether straps and Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for children in this chapter for more information 207 Seating and Safety Restraints Your vehicle has LATCH lower anchors for child seat installation at the seating positions marked with the child seat symbol The LATCH anchors are located at the rear section of the rear seat between the cushion and seat back below the locator symbols on the seatback Follow the child seat manufacturer s instructions to aa p
6. Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat 203 Seating and Safety Restraints Installing child safety seats with combination lap and shoulder belts Check to make sure the child seat is properly secured before each use Children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat When installing a child safety seat with combination lap shoulder belts e Use the correct safety belt buckle for that seating position e Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle until you hear a snap and feel it latch Make sure the tongue is securely fastened in the buckle e Keep the buckle release button pointing up and away from the safety seat with the tongue between the child seat and the release button to help prevent accidental unbuckling Place vehicle seat back in upright position e Put the safety belt in the automatic locking mode Refer to step 5 below This vehicle does not require the use of a locking clip WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemb
7. Instrument Cluster If you calculate your average fuel economy by dividing distance traveled by gallons of fuel used liters of fuel used by 100 kilometers traveled your figure may be different than displayed for the following reasons e Your vehicle was not perfectly level during fill up e Differences in the automatic shut off points on the fuel pumps at service stations e Variations in top off procedure from one fill up to another e Rounding of the displayed values to the nearest 0 1 gallon liter To determine your average highway fuel economy do the following 1 Drive the vehicle at least 5 miles 8 km with the speed control system engaged to display a stabilized average 2 Record the highway fuel economy for future reference It is important to press RESET press and hold RESET for two seconds in order to reset the function after setting the speed control to get accurate highway fuel economy readings For more information refer to Essentials of good fuel economy in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter MPG Lkm 4 This displays instantaneous fuel economy as a bar graph ranging from poor economy to f excellent economy Your vehicle must be moving to calculate instantaneous fuel economy When your vehicle is not moving this function shows one or no bars illuminated Instantaneous fuel economy cannot be reset TIMER Timer displays the trip elapsed drive time To operate do the following 1 Press a
8. SECURICODE KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM The keypad is invisible until touched and then it lights up so you can see and touch the appropriate buttons Note If you enter your entry code too fast on the keypad the unlock function may not work Re enter your entry code more slowly You can use the keyless entry keypad to e lock or unlock the doors without using a key e recall memory seat power mirrors and adjustable pedals if equipped The keypad can be operated with the factory set 5 digit entry code this code is located on the owner s wallet card in the glove box and is available from your authorized dealer You can also create up to three of your own 5 digit personal entry codes When touching the controls on the keypad touch the middle of the controls Programming a personal entry code and keypad association to memory seats mirrors and adjustable pedals if equipped To create your own personal entry code 1 Enter the factory set code 2 Within five seconds touch the 1 e 2 on the keypad 3 Enter your personal 5 digit code Each number must be entered within five seconds of each other 4 For memory recall feature enter the sixth digit 1 e 2 to store driver 1 settings or 3 e 4 to store driver 2 settings Note Touching 5 e 6 7 e 8 or 9 e 0 keypad numbers as a sixth digit will not recall a driver memory setting Note The factory set code cannot be associated with a memory setting 138 Locks and
9. The FES has control over the primary speaker and secondary headphone audio sources LOCKED disabled The FES buttons are locked and all FES button presses are ignored by the radio and the FES except for load and eject When the DVD system is ON you can then press the memory preset controls 2 and 4 simultaneously to toggle between Single Play and Dual Play In Single Play mode all speakers listen to the same media In Dual Play mode rear seat passengers can use the infrared wireless or wired not included headphones to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers 63 Entertainment Systems General information Note DVDs are formatted by regions US and Canada systems can only play region 1 DVDs and Mexico systems can only play region 4 DVDs Systems sold in vehicles targeted for other parts of the world would have different regions If a playback problem is encountered please ensure that you are using a disc designed for your vehicle The region coding can be found stamped on the disc or on the box and can say region 1 or region 4 etc They may also be marked by a numerical symbol Macrovision This product incorporates copyright protection technology that is protected by method claims of certain U S patents and other intellectual property rights owned by Macrovision Corporation and other rights owners Use of this copyright protection technology must be authorized by Macrovision Cor
10. e In Australia www ford com au Additional owner information is given in separate publications This vehicle s Owner s Guide describes every option and model variant available and therefore some of the items covered may not apply to your particular vehicle Furthermore due to printing cycles it may describe options before they are generally available Remember to pass on this vehicle s Owner s Guide when reselling the vehicle It is an integral part of the vehicle SAFETY AND ENVIRONMENT PROTECTION A Warning symbols in this guide How can you reduce the risk of personal injury to yourself or others In this guide answers to such questions are contained in comments highlighted by the warning triangle symbol These comments should be read and observed Warning symbols on your vehicle When you see this symbol it is imperative that you consult the relevant section of this guide before L i touching or attempting adjustment of any kind Introduction Protecting the environment We must all play our part in protecting the environment Correct vehicle usage and the authorized disposal of waste cleaning and lubrication materials are significant steps towards this aim Information in this respect is highlighted in this guide with the tree symbol CALIFORNIA Proposition 65 Warning WARNING Engine exhaust some of its constituents and certain vehicle components contain or emit chemicals known to the State of Califor
11. e The edge of the vehicle is high from the ground such as a bus tow truck or flat bed truck 280 Driving Automatic Search for Parking Space To start press the APA control switch on the console in front of the gearshift The message center will display ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING To designate what side of the street to search on use the turn signal The arrow symbols gt gt and lt lt in the message center indicate on which side of the vehicle APA will park If the turn signal is not on the system will automatically search the passenger side For best performance the driver should drive the vehicle as parallel as possible while passing a parking space If driven too fast above 18 mph 30 km h for the system to measure parking spaces the message center will display ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED When the system has found a space the message center will display SPACE FOUND PULL FORWARD followed by a chime Drive forward until the message center displays SPACE FOUND STOP followed by a chime When you stop the vehicle in position to begin parking the message center displays REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE The driver should always come to a complete stop before changing gears 281 Driving Automatic Steering into Parking Space Automatic steering is activated when you stop the vehicle remove your hands from the steering wheel and select the R Reverse gear Be sure the steering whe
12. of tasks on your work computer SA mp3 home computer and your in vehicle system V77 2 mp3 L_FJ mp3 doc 5 ppt xls In track mode the system will display and play the structure as if it were only one level deep all mp3 files will be played regardless of being in a specific folder In folder mode the system will only play the mp3 files in the current folder Satellite radio information if equipped Satellite radio channels SIRIUS broadcasts a variety of music news sports weather traffic and entertainment satellite radio channels For more information and a complete list of SIRIUS satellite radio channels visit www sirius com in the United States www sirius canada ca in Canada or call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Satellite radio reception factors To receive the satellite signal your vehicle has been equipped with a satellite radio antenna located on the roof of your vehicle The vehicle roof provides the best location for an unobstructed open view of the sky a requirement of a satellite radio system Like AM FM there are several factors that can affect satellite radio reception performance e Antenna obstructions For optimal reception performance keep the antenna clear of snow and ice build up and keep luggage and other material as far away from the antenna as possible 43 Entertainment Systems Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings bridges tunnels freeway overpasse
13. pT 8 mph 190 kv P80 mph 210 kwh pW 68 mph 27D kwh pK 186 mph 299 kv E k Note For tires with a maximum speed capability over 149 mph 240 km h tire manufacturers sometimes use the letters ZR For those with a maximum speed capability over 186 mph 299 km h tire manufacturers always use the letters ZR 8 U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This information is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall 9 M S or M S Mud and Snow or AT All Terrain or AS All Season 10 Tire Ply Composition and Material Used Indicates the number of plies or the number of layers of rubber coated fabric in the tire tread and sidewall Tire manufacturers also must indicate the ply materials in the tire and the sidewall which include steel nylon polyester and others 11 Maximum Load Indicates the maximum load in kilograms and pounds that can be carried by the tire Refer to the Safety Compliance Certificat
14. see Motorcraft parts Passenger Occupant Classification Sensor 00 Power adjustable foot pedals Power distribution box see Fuses Power door locks Power liftgate Power mirrors Power point oo eee eeeeeeeeeeeeeeees Power steering fluid checking and adding fluid refill capacity fluid specifications 0 Power Windows ccecce R Radio 6 CD in dash Rear heated seats Rear seat entertainment SYSTEM seiirt pucri kaneis Rear view camera system 104 Index Recommendations for attaching safety restraints for Child EN sssersrersscsiesssressenraines 201 REMISEralOl soningen ese 97 REIASA 294 Remote entry system 132 133 illuminated entry eee 137 locking unlocking GOONS 2t 6 3 EN 133 134 opening the trunk 134 panie Alari xe ssssshaessceseieeeestaaess 135 replacement additional TVANSMUUCETS 0 eect ees 136 replacing the batteries 136 Reverse sensing system 276 Roadside assistance 66 292 ROOF TACK so 2 3 si essede Gectecteeasesnes 125 S Safety belts see Safety restraints susiseirss 171 175 179 Safety Canopy ccee 193 195 Safety defects reporting 333 Safety restraints 171 175 179 Belt Minder 0 0 180 extension assembly 179 TOP VAG UGS cisicccee ncaa eines tee 176 178 for CHUGT ED esccscicscet ety tts code nocks 199 Occupant Classificat
15. 130 km h Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when the vehicle speed has reached 80 mph 130 km h e Visual warnings are displayed followed by a chime when a preselected vehicle speed of 45 55 or 65 mph 75 90 or 105 km h is exceeded e The maximum volume of the audio system is limited to 45 MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED will be displayed in the radio or if equipped navigation screen when attempting to exceed the limited volume e The AdvanceTrac system cannot be turned off When this optional setting is on the MyKey user will not be able to deactivate the system Note It may be beneficial to deactivate the AdvanceTrac system if the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand Create a MyKey To program MyKey on one of the keys programmed to the vehicle insert the key that you want to make a MyKey into the ignition Turn the ignition on Use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CREATE MYKEY is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM MYKEY will be displayed 3 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until MARK THIS AS RESTRICTED is displayed 4 Wait until KEY RESTRICTED AT NEXT START is displayed MyKey is successfully programmed Make sure you label it so you can distinguish it from the Admin keys Note To program the optional settings go to step 2 in the Programming MyKey Optional Settings section If your ve
16. Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 387 9333 Online www lincolncanada com Additional assistance If you have questions or concerns or are unsatisfied with the service you are receiving follow these steps 1 Contact your Sales Representative or Service Advisor at your selling servicing authorized dealer 2 If your inquiry or concern remains unresolved contact the Sales Manager Service Manager or Customer Relations Manager 3 If you require assistance or clarification on Ford Motor Company policies please contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center In order to help you serve you better please have the following information available when contacting a Customer Relationship Center e Vehicle Identification Number VIN e Your telephone number home and business e The name of the authorized dealer and city where located e The vehicle s current odometer reading In some states you must directly notify Ford in writing before pursuing remedies under your state s warranty laws Ford is also allowed a final repair attempt in some states 328 Customer Assistance In the United States a warranty dispute must be submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE before taking action under the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or to the extent allowed by state law before pursuing replacement or repurchase remedies provided by certain state laws This dispute handling procedure is n
17. HOLD RESET TO CONFIRM CLEAR is displayed 4 Press and hold the RESET button for two seconds until ALL MYKEYS CLEARED is displayed 145 Locks and Security Check MyKey System Status The vehicle System Check will provide the status of the following MyKey parameters e MYKEY MILES This odometer only tracks mileage when a MyKey is used If mileage does not accumulate as expected then the MyKey is not being used by the intended user The only way to reset this odometer to zero is by disabling MyKey If this odometer is lower than the last time you checked then the MyKey system has been recently cleared MYKEY S PROGRAMMED Indicates how many MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect deletion of a MyKey e ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED Indicates how many Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle Can be used to detect if an additional spare key has been programmed to the vehicle Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for MyKey system warnings displays Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems MyKey is not compatible with non Ford approved aftermarket remote start systems If you choose to install a remote start system please see your authorized dealer for a Ford approved remote start system When using a Ford approved remote start system the default settings will recognize the remote start system as an additional Admin Key with its associated privileges
18. If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The driver should never use the headphones while driving the vehicle Using headphones may prevent the driver from hearing audible warnings such as horns or emergency sirens which could result in a crash causing serious injury Give your full attention to driving and to the road Wired headphone jacks on the FES Family Entertainment System are universal so you may purchase and use additional wired headphones for your system Plug them into the 3 5 mm headphone jack s located behind the trim covers on the face of each monitor These headphones will be active when in Dual Play mode To listen to the audio on wired headphones not included connect the wired headphones into the monitor headphone jacks Available wired headphone sources are limited to the sources available to whichever monitor is being listened to Adjust the volume using the volume control on the DVD system remote control Operation Single play Dual play Your DVD and audio system work together with the infrared headphones and wired headphones not included to allow the rear seat passengers to listen to the radio and other media sources over the headphones This enables the front and rear seat passengers to listen to a variety of sources a variety of ways Single Play Single play consists of all occupants in the vehicle listening
19. Perform the following steps to attach a child safety seat to the tether anchor 1 Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat Lift the head restraint to its full up position refer to Head restraints under Rear seats in this chapter Route the child safety seat tether strap over the back of the seat under the head restraint and between the head restraint posts Leave the head restraint in the full up position 2 Locate the correct anchor for the selected rear seating position e 2nd row bucket 40 40 211 Seating and Safety Restraints e 2nd row bench 60 40 T ait aT ae HE APU e 3rd row KJ Note The cargo tie downs at the rear edge of the floor are not tether anchors 7 wi i Ie 3 Clip the tether strap to the anchor as shown J If the tether strap is clipped incorrectly the child safety seat may not be retained properly in the event of a collision 4 Tighten the child safety seat tether strap according to the manufacturer s instructions If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a collision greatly increases If your child restraint system is equipped with a tether strap and the child restraint manufacturer recommends its use Ford also recommends its use 212 Seating and Safety Restraints Child booster se
20. Vehicle power 3 7 15A Vehicle power 1 PCM power oe base engine only 20A Vehicle power 1 PCM power aoe EcoBoost only Vehicle power coils Heated mirrors Blower motor Rear wiper Starter 3rd row power seats Not used Front wiper relay Rear window defroster Not used Not used Auxiliary blower motor Trailer tow battery charge PE Nottused S Pi Notused SOS 301 4 4 4 37 38 39 40 41 42 43 44 45 46 8 9 50 51 52 53 54 55 56 57 58 59 Roadside Emergencies Fuse Relay Fuse Amp Protected Circuits Location Rating G8VA relay A C clutch 66 GVA relay Cartridge Fuses Mini Fuses CHANGING THE TIRES If you get a flat tire while driving do not apply the brake heavily Instead gradually decrease your speed Hold the steering wheel firmly and slowly move to a safe place on the side of the road Note The tire pressure monitoring system TPMS indicator light will illuminate when the spare tire is in use To restore the full functionality of the monitoring system all road wheels equipped with tire pressure monitoring sensors must be mounted on the vehicle Have a flat serviced by an authorized dealer in order to prevent damage to the TPMS sensors refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Replace the spare tire with a road tire as soon as possible During repairing or replacing of the flat tire have the authorized dealer inspect
21. WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the liftgate area before using power liftgate control In order to fully lower and latch the liftgate press the control twice If the liftgate stops mid travel it may have detected an obstacle Check to ensure the liftgate swing zone is free from obstruction and reset the power assist by manually closing the liftgate Normal operation can then be resumed WARNING Make sure the liftgate is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle 134 Locks and Security Car finder Press twice within three seconds The horn will chirp and the turn lamps will flash It is recommended that this method be used to locate your vehicle rather than using the panic alarm Sounding a panic alarm Press to activate the alarm The horn will sound and the turn lamps will flash for a maximum of three minutes Press again or turn the ignition to the on position to deactivate or wait for the alarm to time out in three minutes Note The panic alarm will only operate when the ignition is in the off position Memory seats power mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT allows you to recall the memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals feature Press to automatically move the s
22. You should program the remote start system as a MyKey in addition to the key that you have already programmed as a MyKey To program the remote start system as MyKey do the following 1 Enter the vehicle and close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using a remote start fob 3 Follow steps 1 4 in the Create a MyKey section Note For all vehicles the number of MYKEY S PROGRAMMED or ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED that is displayed in the MyKey System Status menus will include the remote start system as an additional key in the total count See the Check MyKey System Status section 146 Locks and Security Note For all vehicles with remote start installed it is possible to program all real keys as MyKeys in which case you will need to use your remote start system to reset all MyKeys as Admin keys by doing the following 1 Enter the vehicle close all doors 2 Remote start the vehicle using your remote start fob 3 Follow steps 1 4 in the Disable MyKey section Troubleshooting Potential Causes Can t create a MyKey Cannot program the MyKey optional settings e Key in the ignition is already a MyKey e Key in the ignition is the last remaining Admin key there always has to be at least one Admin key e SecuriLock Passive Anti Theft System is disabled or in unlimited mode e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to M
23. button up to two separate times to activate the door If the door does not activate press and hold the just trained HomeLink button and observe the indicator light e If the indicator light stays on constantly programming is complete and your device should activate when the HomeLink button is pressed and released e If the indicator light blinks rapidly for two seconds and then turns to a constant light continue with Programming Steps 4 through 6 to complete programming of a rolling code equipped device most commonly a garage door opener 4 At the garage door opener receiver motor head unit in the garage locate the learn or smart button usually near where the hanging antenna wire is attached to the unit 5 Firmly press and release the learn or smart button The name and color of the button may vary by manufacturer Note There are 30 seconds in which to initiate Step 6 6 Return to the vehicle and firmly press hold for two seconds and release the programmed HomeLink button Repeat the press hold release sequence again and depending on the brand of the garage door opener or other rolling code equipped device repeat this sequence a third time to complete the programming HomeLink should now activate your rolling code equipped device To program additional HomeLink buttons begin with Step 1 in this section For questions or comments please contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1
24. engine damage The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if the correct air filter element is not used MOTORCRAFT PART NUMBERS engine element For spark plug replacement see your authorized dealer Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the spark plugs Replace the spark plugs with ones that meet Ford material and design specifications for your vehicle such as Motorcraft or equivalent replacement parts The customer warranty may be void for any damage to the engine if such spark plugs are not used 378 Maintenance and Specifications V C6IOGN ISM TO OVIMGLAX V L6OTOCGIN dSM TO 06M08 AX NT eNODddN AT O 0T L X TE6GOIN VSYH S7TX JO p DX TV S9D9IN SSM 10 W G9O09IN SSM O T Wd UOTwIIVedGg pIo Joqumny Hed P10 yuesqnT Y qeay INOYJUAS OFT MGL TEGO seouno gT AVS PLIIGON JUBOTIQIVT y Y UNIW Id 06 M08 AVS o1JLIII0JON AMY PME ALd QUQ I JSULIL IamMog AMV CSTD SMES omy pequaseyymp oy s949 ping UOISSTUISUBI OTVEUIOING 0949 PINE UOISSTUISUBI OTJEUIOING siapulAd yoo soyoIry oyesyqy ue yun syoer yeas aseery sodmg YMW ea ae yore pooy yoye 100 C1L 6 zALV AT eNOOUdN sqyrenb OT ero101 0 16 8 stenb 76 queowqn y yoo pue SUTICIJOUIY JeIOIOOJN pI ayelg PUPA 1070W LOG VueLeuopq USH lJeII0 0W JT1OAI S I UO NIN pue xVJV Usemjog Ju jeamb sJILI9VdY
25. instrument panel once to power open or close the liftgate To power open or close the liftgate with the integrated keyhead transmitter Press 25 twice within three seconds to power open or close the liftgate Refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter To power open the liftgate with outside liftgate control button 1 To open unlock the liftgate with the integrated keyhead transmitter or power door unlock control 2 To open the liftgate push the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle Note For the best performance allow the power system to open the liftgate after pressing the control Manually pushing or pulling the liftgate may activate the system s obstacle detection feature and stop the power operation 122 Driver Controls To power close the liftgate with the rear cargo area control button Press and release the control on the left rear quarter panel to close the liftgate Note The rear cargo area control button is disabled when the liftgate is latched fully closed WARNING Keep clear of the liftgate when activating the rear switch Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second press of the instrument panel or the rear cargo area control buttons or a second double press of the integrated keyhead transmitter button To manually operate the liftgate
26. interior lamps Move the control to the full downward position past detent to turn off the interior lights The instrument panel switch lighting remains lit ooogg Comm Note If the battery is disconnected discharged or a new battery is installed the dimmer switch requires re calibration Rotate the dimmer switch from the full dim position to the full dome on position to reset This will ensure that your displays are visible under all lighting conditions AIMING THE HEADLAMPS The headlamps on your vehicle are properly aimed at the assembly plant If your vehicle has been in an accident the alignment of your headlamps should be checked by your authorized dealer 82 Lights Vertical aim adjustment 1 Park the vehicle directly in front of a wall or screen on a level surface approximately 25 feet 7 6 meters away e 1 8 feet 2 4 meters e 2 Center height of lamp to ground e 3 25 feet 7 6 meters e 4 Horizontal reference line 2 Measure the height of the headlamp bulb center from the ground and mark an 8 foot 2 4 meter horizontal reference line on the vertical wall or screen at this height a piece of masking tape works well 3 Turn on the headlamps to illuminate the wall or screen and open the hood To see a clearer light pattern for adjusting you may want to block the light from one headlamp while adjusting the other 4 There is a distinct cut off change from light to
27. vehicle increasing the risk of personal injury or property damage Activation of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system is an indication that at least some of the tires have exceeded their ability to grip the road this could reduce the operator s ability to control the vehicle potentially resulting in a loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death If your AdvanceTrac with RSC system activates SLOW DOWN 262 Driving WARNING If a failure has been detected within the AdvanceTrac with RSC system the sliding car icon R will illuminate steadily and you may hear a chime If equipped with a message center the vehicle will also indicate a failure with the Brake system have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately Operating your vehicle with AdvanceTrac with RSC disabled could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Your vehicle is equipped with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system The AdvanceTrac with RSC system provides the following stability enhancement features for certain driving situations e Traction Control TCS which functions to help avoid drive wheel spin and loss of traction e Electronic Stability Control ESC which functions to help avoid skids or lateral slides e Roll Stability Control RSC which functions to help avoid a vehicle roll over The AdvanceTrac with RSC system automatically enabl
28. 17 C in ambient temperature This lower pressure value may be detected by the TPMS as being significantly lower than the recommended inflation pressure and activate the TPMS warning for low tire pressure If the low tire pressure warning light is ON visually check each tire to verify that no tire is flat If one or more tires are flat repair as necessary Check air pressure in the road tires If any tire is under inflated carefully drive the vehicle to the nearest location where air can be added to the tires Inflate all the tires to the recommended inflation pressure 240 Tires Wheels and Loading SNOW TIRES AND CABLES CHAINS WARNING Snow tires must be the same size load index speed rating as those originally provided by Ford Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure The tires on your vehicle have all weather treads to provide traction in rain and snow However in some climates you may need to use snow tires and cables If you need to use cables it is recommended that steel wheels of the same size and specifications be used as cables may chip aluminum wheels Follow these guidelines when using snow tires an
29. ANY SNOILVOISIDAdS LONQAOYd JONVNALNIVIN pry oyeg 379 Maintenance and Specifications V GSdL6WSSM epeued V OT OAD SM V OT OA WIRY UOLO IdV Pue V 0E6OZW SSM 10 V 6Z60ZIN SSM JIEN UOTIBOYTIAID IdV pUe V OS60CIN SSM peuep GISH T OGMS OX0 epeue GIdST OGMG OX0 SM SAO 0ZMG OXe SM dSO 0ZMg OXe UOTIVIIIIdG pIo LOQUNNY Hed PIOA oursua jsooqooy TS CICE syrenb JST ursu 9 E CISZI syenb g gT gue ooD sUTsUy Users Ayetoods lfel01010 apeis AVISOOSIA To HVS Jedoid oy 103 deo qy po oulsua oy veg p epeued TO Jo OW IHOYJU S OGMG AVS YP1o10 0 epeurd T IOJOW wntutetg Jodn OG MG AVS eYe1o10 0 12 g syzenb e g 12g syrenb e g OG MS AVS elo100J SM TO 100W PucT orjeyqudS UNUI g OG MGS AVS Veso10 0 quoTeambea 10 OWIBN HLd PIOA Joyeoy IeaI YIM quejooo sUTsUuy outsue ysoogoog 9A TSE lo susug oursue 9A T E lo oulsuy 380 ions icat Maintenance and Speci SUNY 10 SuPpIeYo eas PMY IOJ Jofeep peztoyyne Mod 30g yrew Uey IdV 94 Puke V OS6OZIN SSM 10 V 6Z60ZIN SSM UOTeoBloeds prog JO syuowoImbor ayy Joour ATUO p u po urSuy ATOYEpULUT JOU ST IO 1OJOUL pu jq I YJU S IO IY YJU S JO SN gpTyea INOA ut p ddmb ATTeurst10 adAy quejoo 9U PPV aseulep UOISSTUIsURI SNLI ACUI prg popusUIWIODI y Ue 19470 ping Aue Jo oS BAIOJUL IOIAIOS 7991109 OY OUTULIDJOP 0 UOUYDVWUALOfUL BOUDUBJUYDU
30. As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds followed by three seconds with the light off then followed by the safety belt warning light flashing four times per second for three seconds again AIRBAG SUPPLEMENTAL RESTRAINT SYSTEM SRS The airbag supplemental restraint system SRS is designed to work in conjunction with the safety belts to help protect the driver and front outboard passenger from certain upper body injuries The term supplemental restraint means the airbags are intended as a supplement to the safety belts Airbags offer the most protection when used with safety belts for crash conditions for which airbags are designed to deploy Airbags do not offer any protection in crashes for which they do not deploy 184 Seating and Safety Restraints Important SRS precautions The SRS is designed to work with the safety belt to help protect the driver and right front passenger from certain upper body injuries Airbags DO NOT inflate slowly there is a risk of injury from a deploying airbag WARNING Do not place any object between an occupant and an airbag or near any other airbag covering The airbag may not inflate properly and might force an object into that person causing severe injury or death The instrument panel grab handle should never be used for storage The path of an
31. DVDs CDs MP8s and are compatible with Video CD HDCD Hybrid SACD play CD layer only SVCD DVD video JPEGs up to MPEG 4 files MP3 files and WMA media Please review this material to become familiar with the FES features and controls as well as the very important safety information 46 Entertainment Systems Quick start Your family entertainment system includes two headrest mounted DVD player screens two sets of wireless infrared IR headphones and a wireless infrared IR remote control capable of controlling either DVD player Both DVD players are capable of playing their own independent media or they can both watch the same media When in single play mode the headrest video sources that have been selected at each headrest will play through the speakers but no audio is available through the headphones To play a DVD 1 Insert a DVD into the system label side facing the rear passengers The disc slot indicator lights will illuminate The system will automatically load the disc and it will begin to play LOADING will appear in the screen 2 If there is already a disc in the system press the power button on the DVD system and then press Play to begin to play the disc 3 Use the bezel controls to play gt pause WIM gt stop CHB or eject 4 a DVD Press K4 to access the previous next chapter Press and hold for a fast reverse forward search Note The system goes into dual play mode when it is tu
32. Gf applicable When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel additional caution should be given to e Towing a trailer e Driving vehicles equipped with a camper body e Driving vehicles with a load on the cargo rack Drive cautiously when using a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel and seek service as soon as possible Stopping and securing the vehicle 1 Park on a level surface set the parking brake and activate hazard flashers 2 Place gearshift lever in P Park and turn engine off Removing the spare tire and jack If the 3rd row seat is stowed in the floor you will need to unstow it to access the spare tire and jack Refer to Unstowing the third row seat in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for this procedure 304 Roadside Emergencies 1 Remove the carpeted floor panel located in the rear of the vehicle remove the wing nut that secures the spare tire by turning it counterclockwise 2 Lift and remove the spare tire from the trunk 3 Remove the second wing nut that secures the jack retention bracket by turning it counterclockwise remove the jack kit from the vehicle 4 Remove the jack L shaped bolt and the wrench from the felt bag Fold down the wrench socket to use to loosen the lug nuts and to operate the jack Tire change procedure WARNING When one of the front wheels is off the ground the transaxle alone will not prevent the vehicle from moving or slipping
33. Guide that is provided to you along with your Owner s Guide 6 Introduction Special instructions For your added safety your vehicle is fitted with sophisticated electronic controls WARNING Please read the section Airbag Supplemental Restraint System SRS in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter Failure to follow the specific warnings and instructions could result in personal injury WARNING Front seat mounted rear facing child or infant seats should NEVER be placed in front of an active passenger airbag DATA RECORDING Service Data Recording Service data recorders in your vehicle are capable of collecting and storing diagnostic information about your vehicle This potentially includes information about the performance or status of various systems and modules in the vehicle such as engine throttle steering or brake systems In order to properly diagnose and service your vehicle Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada and service and repair facilities may access or share among them vehicle diagnostic information received through a direct connection to your vehicle when diagnosing or servicing your vehicle For U S only Gf equipped if you choose to use the SYNC Vehicle Health Report you consent that certain diagnostic information may also be accessed electronically by Ford Motor Company and Ford authorized service facilities and that the diagnostic information may be used for any purpose See your SYNC supplement
34. Press and hold to activate fast forward mode 2x 4x 8x 16x or 32x e kK Fast reverse previous Press to access the previous track or chapter Press and hold to activate fast reverse within a disc Press gt Play to resume normal playback speed and volume 50 Entertainment Systems 5 A t Headphones Speakers Press to activate dual play mode on either headrest system During dual play mode the following happens a Rear speakers turn off b Headphones become active on both headrest systems c Media sources become available through the DVD systems Note If the system is in dual play mode you must press the A 1 Headphones Speakers button on both headrest systems in order to return to single play For more information please refer to Single play Dual play later in this section 6 MEDIA for Monitor A In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B AM FM1 FM2 SR1 SR2 SR3 satellite radio if equipped Disc Jukebox if equipped SYNC if equipped The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor A is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and the USB port on the headrest system MEDIA for Monitor B In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor B is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and USB port
35. See your dealer Do not insert foreign objects into the DVD compartment WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised If wired headphones or auxiliary systems are used children may become entangled in the cords and seriously injure themselves WARNING The front glass on the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen may break when hit with a hard surface If the glass breaks do not touch the liquid crystalline material In case of contact with skin wash immediately with soap and water WARNING The driver should not attempt to operate any function of the DVD system while the vehicle is in motion Give full attention to driving and to the road Pull off the road in a safe place before inserting or extracting DVDs from the system A remote control is included in the system to allow the rear seat occupants to operate the FES functions without distracting the driver Do not expose the liquid crystal display LCD flip down screen to direct sunlight or intensive ultraviolet rays for extensive periods of time Ultraviolet rays deteriorate the liquid crystal Be sure to review User Manuals for video games and video game equipment when used as auxiliary inputs for your Family Entertainment System FES Do not operate video games or video equipment if the power cords and or cables are broken split or damaged Carefully place cords and or cables where they will not
36. Station overload When you pass a broadcast tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and play while the weak station frequency is displayed 40 Entertainment Systems CD CD player care Do e Handle discs by their edges only Never touch the playing surface Inspect discs before playing Clean only with an approved CD cleaner e Wipe discs from the center out Don t e Expose discs to direct sunlight or heat sources for extended periods of time e Clean using a circular motion CD units are designed to play commercially pressed 4 75 in 12 cm audio compact discs only Due to technical incompatibility certain recordable and re recordable compact discs may not function correctly when used in Ford CD players Do not use any irregular shaped CDs or discs with a scratch protection film attached 4 P 41 Entertainment Systems CDs with homemade paper adhesive labels should not be Oy inserted into the CD player as the label may peel and cause the gt Lp CD to become jammed It is recommended that homemade CDs be identified with permanent felt tip marker rather than adhesive labels Ballpoint pens may damage CDs Please contact your authorized dealer for further information Audio system warranty and service Refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for audio system warranty information If service is necessary see your dealer or qualified technician MP3 track
37. This feature allows you to select E h from different viewing angles that General Setup Page may be found on the disc This is a CRE ot disc dependent feature If the DVD SKINE 32 does not have this capability it will _ not be available itailano Note This is a disc dependent opece feature m To access iii 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press lt gt to highlight the monitor icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press v to select and enter the TV display menu 4 When Angle Mark is highlighted press B gt to access the menu 5 Press A V to select from all available angles 6 When the desired language is highlighted press ENTER on the remote to confirm the selection 61 Entertainment Systems Speaker setup This screen allows you to adjust the E w D audio balance for your speakers To Speaker Setup Pege access SS T T Stereo 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press lt q gt to highlight the speaker icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press v to select and enter the Speaker set up menu 4 When Downmix is highlighted press B gt to access the menu 5 Press A IV to select from left right and stereo 6 When the desired selection is highlighted press ENTER on the remote to confirm Video setup The video setup screen allow
38. To close the shade pull it toward the front of the vehicle UNIVERSAL GARAGE DOOR OPENER IF EQUIPPED The appearance of your vehicle s universal garage door opener will vary according to your option package Before programing make sure your transmitter matches the graphic in the procedure HomeLink Car2U Home Automation System 109 Driver Controls HomeLink Wireless Control System if equipped The HomeLink Wireless Control System located on the driver s visor provides a convenient way to 1A replace up to three hand held transmitters with a single built in O device This feature will learn the radio frequency codes of most transmitters to operate garage doors entry gate operators security systems entry door locks and home or office lighting WARNING When programming your HomeLink Wireless Control System to a garage door or gate be sure that people and objects are out of the way to prevent potential injury or damage Do not use the HomeLink Wireless Control System with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S federal safety standards this includes any garage door opener model manufactured before April 1 1982 A garage door which cannot detect an object signaling the door to stop and reverse does not meet current U S federal safety standards For more information contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Retain the ori
39. Troubleshooting 1 Do not connect the audio input jack to a line level output Line level outputs are intended for connection to a home stereo and are not compatible with the AIJ The AIJ will only work correctly with devices that have a headphone output with a volume control 2 Do not set the portable music player s volume level higher than is necessary to match the volume of the CD or FM radio in your audio system as this will cause distortion and will reduce sound quality Many portable music players have different output levels so not all players should be set at the same levels Some players will sound best at full volume and others will need to be set at a lower volume 3 If the music sounds distorted at lower listening levels turn the portable music player volume down If the problems persists replace or recharge the batteries in the portable music player 4 The portable music player must be controlled in the same manner when it is used with headphones as the AIJ does not provide control play pause etc over the attached portable music player 5 For safety reasons connecting or adjusting the settings on your portable music player should not be attempted while the vehicle is moving Also the portable music player should be stored in a secure location such as the center console or the glove box when the vehicle is in motion The audio extension cable must be long enough to allow the portable music player to be safely sto
40. U S and Canadian Markets Features or equipment listed as standard may be different on units built for Export Refer to this Owner s Guide for all other required information and warnings Introduction These are some of the symbols you may see on your vehicle Vehicle Symbol Glossary Safety Alert A N Fasten Safety Belt A Airbag Side fe Child Seat Tether on il Anchor Anti Lock Brake System Brake Fluid Non Petroleum Based Stability Control System gi EY Master Lighting Switch Af r Fog Lamps Front Fuel Pump Reset Vas Windshield GY Defrost Demist 10 See Owner s Guide Airbag Front Child Seat Lower Anchor Brake System Parking Brake System Parking Aid System Speed Control Hazard Warning Flasher Fuse Compartment Windshield Wash Wipe Rear Window Defrost Demist Introduction Vehicle Symbol Glossary Power Windows IES Power Window Lockout PAY Front Rear Child Safety Door M Interior Luggage Lock Unlock Compartment Release K P E Panic Alarm Engine Oil Engine Coolant Temperature E yr Engine Coolant BX Do Not Open When Hot Battery Avoid Smoking Flames or Sparks Battery Acid Explosive Gas Fan Warning Power Steering Fluid Maintain Correct Fluid COPO CH 8 D gt Lj Level Service Engine Soon Engine Air Filter Frits Compartment o gt Jack lt o Check Fuel Cap pS a ere 1i Instrument Cluster WARNING LIGHTS
41. a long load To fold the seatback 1 Move the seat as far back as possible 2 Press the head restraint release button and move the head restraint fully down 3 Put the seatback in the most upright position 4 Pull the strap located on the back of the seat to fold the front passenger seatback 5 Without releasing the pull strap push the seatback forward WARNING Cover sharp edges on the load and properly secure the load to prevent injury to occupants from shifting load during sudden stops WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 155 Seating and Safety Restraints Adjusting the front power seat if equipped A WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving A WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop A WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with
42. ambient temperature is between 22 F 30 C and 158 F 70 C Only use the sealing compound before the use by date The use by date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the sealant canister bottle Check the use by date regularly and replace the canister after four years Do not store the temporary mobility kit unsecured inside the passenger compartment of the vehicle as it may cause injury during a sudden stop or collision Always store the kit in its original location After sealant use the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer When inflating a tire or other objects use the black air hose only Do not use the transparent hose which is designed for sealant application only 311 Roadside Emergencies e Operating the temporary mobility kit could cause an electrical disturbance in radio and DVD player operation What to do when a tire is punctured A tire puncture within the tire s tread area can be repaired in two stages with the temporary mobility kit e In the first stage the tire will be reinflated with a sealing compound and air After the tire has been reinflated you will need to drive the vehicle a short distance approximately 4 miles 6 km to distribute the sealant in the tire e In the second stage you will need to check the tire pressure and adjust if necessary to the vehicle s tire inflation pressure First stage Reinflating the tire
43. an authorized dealer If the Safety Canopy is not replaced it will not function again which will increase the risk of injury in a future collision Determining if the system is operational The SRS uses a readiness light in the instrument cluster or a tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Airbag readiness section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required Any difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness airbag light same light as for front airbag system will either flash or stay lit e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the SRS serviced at your an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision or rollover event SOS Post Crash Alert System The system automatically flashes the turn signal lamps and sounds the horn three times at four second intervals in the event of a serious impact that deploys an airbag front side side curtain or Safety Canopy or the safety belt pretensioners The system can be turned off when any one of the following actions are taken by the driver or any other person e pressing the hazard control but
44. and a wire harness which allows the user to connect the system to a grounded 120 volt A C electrical source The block heater system is most effective when outdoor temperatures reach below 0 F 18 C WARNING Failure to follow engine block heater instructions could result in property damage or physical injury 258 Driving WARNING To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Prior to using the engine block heater follow these recommendations for proper and safe operation e For your safety use an outdoor extension cord that is product certified by Underwriter s Laboratory UL or Canadian Standards Association CSA Use only an extension cord that can be used outdoors in cold temperatures and is clearly marked Suitable for Use with Outdoor Appliances Never use an indoor extension cord outdoors it could result in an electric shock or fire hazard e Use a 16 gauge outdoor extension cord minimum e Use as short an extension cord as possible e Do not use multiple extension cords Instead use one extension cord which is long enough to reach from the engine block heater cord to the outlet without stretching e Make certain that the extension cord is in excellent condition not patched or spliced Store your extension cord indoors at temperatures above 32 F 0 C Outdoor conditions can deteriorate extension cords over a perio
45. and any door is open 0O gt Turn signal Illuminates when the left or right turn signal or the hazard lights are turned on If the indicators flash faster check for a burned out bulb T D Key in ignition warning chime Sounds when the key is left in the ignition in the off or accessory position and the driver s door is opened 15 High beams Illuminates when the high beam headlamps are turned on Instrument Cluster Headlamps on warning chime Sounds when the headlamps or parking lamps are on the ignition is off the key is not in the ignition and the driver s door is opened Parking brake on chime Sounds when the parking brake is left on and the vehicle is driven If the warning stays on after the park brake is off contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Message center activation chime Sounds when some warning messages appear in the message center display for the first time Overspeed chime if equipped Sounds when the vehicle speed reaches 75 mph 120 km h or higher GAUGES Speedometer Indicates the current vehicle speed 16 Instrument Cluster Engine coolant temperature gauge Indicates engine coolant temperature At normal operating temperature the needle will be in the normal range between H and C If the needle moves close to the H range the engine is overheating For more information refer to Engine
46. are used to purchase gasoline or similar items or a second coded key on the same key chain may cause vehicle starting issues You need to prevent these objects from touching the coded IKT while starting the engine These objects will not cause damage to the coded IKT but may cause a momentary issue if they are too close to the IKT when starting the engine If a problem occurs turn the ignition off remove all objects on the key chain away from the coded IKT and restart the engine Note Do not leave a duplicate coded key in the vehicle Always take your keys and lock all doors when leaving the vehicle 140 Locks and Security Anti theft indicator The anti theft indicator is located in the instrument panel cluster e When the ignition is in the off AN position the indicator will flash once every two seconds to R indicate the SecuriLock system is functioning as a theft deterrent e When the ignition is in the on position the indicator will glow for three seconds to indicate normal system functionality If a problem occurs with the SecuriLock system the indicator will flash rapidly or glow steadily when the ignition is in the on position If this occurs turn the ignition off then back to on to make sure there was no electronic interference with the programmed key If the vehicle doesn t start try to start it with the 2nd programmed key and if successful contact your authorized dealership for key replacement If
47. be stepped on or interfere with the operation of seats and or compartments Disconnect video games and video equipment power cords and or cables when not in use Avoid touching auxiliary input jacks with your fingers Do not blow on them or allow them to get wet or dirty Do not clean any part of the DVD player with benzene lacquer thinner acetone or any other solvent 65 Entertainment Systems Federal Communication Commission FCC Compliance Changes or modifications not approved by Ford Lincoln Mercury could void user s authority to operate the equipment This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference and radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television reception which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to consult the dealer or an experienced radio TV technician for help Care and service of the DVD player Environmental extremes DVD players which are subjected to harsh environ
48. belt pretensioners front safety belt buckle sensors driver seat position sensor and front passenger sensing system In addition the RCM also monitors the restraints warning light in the instrument cluster A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The warning light will either flash or stay lit e The warning light will not iluminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and warning light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the Personal Safety System serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collision 174 Seating and Safety Restraints Safety belt precautions f WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips A WARNING To reduce the risk of injury make sure children sit where they can be properly restrained A WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING It is extremely dangerous to ride in a cargo area inside or outsid
49. common moderate severity impacts A higher energy level is used for the most severe impacts Refer to Airbag supplemental restraints SRS section in this chapter Front crash severity sensor The front crash severity sensor enhances the ability to detect the severity of an impact Positioned up front it provides valuable information early in the crash event on the severity of the impact This allows your Personal Safety System to distinguish between different levels of crash severity and modify the deployment strategy of the dual stage airbags and safety belt pretensioners 172 Seating and Safety Restraints Driver s seat position sensor The driver s seat position sensor allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the deployment level of the driver dual stage airbag based on seat position The system is designed to help protect smaller drivers sitting close to the driver airbag by providing a lower airbag output level Front passenger sensing system For airbags to do their job they must inflate with great force and this force can pose a potentially deadly risk to occupants that are very close to the airbag when it begins to inflate For some occupants this occurs because they are initially sitting very close to the airbag For other occupants this occurs when the occupant is not properly restrained by safety belts or child safety seats and they move forward during pre crash braking The most effective way to reduce the r
50. e The Federal Communications Commission FCC and Canadian Radio Telecommunications Commission CRTC regulate the use of mobile communications systems such as two way radios telephones and theft alarms that are equipped with radio transmitters Any such equipment installed in your vehicle should comply with FCC or CRTC regulations and should be installed only by a qualified service technician e Mobile communications systems may harm the operation of your vehicle particularly if they are not properly designed for automotive use e To avoid interference with other vehicle functions such as anti lock braking systems amateur radio users who install radios and antennas onto their vehicle should not locate the Amateur Radio Antennas in the area of the driver s side hood e Electrical or electronic accessories or components that are added to the vehicle by the authorized dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability 387 Ford Extended Service Plan FORD ESP EXTENDED SERVICE PLANS More than 30 million Ford Lincoln and Mercury owners have discovered the powerful protection of Ford ESP It is the only extended service plan backed by Ford Motor Company and provides peace of mind protection beyond the New Vehicle Limited Warranty coverage Up to 500 Covered Vehicle Components There are four new vehicle Extended Service Plans with different levels of coverage Ask you dealer for details
51. economy Transmission operates in gears one through six 271 Driving D Drive with Grade Assist Pressing the transmission control switch on the side of the gearshift lever activates Grade Assist and cancels Overdrive Grade Assist e Provides additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs for hilly terrain or mountainous areas e Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed e Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above This will increase engine RPM during engine braking e The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated L2 Grade Assist is designed to aid the oo driver with optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas but is not intended for normal operation It is recommended that you return to O D overdrive mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function To return to normal D position with O D press the transmission control switch again e The Grade Assist lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated e The transmission will operate in gears one through six L Low e Provides maximum engine braking e Will downshift to the lowest available gear for the current vehi
52. for more information Event Data Recording Other modules in your vehicle event data recorders are capable of collecting and storing data during a crash or near crash event The recorded information may assist in the investigation of such an event The modules may record information about both the vehicle and the occupants potentially including information such as e how various systems in your vehicle were operating e whether or not the driver and passenger seatbelts were buckled e how far if at all the driver was depressing the accelerator and or the brake pedal Introduction e how fast the vehicle was traveling e where the driver was positioning the steering wheel and e longitude and latitude of vehicle at last location using GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors To access this information special equipment must be directly connected to the recording modules Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada do not access event data recorder information without obtaining consent unless pursuant to court order or where required by law enforcement other government authorities or other third parties acting with lawful authority Other parties may seek to access the information independently of Ford Motor Company and Ford of Canada To the extent that any law pertaining to Event Data Recording applies to SYNC or its features please note the following Once 911 Assist if equipped is enabled set ON 911 Assist ma
53. for more information 13 g Front fan speed control Press to decrease the fan speed for the front climate area 14 Q Rear climate system power Press to activate deactivate the rear climate control system 15 REAR CTRL Press to change control of the rear climate system from the front to the rear controls 16 TEMP Rear temperature control Press to decrease the temperature for the rear climate area 17 TEMP Rear temperature control Press to increase the temperature for the rear climate area 18 Rear fan speed control Press to decrease the fan speed for the rear climate area 19 Rear fan speed control Press to increase the fan speed for the rear climate area 73 Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMATIC TEMPERATURE CONTROL NAVIGATION BASED IF EQUIPPED CLIMATE a S lo weap exe S Ja T NU m fees Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 1 Climate Press to control the climate control system through the touch display screen See Touchscreen functions later in this section 2 7G Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information If your vehicle is equipped with heated mirrors the same button will activate both 3 A C Press to ac
54. free of objects before unstowing it A fr A A Zi l E A 1 Unlatch and lift the seat out of the tub in the floor by squeezing and pulling up on the handle Once the seat is at a vertical position push the seat over letting it fall onto the latches 169 Seating and Safety Restraints 2 To return the seatback to upright position pull the number 1 strap then while holding the number 1 strap pull the long strap located on the seatback to raise the seatback 3 Pull the head restraints up to Op I their normal adjusted positions v WARNING Ensure seat is latched to vehicle floor by pushing pulling on seat If not latched the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Third row seat tailgate mode 1 Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub 2 Stow the head restraints by pressing the head restraint release button while sliding the head restraints fully down 170 Seating and Safety Restraints 3 From the rear of the vehicle tumble the seat by pulling the number 2 strap while pulling on the strap located on the top of the sea
55. fuel in the empty reserve varies and should not be relied upon to increase driving range When refueling your vehicle after the fuel gauge indicates empty you might not be able to refuel the full amount of the advertised capacity of the fuel tank due to the empty reserve still present in the tank For consistent results when filling the fuel tank e Turn the engine ignition switch to the off position prior to refueling an error in the reading will result if the engine is left running e Use the same filling rate setting dow medium high each time the tank is filled e Allow no more than two automatic click offs when filling e Always use fuel with the recommended octane rating e Use a known quality gasoline preferably a national brand e Use the same side of the same pump and have the vehicle facing the same direction each time you fill up e Have the vehicle loading and distribution the same every time Your results will be most accurate if your filling method is consistent Calculating fuel economy 1 Fill the fuel tank completely and record the initial odometer reading in miles or kilometers 2 Each time you fill the tank record the amount of fuel added in gallons or liters 3 After at least three to five tank fill ups fill the fuel tank and record the current odometer reading 4 Subtract your initial odometer reading from the current odometer reading 5 Follow one of the simple calculations in order to
56. h increments e Use the accelerator pedal to get to the desired speed then press and release SET Reducing speed while using speed control To reduce a set speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap down function Press and release SET to decrease the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km h increments Press the brake pedal until the desired vehicle speed is reached then press SET Turning off speed control To turn off the speed control Press OFF or turn off the ignition Note When you turn off the speed control or the ignition your speed control set speed memory is erased STEERING WHEEL CONTROLS IF EQUIPPED Radio control features VOL Volume Press to increase the volume VOL Volume Press to decrease the volume aa P Seek Press to select the previous next radio station preset CD track or satellite radio channel preset depending on which media mode you are in 106 Driver Controls MEDIA Press repeatedly to select e AM FM1 FM2 or CD e DVD FES if equipped e SAT1 SAT2 or SAT3 Satellite radio mode if equipped e LINE IN Auxiliary input jack Navigation system hands free control features if equipped Press and hold m control briefly until the voice mg icon appears on the navigation display to use the voice command feature Press ug to complete a voice command For further in
57. ignition switch is in the off position e The driver and front passenger safety belts are unbuckled WARNING While the design allows you to deactivate your Belt Minder this system is designed to improve your chances of being safely belted and surviving an accident We recommend you leave the Belt Minder system activated for yourself and others who may use the vehicle To reduce the risk of injury do not deactivate activate the Belt Minder feature while driving the vehicle 1 Turn the ignition switch to the on position DO NOT START THE ENGINE 2 Wait until the safety belt warning light turns off Approximately one minute 183 Seating and Safety Restraints 3 Wait 10 seconds after the safety belt warning light turns off e Step 4 must be completed within 20 seconds after the completion of Step 3 4 For the seating position being disabled buckle then unbuckle the safety belt three times at a moderate speed ending in the unbuckled state e After Step 4 the safety belt warning light will be turned on for three seconds 5 Within approximately seven seconds of the light turning off buckle then unbuckle the safety belt e This will disable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently enabled As confirmation the safety belt warning light will flash four times per second for three seconds e This will enable the Belt Minder feature for that seating position if it is currently disabled
58. inflating airbag must be kept clear at all times WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always properly wear their safety belts even when an air bag supplemental restraint system SRS is provided WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position WARNING The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA recommends a minimum distance of at least 10 inches 25 cm between an occupant s chest and the driver airbag module WARNING Never place your arm over the air bag module as a deploying air bag can result in serious arm fractures or other injuries 185 Seating and Safety Restraints To properly position yourself away from the airbag e Move your seat to the rear as far as you can while still reaching the pedals comfortably e Recline the seat slightly one or two degrees from the upright position WARNING Do not put anything on or over the air bag module Placing objects on or over the air bag inflation area may cause those objects to be propelled by the air bag into your face and torso causing serious injury WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag supplemental restraint systems or its fuses See your authorized dealer WARNING Modifying or adding equipment to the front end of the vehicle Gncluding frame bumper front end body structure and tow hooks may affect the performance of the ai
59. is located in the center console storage area To activate press and release the control to cycle through the color choices plus the off state The lights come on whenever the ignition is in either the on or accessory position 85 Lights Note The ambient lights will stay on until the ignition is placed in the off position and either of the front doors are opened or the accessory delay timer expires BULB REPLACEMENT Lamp assembly condensation Exterior lamps are vented to accommodate normal changes in pressure Condensation can be a natural by product of this design When moist air enters the lamp assembly through the vents there is a possibility that condensation can occur when the temperature is cold When normal condensation occurs a thin film of mist can form on the interior of the lens The thin mist eventually clears and exits through the vents during normal operation Clearing time may take as long as 48 hours under dry weather conditions Examples of acceptable condensation are e Presence of thin mist no streaks drip marks or droplets e Fine mist covers less than 50 of the lens Examples of unacceptable moisture usually caused by a lamp water leak are e Water puddle inside the lamp e Large water droplets drip marks or streaks present on the interior of the lens Take your vehicle to dealer for service if any of the above conditions of unacceptable moisture are present Using the right bulbs Rep
60. left most button to the garage door the center button to a security device and the right most button to another garage door opener 116 Driver Controls Note The Car2U system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it is necessary to erase the current settings using the Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons procedure and then programming all of the devices being used Fixed code programming Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter 1 To program units with fixed code DIP switches you will need the garage door hand held transmitter paper and a pen or pencil 2 Open the battery cover and record the switch settings from left to right for all 8 to 12 switches Use the figure below When a switch is in the up on or position circle L When a switch is in the middle neutral or 0 position circle M When a switch is in the down off or position circle R 45 6 7 8 9 10 11 12 i p o a a jes a L m lM L L ea ena an Ear Up onor on or PL LL 56 7 89 10 1 PL EL etute tutes pet fff fr fr a a PRU RTR TR T RT RT RTR I 12 M Down off or R R R L left M middle R right 117
61. light stays illuminated or continues to flash a malfunction has been detected have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Normal braking is still functional unless the brake warning light also is illuminated 13 Instrument Cluster Airbag readiness If this light fails ee J to illuminate when the ignition is turned to on continues to flash or IN remains on have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer A chime will sound if there is a malfunction in the indicator light Safety belt Reminds you to fasten your safety belt A Belt Minder chime will also sound to remind you to fasten your safety belt Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter to activate deactivate the Belt Minder chime feature Charging system luminates when the battery is not charging properly If it stays on while the engine is running there may be a malfunction with the charging system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible This indicates a problem with the electrical system or a related component Engine oil pressure lluminates when the oil pressure falls below the TA normal range refer to Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Engine coolant temperature E Iluminates when the engine coolant ad Sag temperature is high Stop the vehicle as soon as possible switch off the engine and let cool Refer to Engine coolant in the Maintenance and Speci
62. loaded discs Press and hold A The system will eject all discs and prompt you when to remove them 31 Entertainment Systems SEEK Press SEEK P to a access the previous next track I lt SEEK gt l CAT Category FOLD Folder CAT FOLD In MP3 mode only Press CAT FOLD and then press SEEK P to access the previous next folder SCAN Press for a brief sampling of all tracks on the current disc or Jo MP3 folder DIRECT j DIREC In CD mode Press DIRECT The sii display will read DIRECT TRACK MODE SELECT TRACK Enter the desired track number using the memory preset buttons 0 9 The system will then begin playing that track In MP3 folder mode Press DIRECT and the memory preset buttons 0 9 of the desired folder The system will advance to that specific folder TEXT TEXT In MP3 mode only Press TEXT repeatedly to view Album AL Folder FL Song SO and Artist AR in the display if available In TEXT MODE Sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the lt gt indicator is active press TEXT and then press SEEK gt to view the additional display text COMPRESSION Press MENU repeatedly until COMPRESSION ON OFF appears in the display Use d SEEK gt to switch between ON OFF When COMPRESSION is ON the system will bring the soft and loud CD passages together for a more consistent listening level SHUFFLE Press MENU re
63. long as the malfunction exists When the malfunction indicator is illuminated the system may not be able to detect or signal low tire pressure as intended TPMS malfunctions may occur for a variety of reasons including the installation of replacement or alternate tires or wheels on the vehicle that prevent the TPMS from functioning properly Always check the TPMS malfunction telltale after replacing one or more tires or wheels on your vehicle to ensure that the replacement or alternate tires and wheels allow the TPMS to continue to function properly 236 Tires Wheels and Loading The Tire Pressure Monitoring System complies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation WARNING The Tire Pressure Monitoring System is NOT a substitute for manually checking tire pressure The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using a tire gauge see Inflating your tires in this chapter Failure to properly maintain your tire pressure could increase the risk of tire failure loss of control vehicle rollover and personal injury Changing tires with TPMS Each road tire is equipped with a tire pressure sensor fastened to the inside rim of the wheel The pressure sensor is covered by
64. lubricants fluids and service parts conforming to specifications Motorcraft parts are designed and built to provide the best performance in your vehicle PRECAUTIONS WHEN SERVICING YOUR VEHICLE e Do not work on a hot engine e Make sure that nothing gets caught in moving parts e Do not work on a vehicle with the engine running in an enclosed space unless you are sure you have enough ventilation e Keep all open flames and other burning material such as cigarettes away from the battery and all fuel related parts Working with the engine off 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Turn off the engine and remove the key 3 Block the wheels Working with the engine on 1 Set the parking brake and shift to P Park 2 Block the wheels WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 343 Maintenance and Specifications OPENING THE HOOD m gt 1 Inside the vehicle pull the hood release handle located under the bottom of the instrument panel near the steering column 2 Go to the front of the vehicle and release the auxiliary latch that is located under the front center of the hood 3 Lift the hood 344 Maintenance and Specifications IDENTIFYING COMPONENTS IN THE ENGINE COMPARTMENT 3 5L V6 engine Power steering fluid reservoir Engine cool
65. on the headrest system For further information please refer to Single play Dual play later in this section Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system T Q On Off Press to turn the system on off Power for headrest A is separate from headrest B Note This also disables dual play When both headrest systems are turned off the system will return to single play mode 8 Infrared receiver IR System sensor which reads the signals from the remote control and also sends audio signals to the infrared wireless headphones 9 LCD screen This seven inch liquid crystal display LCD screen can be adjusted for easier viewing by children Pull the top of the screen panel toward the viewer at the IR receiver transmitter cover for a better viewing angle The screen is hinged at the bottom and pivots to face downward Push the screen back in place until it latches to return it to a stowed position Note Ensure that you do not pull the LCD screen too far forward as it can cause damage 10 CD DVD slot Insert the disc label side facing the rear passengers 51 Entertainment Systems Remote control Unless otherwise stated all operations can be carried out with the remote control Always point the remote control directly at the player Ensure that there are no obstructions between the remote and player Press the MON A B control to select either Monitor A or
66. overheating and possible engine damage Recycled engine coolant Ford Motor Company does NOT recommend the use of recycled engine coolant since a Ford approved recycling process is not yet available Used engine coolant should be disposed of in an appropriate manner Follow your community s regulations and standards for recycling and disposing of automotive fluids Coolant refill capacity To find out how much fluid your vehicle s cooling system can hold refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Fill your engine coolant reservoir as outlined in Adding engine coolant in this section Severe climates If you drive in extremely cold climates less than 34 F 386 C e It may be necessary to increase the coolant concentration above 50 357 Maintenance and Specifications e NEVER increase the coolant concentration above 60 e Increased engine coolant concentrations above 60 will decrease the overheat protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate freeze protection at the temperatures in which you drive in the winter months If you drive in extremely hot climates e It is still necessary to maintain the coolant concentration above 40 e NEVER decrease the coolant concentration below 40 e Decreased engine coolant concentration
67. pavement You may lose control if you do not slow down or if you turn the steering wheel too sharply or abruptly e It often may be less risky to strike small objects such as highway reflectors with minor damage to your vehicle rather than attempt a 286 Driving sudden return to the pavement which could cause the vehicle to slide sideways out of control or rollover Remember your safety and the safety of others should be your primary concern If your vehicle gets stuck If your vehicle gets stuck in mud or snow it may be rocked out by shifting between forward and reverse gears stopping between shifts in a steady pattern Press lightly on the accelerator in each gear If your vehicle is equipped with Traction Control it may be beneficial to disengage the Traction Control system while attempting to rock the vehicle Do not rock the vehicle if the engine is not at normal operating temperature or damage to the transmission may occur Do not rock the vehicle for more than a few minutes or damage to the transmission and tires may occur or the engine may overheat WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer WARNING Do not spin the w
68. reached by their website www helminc com Citems in this catalog may be purchased by credit card check or money order Obtaining a French Owner s Guide French Owner s Guides can be obtained from your authorized dealer or by writing to Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited Service Publications CHQ202 The Canadian Road P O Box 2000 Oakville ON Canada L6J 5E4 332 Customer Assistance REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS U S ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you should immediately inform the National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA in addition to notifying Ford Motor Company If NHTSA receives similar complaints it may open an investigation and if it finds that a safety defect exists in a group of vehicles it may order a recall and remedy campaign However NHTSA cannot become involved in individual problems between you your dealer or Ford Motor Company To contact NHTSA you may call the Vehicle Safety Hotline toll free at 1 888 327 4236 TTY 1 800 424 9153 go to hitp jwww safercar gov or write to Administrator 1200 New Jersey Avenue Southeast Washington D C 20590 You can also obtain other information about motor vehicle safety from http www safercar gov REPORTING SAFETY DEFECTS CANADA ONLY If you believe that your vehicle has a defect which could cause a crash or could cause injury or death you sh
69. relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty Driving on slippery surfaces with AWD vehicles AWD vehicles are specially equipped for driving on sand snow mud and rough roads and have operating characteristics that are somewhat different from conventional vehicles both on and off the highway When driving at slow speeds off highway under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible A lower gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Basic operating principles e Drive slower in strong crosswinds which can affect the normal steering characteristics of your vehicle e Be extremely careful when driving on pavement made slippery by loose sand water gravel snow or ice If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement e If your vehicle goes off the edge of the pavement slow down but avoid severe brake application ease the vehicle back onto the pavement only after reducing your speed Do not turn the steering wheel too sharply while returning to the road surface e It may be safer to stay on the apron or shoulder of the road and slow down gradually before returning to the
70. signal is changed every time your remote control garage door opener is used e Fixed code garage door openers were produced prior to 1996 Fixed code uses the same coded signal every time It is manually programmed by setting DIP switches for a unique personal code 114 Driver Controls If you do not know if your garage door opener is a rolling code or fixed code device open your garage door opener s remote control battery cover If a panel of DIP switches is present your garage door opener is a fixed code device If not your garage door opener is a rolling code device Rolling code programming Note Programming the rolling code garage door opener involves time sensitive actions Read the entire procedure prior to beginning so you will know which actions are time sensitive If you do not follow the time sensitive actions the device will time out and you will have to repeat the procedure Note Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Make sure that your key is on and engine off while programming the transmitter NZ 1 Firmly press the two outer Car2U system buttons for 1 2 seconds then release 115 Driver Controls 2 Go to the garage to locate the garage door opener motor and its learn button You may need a ladder to reach the unit and you may need to remove the unit s cover or light lens to locate the learn button Press the learn button a
71. smell the burnt propellant This may consist of cornstarch talcum powder to lubricate the bag or sodium compounds e g baking soda that result from the combustion process that inflates the airbag Small amounts of sodium hydroxide may be present which may irritate the skin and eyes but none of the residue is toxic While the system is designed to help reduce serious injuries contact with a deploying airbag may also cause abrasions or swelling Temporary hearing loss is also a possibility as a result of the noise associated with a deploying airbag Because airbags must inflate rapidly and with considerable force there is the risk of death or serious injuries such as fractures facial and eye injuries or internal injuries particularly to occupants who are not properly restrained or are otherwise out of position at the time of airbag deployment Thus it is extremely important that occupants be properly restrained as far away from the airbag module as possible while maintaining vehicle control WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation 187 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the air bag has deployed the air bag will not function again and must be replaced immediately If the air bag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision The SRS consists of e driver and passenger airbag modules which include the inflato
72. swing out as you back into the space e The vehicle is not driven close enough to the parking space less than 60 inches 1 5 m from neighboring parked vehicles e The vehicle is driven too close to the side objects e g less than 16 inches 41 cm from neighboring parked vehicles e You may be driving in R Reverse APA can only look for a parking space while moving forward Why doesn t APA position the vehicle where I want in the space e The driver allows the vehicle to roll in the opposite direction of the transmission such as rolling forward when R Reverese gear is selected e You may be driving in R Reverse APA can only look for a parking space while moving forward e There may be an irregular curb along the parking space APA might not be able to align the vehicle to curbs that are damaged very shallow or covered with material such as debris leaves snow or tarps e The vehicles or objects bordering the space may not be positioned appropriately e The vehicle was steered more that usual while driving by the space APA performs best when you drive the same distance from the parking space the entire length of the space e The tires may not be installed and maintained correctly For example one or more tires may not be inflated correctly may not be of the same size or may not be authorized for use on this vehicle e The vehicle had a repair or alteration that is not authorized by the manufacturer 284 D
73. than those conditions could subject the vehicle to excessive stress which might result in damage which is not covered under your warranty For AWD vehicles a spare tire of a different size other that the tire provided should never be used A dissimilar spare tire size other than the spare tire provided or major dissimilar tire sized between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive WARNING Do not become overconfident in the ability of AWD vehicles Although a AWD vehicle may accelerate better than two wheel drive vehicle in low traction situations it won t stop any faster than two wheel drive vehicles Always drive at a safe speed How your vehicle differs from other vehicles Crossover vehicles can differ from some other vehicles in a few noticeable ways Your vehicle may be e Higher to allow higher load carrying capacity e Shorter to give it the capability to approach inclines All other things held equal a shorter wheelbase may make your vehicle quicker to respond to steering inputs than a vehicle with a longer wheelbase e Narrower to provide greater maneuverability in tight spaces As a result of the above dimensional differences crossover vehicles often will have a higher center of gravity and a greater difference in center of gravity between the loaded and unloaded condition These differences that make your vehicle so
74. the engine oil level dipstick OOOO KX lt _ ORRI 6 Wipe the dipstick clean Insert the dipstick fully then remove it again e If the oil level is within this range the oil level is acceptable DO NOT ADD OIL 349 Maintenance and Specifications mark engine oil must be added to raise the level within the If the oil level is below this normal operating range M5555 BRVI O If required add engine oil to the engine Refer to Adding engine owl in this chapter with oil Oil levels above this mark may cause engine damage If the engine is lt JA overfilled some oil must be removed from the engine by an authorized dealer 7 Put the dipstick back in and ensure it is fully seated e Do not overfill the engine Adding engine oil 1 Check the engine oil For instructions refer to Checking the engine oil in this chapter 2 If the engine oil level is not within the normal operating range add only certified engine oil of the recommended viscosity Remove the engine oil filler cap and use a funnel to pour the engine oil into the opening 3 Recheck the engine oil level Make sure the oil level is not above the normal operating range on the engine oil level dipstick 4 Install the dipstick and ensure it is fully seated 5 Fully install the engine oil filler cap by turning the filler cap clockwise until it stops To avoid possible oil loss DO NOT op
75. the batteries use two new batteries alkaline recommended and install them with the correct orientation as indicated in the battery housing Replace the cover and thread the screw Fold flat feature In addition to headband adjustment your new wireless headphones will lock into position when being used and they can also fold flat feature for ease of storage Simply rotate each earpiece until they lock into position or fold flat To operate the headphones e Press POWER on the ear piece to turn on the headphones A red indicator light will illuminate indicating the headphones are ON Press POWER again to turn the headphones off Adjust the headphones to comfortably fit your head using the headband adjustment Select the desired audio source Channel Monitor A or B for each set of wireless headphones by using the A B selection switch on the ear piece Adjust the volume control to the desired listening level 56 Entertainment Systems Ensure that the headphones are turned off when not in use After approximately one minute of not being in use no infrared signal is received the wireless headphones will automatically turn off They will also turn off after two hours of continuous use as a power save feature If this happens simply turn the headphones on again and continue use Wired headphones WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children operate the system while unsupervised
76. the indicator still flashes rapidly or glows steadily the vehicle will not start contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible for service Automatic arming The vehicle is armed immediately after switching the ignition to the off position The theft indicator will flash every A two seconds to act as a theft deterrent when the vehicle is f ni armed Automatic disarming The vehicle is disarmed immediately after the ignition is turned to the on position The theft indicator will illuminate for three seconds and then go out If the theft indicator stays on for an extended period of time or flashes rapidly contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Replacement Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKT and coded keys Note Your vehicle comes equipped with two Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle as well as a remote 141 Locks and Security keyless entry transmitter A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight keys can be IKTs with remote entry functionality If your IKTs or standard SecuriLock coded keys are lost or stolen and you don t have an extra coded key you will need to have your vehicle towed to an authorized dealer The key codes need to be erased from your vehicle and new coded keys will need to be programmed Replacing coded keys can be ve
77. the rearward side of the control to adjust softness Heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats e Press the control located on the a climate control system panel once to activate high heat 0 e Press twice to activate low heat e Press a third time to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated For low heat one light will be lit for high heat both lights will be lit 158 Seating and Safety Restraints Memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals if equipped This system allows automatic positi
78. three seconds but within 10 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position insert the second previously coded key into the ignition 5 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 6 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the second previously programmed coded key from the ignition 7 After three seconds but within 20 seconds of turning the ignition to the 1 off position and removing the previously programmed coded key insert the new unprogrammed key new key valet key into the ignition 8 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least six seconds 9 Remove the newly programmed coded key from the ignition If the key has been successfully programmed it will start the vehicle s engine and will operate the remote entry system if the new key is an Integrated Keyhead Transmitter The theft indicator light will illuminate for three seconds and then go out to indicate successful programming If the key was not successfully programmed it will not start your vehicle s engine and or will not operate the remote entry features The theft indicator light may flash on and off Wait 20 seconds and you may repeat Steps 1 through 8 If failure repeats bring your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the new key s progra
79. time and dark area use At night time or in dark areas the camera system relies on the reverse lamp lighting to produce an image Therefore it is necessary that both reverse lamps are operating in order to get a clear image in the dark If either of the lamps are not operating stop using the camera system at least in the dark until the lamp s are replaced and functioning Servicing e If the image comes on while the vehicle is not in R Reverse have the system inspected by your authorized dealer e If the image is not clear then check if there is anything covering the lens such as dirt mud ice snow etc If the image is still not clear after cleaning have your system inspected by your authorized dealer ACTIVE PARK ASSIST APA IF EQUIPPED Active Park Assist APA will detect an available parallel parking space and automatically steer the vehicle into the space hands free while you control the accelerator gearshift and brakes The system will visually and or audibly instruct the driver to park the vehicle WARNING This system is designed to be a supplementary park aid It may not work in all conditions and is not intended to replace the driver s attention and judgment The driver is responsible for avoiding hazards and maintaining a safe distance and speed even when the APA is in use Conditions in which the system may not work e Something passes between the front bumper and the space such as a pedestrian or cyclist
80. tire repair shop to have your tire inspected e Drive carefully and avoid abrupt steering maneuvers e Periodically monitor tire inflation pressure in the affected tire if the tire is losing pressure have the vehicle towed 310 Roadside Emergencies Read the information in the Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit section to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit and your vehicle Tips for use of the temporary mobility kit Read the following list of tips to ensure safe operation of the temporary mobility kit Before operating the temporary mobility kit make sure your vehicle is safely off the road and away from moving traffic Turn on the hazard lights Always set the parking brake to ensure the vehicle doesn t move unexpectedly Do not remove any foreign objects such as nails or screws from the tire When using the temporary mobility kit leave the engine running only if the vehicle is outdoors or in a well ventilated area so the compressor doesn t drain the vehicle s battery Do not allow the compressor to operate continuously for more than 15 minutes this will help prevent the compressor from overheating Never leave the temporary mobility kit unattended when it is operating Sealant compound contains latex Make sure that you use the non latex gloves provided to avoid an allergic reaction Keep the temporary mobility kit away from children Only use the temporary mobility kit when the
81. use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back When possible all children age 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position If all children cannot be seated and restrained properly in a rear seating position properly restrain the largest child in the front seat WARNING Always carefully follow the instructions and warnings provided by the manufacturer of any child restraint to determine if the restraint device is appropriate for your child s size height weight or age Follow the child restraint manufacturer s instructions and warnings provided for installation and use in conjunction with the instructions and warnings provided by the vehicle manufacturer A safety seat that is improperly installed or utilized is inappropriate for your child s height age or weight or does not properly fit the child may increase the risk of serious injury or death 201 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Never let a passenger hold a child on his or her lap while the vehicle is moving The passenger cannot protect the child from injury in a collision which may result in serious injury or death WARNING Never use pillows books or towels to boost a child They can slide around and increase the likelihood of injury or death in a collision WARNING Always restrain an unoccupied child seat or booster seat These objects may become projectiles in a collision or sudden
82. vehicle has been electronically locked before the driver door is opened Deactivating activating autounlock feature Your vehicle comes with the autounlock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature e Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock sequence e using a keypad procedure or e by using the instrument cluster message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 129 Locks and Security Note The autounlock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autolock feature Power door lock switch autounlock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times A 3 Turn the ignition from the on 2 ew position to the off position 4 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autounlock feature press the lock control then press the unlock control T
83. visor must be retracted before moving it back towards the windshield CLOCK IF EQUIPPED Press the right control to move the time display forwards Press the left control to move the time display backwards 93 Driver Controls OVERHEAD CONSOLE The appearance of your vehicle s overhead console will vary according to your option package Storage compartment The storage compartment may be used to store a pair of sunglasses Press the release area on the rear edge of the bin door to open the storage compartment The door will open to the full open position ELECTRONIC COMPASS The compass heading is displayed in the Center Integrated Display CID The compass reading may be affected when you drive near large buildings bridges power lines and powerful broadcast antenna Magnetic or metallic objects placed in on or near the vehicle may also affect compass accuracy Usually when something affects the compass readings the compass will correct itself after a few days of operating your vehicle in normal conditions If the compass still appears to be inaccurate a manual calibration may be necessary Refer to Compass calibration adjustment Most geographic areas zones have a magnetic north compass point that varies slightly from the northerly direction on maps This variation is four degrees between adjacent zones and will become noticeable as the vehicle cros
84. with caution The vehicle will not be able to maintain high speed operation and the engine will run rough Remember that the engine is capable of completely shutting down automatically to prevent engine damage therefore 1 Pull off the road as soon as safely possible and turn off the engine 2 Arrange for the vehicle to be taken to a service facility 3 If this is not possible wait a short period for the engine to cool 4 Check the coolant level and replenish if low WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot 5 Re start the engine and take your vehicle to a service facility Driving the vehicle without repairing the engine problem increases the chance of engine damage Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible 360 Maintenance and Specifications FUEL FILTER Your vehicle is equipped with a lifetime fuel filter that is integrated with the fuel tank Regular maintenance or replacement is not needed WHAT YOU SHOULD KNOW ABOUT AUTOMOTIVE FUELS fg Important safety precautions WARNING Do not overfill the fuel tank The pressure in an overfilled tank may cause leakage and lead to fuel spray and fire WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury WARNING A
85. your vehicle may be different from this example Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 T Indicates a type of tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for temporary service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks 2 145 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire x 1S4 09 OL ESA Wo 3gn ros 3 80 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width Numbers of 70 or lower indicate a short sidewall 4 D Indicates a diagonal type tire R Indicates a radial type tire 5 16 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter Location of the tire label You will find a Tire Label containing tire inflation pressure by tire size and other important information located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Refer to the payload description and graphic in the Vehicle loading with and without a trailer section 235 Tires Wheels and Loading TIRE PRESSURE MONITORING SYSTEM TPMS Each tire including the spare if provided should be checked monthly when cold and inflated to O the inflation pressure recommended by the vehicle manufacturer on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label If you
86. 0 With the ignition on the fog lamps can be turned on when the headlamp control is pulled toward you and is in any of the following positions e Parking lamps PS e Low beams gD e Autolamps when active wW The fog lamp indicator light will illuminate when the fog lamps have been turned on The fog lamps will not operate when the high beams are active High beams Push the lever toward the ap instrument panel to activate Pull the lever towards you to deactivate _ a WKS ee bw SES 1 Flash to pass Pull and release to activate 81 Lights Daytime running lamps DRL if equipped Turns the headlamps on with a reduced output To activate e the ignition must be in the on position e the headlamp control is in the off autolamps or parking lamp position and e the transmission must be out of the P Park position WARNING Always remember to turn on your headlamps at dusk or during inclement weather The Daytime Running Lamp DRL system does not activate the tail lamps and generally may not provide adequate lighting during these conditions Failure to activate your headlamps under these conditions may result in a collision PANEL DIMMER CONTROL Use to adjust the brightness of the instrument panel and all applicable switches in the vehicle during headlamp and parking lamp operation Move the control to the full upright position past detent to turn on the
87. 0 miles value from 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months to another value proceed to Step 3 20 OoOoONonnt amp WH Fe Instrument Cluster 3 Once OIL LIFE SET TO XXX is displayed release and press RESET to change the Oil Life Start Value Each release and press will reduce the value by 10 Note Oil life start value of 100 equals 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months For example setting oil life start value to 60 sets the oil life start value to 4 500 miles 7 200 km and 219 days UNITS Displays the current units in English or Metric Press RESET to change between English and Metric AUTOLAMP This feature keeps your headlights on for up to three minutes after the ignition is switched off Press RESET to select the new Autolamp delay values of 0 10 20 30 60 90 120 or 180 seconds AUTOLOCK This feature automatically locks all vehicle doors when the vehicle is shifted into any gear putting the vehicle in motion Press RESET to turn it off or on AUTOUNLOCK This feature automatically unlocks all vehicle doors when the driver s door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being turned off Press RESET to turn it off or on POWER LIFTGATE if equipped This feature allows users to open close the rear liftgate at the touch of a button Press RESET to turn it off or on EASY ENTRY This feature automatically moves the driver s seat backwards for easy exit entry from the vehic
88. 1 Disable the liftgate power function Refer to the Message center in this chapter 2 Open and close the liftgate as you would a standard liftgate Refer to Manual liftgate in this chapter Note In case of operation in extreme cold 40 F 40 C or on extreme inclines manual operation of the liftgate is suggested Obstacle detection The power liftgate system is equipped with an obstacle detection feature If the power liftgate is closing the system will reverse to full open when it detects an obstacle A chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected as the liftgate begins to reopen Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can be closed under power If the power liftgate is opening the system will stop and a chime will sound three times when an obstacle is detected Once the obstacle is removed the liftgate can again be operated normally Resetting the power liftgate The power liftgate may not operate properly and may need to be reset if any of these conditions occur e alow voltage or dead battery e disconnected battery 123 Driver Controls e the liftgate is manually closed and left ajar unlatched To reset the power liftgate 1 Disconnect the battery for 20 seconds then reconnect the battery 2 Manually close and fully latch the liftgate 3 Power open the liftgate by using the integrated keyhead transmitter or the instrument panel control button Note If the power liftgate system is turn
89. 3 Run the engine until it reaches normal operating temperature 4 Allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 5 Turn the A C on and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 6 Release the parking brake With your foot on the brake pedal and with the A C on put the vehicle in D Drive and allow the engine to idle for at least one minute 7 Drive the vehicle to complete the relearning process e The vehicle may need to be driven 10 miles 16 km or more to relearn the idle and fuel trim strategy e If you do not allow the engine to relearn its idle trim the idle quality of your vehicle may be adversely affected until the idle trim is eventually relearned If the battery has been disconnected or a new battery has been installed the clock and radio settings must be reset once the battery is reconnected 353 Maintenance and Specifications e Always dispose of automotive batteries in a responsible manner s S Follow your local authorized WY A standards for disposal Call your t local authorized recycling center to find out more about recycling automotive batteries RECYCLE ENGINE COOLANT Checking engine coolant The concentration and level of engine coolant should be checked at the intervals listed in scheduled maintenance information The coolant concentration should be maintained at 50 50 coolant and distilled water which equates to a freeze point of 34 F 86 C Coolant concentration testing
90. 47 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield During extreme high ambient temperatures when idling stationary for extended periods of time in gear it is recommended to run the A C in the MAX A C position turn off the rear A C unit if equipped reduce blower fan speed from the highest setting and put the vehicle s transmission into the P Park gear position to continue to receive cool air from your A C system For maximum cooling performance in the MAX A C mode e Press MAX A C e Adjust the temperature to the coldest setting e Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain passenger comfort For maximum cooling performance in the 7s and 7 modes e Adjust the temperature to the coldest setting e Press A C and recirculated air A to provide colder airflow e Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain passenger comfort To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select 2 Press A C 3 Adjust the temperature to the warmest setting 4 Set the fan speed to the highest setting 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows 70 Climate Controls DUAL ZONE AUTOMAT
91. 80 F 200 F 82 C 93 C on a level surface The normal operating temperature can be reached after approximately 20 miles 80 km of driving The transmission fluid should be C MIN within the cross hatch area if at normal operating temperature 180 F 200 F 82 C 93 C High fluid level Fluid levels above the safe range C MI may result in transmission failure An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage High fluid levels can be caused by an overheating condition Adjusting automatic transmission fluid levels Before adding any fluid make sure the correct type is used The type of fluid used is normally indicated on the dipstick and also in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter 375 Maintenance and Specifications Use of a non approved automatic transmission fluid may cause internal transmission component damage If necessary add fluid in 1 2 pint MIN MAX 250 ml increments through the filler tube until the level is correct 4 If an overfill occurs excess fluid MIN PO MAX SSS should be removed by an authorized a 25 dealer An overfill condition of transmission fluid may cause shift and or engagement concerns and or possible damage Do not use supplemental transmission fluid additives treatments or cleaning agents The use of these ma
92. 800 355 3515 111 Driver Controls Gate Operator amp Canadian Programming During programming your hand held transmitter may ey automatically stop transmitting not allowing enough time for HomeLink to accept the signal from the hand held transmitter After completing Step 1 outlined in the Programming section replace Step 2 with the following Note If programming a garage door opener or gate operator it is advised to unplug the device during the cycling process to prevent overheating e Continue to press and hold the HomeLink button note Step 2 in the Programming section while you press and release every two seconds cycle your hand held transmitter until the frequency signal has been accepted by the HomeLink The indicator light will flash slowly and then rapidly after HomeLink accepts the radio frequency signal e Proceed with Step 3 in the Programming section Operating the HomeLink Wireless Control System To operate simply press and release the appropriate HomeLink button Ae Activation will now occur for the trained product garage door gate operator security system entry door lock or home or office lighting etc For convenience the hand held transmitter of the device may also be used at any time In the event that there are still programming difficulties contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 112 Driver Controls Erasing Home
93. ABS and will increase your vehicle s stopping distance The ABS will be activated immediately allowing you to retain steering control during hard braking and on slippery surfaces However the ABS does not decrease stopping distance 260 Driving ABS warning lamp The ABS lamp in the instrument cluster momentarily illuminates when the ignition is turned on If the light does not illuminate during start up remains on or flashes the ABS is disabled due to a malfunction and needs to be serviced Even when the ABS is disabled normal braking is still effective If your BRAKE warning lamp illuminates with the parking brake BRAKE released have your brake system serviced immediately Parking brake P Apply the parking brake whenever the vehicle is parked To set the parking brake press the parking brake pedal down until the pedal stops The BRAKE warning lamp in the instrument cluster illuminates and remains illuminated when the ignition is turned on until the BRAKE parking brake is released WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure that the gearshift is securely latched in P Park The parking brake is not recommended to stop a moving vehicle However if the normal brakes fail the parking brake can be used to stop your vehicle in an emergency Since the parking brake applies only the rear brakes the vehicle s stopping distance will increase greatly and the handling of your vehi
94. AND CHIMES Warning lights and gauges can alert you to a vehicle condition that may become serious enough to cause extensive repairs A warning light may illuminate when a problem exists with one of your vehicle s functions Many lights will illuminate when you start your vehicle to make sure the bulbs work If any light remains on after starting the vehicle refer to the respective system warning light for additional information Service engine soon The service engine soon indicator light illuminates when the ignition is first turned to the on position to check the bulb and to indicate whether the vehicle is ready for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Normally the service engine soon light will stay on until the engine is cranked then turn itself off if no malfunctions are present However if after 15 seconds the service engine soon light blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing See the Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter Solid illumination after the engine is started indicates the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II has detected a malfunction Refer to On board diagnostics OBD II in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter If the light is blinking engine misfire is occurring which could damage your catalytic converter Drive in a moderate fashion avoid heavy acceleration and deceleration and have your vehicle servi
95. AP 330 Customer Assistance The CAMVAP program is a straight forward and relatively speedy alternative to resolve a disagreement when all other efforts to produce a settlement have failed This procedure is without cost to you and is designed to eliminate the need for lengthy and expensive legal proceedings In the CAMVAP program impartial third party arbitrators conduct hearings at mutually convenient times and places in an informal environment These impartial arbitrators review the positions of the parties make decisions and when appropriate render awards to resolve disputes CAMVAP decisions are fast fair and final as the arbitrator s award is binding both to you and Ford of Canada CAMVAP services are available in all territories and provinces For more information without charge or obligation call your CAMVAP Provincial Administrator directly at 1 800 207 0685 GETTING ASSISTANCE OUTSIDE THE U S AND CANADA Before exporting your vehicle to a foreign country contact the appropriate foreign embassy or consulate These officials can inform you of local vehicle registration regulations and where to find unleaded fuel If you cannot find unleaded fuel or can only get fuel with an anti knock index lower than is recommended for your vehicle contact a regional office or owner relations customer relationship office The use of leaded fuel in your vehicle without proper conversion may damage the effectiveness of your emissio
96. Action Required NO TEXT Category Category information not information not available at this time on available this channel The system is working properly NO SIGNAL Loss of signal from You are in a location that the SIRIUS satellite is blocking the SIRIUS or SIRIUS tower to signal i e tunnel under the vehicle antenna an overpass dense foliage etc The system is working properly When you move into an open area the signal should return UPDATING Update of channel No action required The programming in process may take up to progress three minutes CALL SIRIUS Satellite service has Call SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 been deactivated by 1 888 539 7474 to SIRIUS Satellite re activate or resolve Radio subscription issues FAMILY ENTERTAINMENT DVD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Your vehicle may be equipped with a Family Entertainment System FES which allows you to listen to audio CDs MP3 discs watch DVDs and to plug in and play a variety of standard video game systems The headrest mounted DVD players are capable of playing standard
97. BB AUTO LINE Application Using the information provided below please call or write to request a program application You will be asked for your name and address general information about your new vehicle information about your warranty concerns and any steps you have already taken to try to resolve them A Customer Claim Form will be mailed that will need to be completed signed and returned to the BBB along with proof of ownership Upon receipt the BBB will review the claim for eligibility under the Program Summary Guidelines You can get more information by calling BBB AUTO LINE at 1 800 955 5100 or writing to BBB AUTO LINE 4200 Wilson Boulevard Suite 800 Arlington Virginia 22203 1833 BBB AUTO LINE applications can also be requested by calling the Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center at 1 800 392 3673 Note Ford Motor Company reserves the right to change eligibility limitations modify procedures or to discontinue this process at any time without notice and without obligation UTILIZING THE MEDIATION ARBITRATION PROGRAM CANADA ONLY For vehicles delivered to authorized Canadian dealers In those cases where you continue to feel that the efforts by Ford of Canada and the authorized dealer to resolve a factory related vehicle service concern have been unsatisfactory Ford of Canada participates in an impartial third party mediation arbitration program administered by the Canadian Motor Vehicle Arbitration Plan CAMV
98. CD DVD status will display in the radio display OK Your vehicle may be equipped with special phone and media features which will require you to confirm commands by pressing OK Refer to the SYNC information included with your vehicle for further information PHONE If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC press to access SYNC PHONE features Refer to the SYNC information included with your vehicle for further information If your vehicle is not equipped with SYNC the display will read NO PHONE Audio system Navigation system based if equipped If your vehicle is equipped with the navigation system it will have an integrated navigation audio system See the Navigation system supplement for operating instructions on using this audio system Auxiliary input jack Line in WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 37 Entertainment Systems The Auxiliary Input Jack provides a way to connect your portable music player to the in vehicle audio system This allows the audio from a portable music player to be played through the vehicle speakers with high fidelity To achieve optimal pe
99. D PULL FORWARD if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information SPACE FOUND STOP if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information BACK UP USE CAUTION if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK FINISHED if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information REMOVE HANDS PUT IN REVERSE if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK NOT AVAILABLE if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK DEACTIVATED if equipped Displayed when the active park feature has been turned off Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more in
100. DESIGNATIONS You can find a transmission code on the Safety Compliance Certification MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO i DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG Label The follo wing table tells you FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB which transmission each code XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXXIX XXXXX TIRES XXXXXXXXXXX represents XXXXXX RIMS XXXX XX AT XXX kPaXX PSLCOLD 4f ATOXXX KPalXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WBTBRK INTTR TPS R AXLE SPR TXXXXX XXX X XX X X LX XX XxX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XX XXXX XXXXXXX XX 6F50 6 Speed Automatic Transmission 6F55 6 Speed Automatic Transmission with G EcoBoost 385 Accessories GENUINE FORD ACCESSORIES FOR YOUR VEHICLE A wide selection of Genuine Ford Accessories are available for your vehicle through your local Ford or Ford of Canada dealer These quality accessories have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and aerodynamic appearance of your vehicle In addition each accessory is made from high quality materials and meets or exceeds Ford s rigorous engineering and safety specifications Ford Motor Company will repair or replace any properly dealer installed Genuine Ford Accessories found to be defective
101. Driver Controls 3 To input these positions into the Car2U system simultaneously press all three Car2U system buttons for a few seconds and then release to put the device into programming mode The indicator lights will blink slowly Within 2 5 minutes enter your corresponding DIP switch settings from left to right into your Car2U system by pressing and releasing the buttons corresponding to the settings you circled 4 After inputting switch settings simultaneously press and release all three Car2U system buttons The indicator lights will turn on 5 Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the garage door O O O Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves During this time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Do not release the button until you see the garage door move Most garage doors open quickly You may need to hold the button from 5 55 seconds before observing movement of the garage door 6 The indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete If your garage door opener does not operate following these steps repeat Steps 2 through 6 Otherwise call the toll free Car2U help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the sele
102. IC TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH HEATED SEATS AND REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CLIMATE CONTROL IF EQUIPPED WR WP Wo AC AUTO D s h n QTO S JJ E G a ee a La e O 4 Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 1 s Front fan speed control Press to increase the fan speed for the front climate area 2 GW Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 3 lt 3 Manual override control Allows you to manually select where airflow is directed To return to full automatic control press AUTO When choosing to control airflow manually press repeatedly to choose a setting e Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging 71 Climate Controls e gt Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents e 2 Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor ven
103. L PaINpay Is 0 OJO PINT AT eNOOUAW OSN ATU pmmoys AT oNOQYAN etmMber Jey suoIsstusued Iewomy sosueyo ping sutmp Area Lew yunouwre jenjoy Apoedeo Ty Arp eyeurrxoiddy CV 9TISNW EISM i eeo ne p p u I ysSe T4SpUL V GE OZ Pan PPTP se ping Ho doy CT 702 pm I9USeM PPOSPUM Umud YeIoIOJOW IIOAIOSOI UO oursua A eNOOUdN ALV A eoNOOYUUN I NIW dibogaan yds WO S LX Je 91040 pue XVIN WOME omy SuLIEd ys 1OMOg cequny Weg p104 IO DUeN Med PIOA 381 Maintenance and Specifications ENGINE DATA Engine 3 5L V6 engine _ 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine See Octane See Octane Fuel recommendations recommendations earlier earlier in this chapter in this chapter 1 4 2 5 3 6 1 4 2 5 3 6 acne 0 052 0 056 inch 0 033 0 037 inch 838 si ead ced 1 32 1 42 mm 939 mm Coil on plug Coil on plug Compression 10 3 1 10 0 1 ratio Engine drivebelt routing 3 5L V6 engine 1 Short drivebelt is on first pulley groove closest to engine not applicable to vehicles with electric power assisted steering 2 Long drivebelt is on second pulley groove farthest from engine 382 Maintenance and Specifications 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine IDENTIFYING YOUR VEHICLE Safety Compliance Certification Label The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration Regulations require that a Safety Compliance Certification Label be affixed to a vehicle and prescribe where the Safety Compliance Certification La
104. Link buttons To erase the three programmed buttons individual buttons cannot ON be erased e Press and hold the two outer O HomeLink buttons until the indicator light begins to flash after 20 seconds Release both buttons Do not hold for longer that 30 seconds HomeLink is now in the train or learning mode and can be programmed at any time beginning with Step 1 in the Programming section Reprogramming a single HomeLink button To program a device to HomeLink using a HomeLink button previously trained follow these steps 1 Press and hold the desired HomeLink button Do NOT release the button 2 The indicator light will begin to flash after 20 seconds Without releasing the HomeLink button follow Step 1 in the Programming section For questions or comments contact HomeLink at www homelink com or 1 800 355 3515 Car2U Home Automation System if equipped The Car2U Home Automation System is a universal transmitter located in the driver s visor that O O includes two primary features a garage door opener and a platform for remote activation of devices within the home The Car2U system s garage door opener function replaces the common hand held garage door opener with a three button transmitter that is integrated into the interior of your vehicle After being programmed for garage doors the Car2U system transmitter can be programmed to operate security devi
105. Monitor B Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system Note Use the remote to adjust the volume levels for wired headphones for headrest media sources only DVD USB port and auxiliary inputs To adjust the volume levels on the infrared wireless headphones provided with your system use the rotary volume control on the side of the headphones 1 Q On off Press to turn each monitor headrest system on or off 2 Cursor controls Use in various active menus to advance the cursor up down left right When not in a menu the left and right cursor controls decrease and increase the display brightness 3 DISPLAY Press to access the on screen display of title track chapter and time elapsed 52 Entertainment Systems 4 RETURN Press to return to the previous menu screen 5 SETUP Press to access the setup menu for each monitor Refer to Setup Menu later in this section for more information 6 MON A B Press to select either monitor A or monitor B to be controlled by the remote control 7 VOL Volume When in Dual Play only press to increase A or decrease Vv the volume for the wired headphones for headrest media sources only DVD USB port and auxiliary inputs Wireless headphone volume is controlled with the rotary dial on the right ear piece 8 Fast Forward Next In DVD mode press and hold for a quick advance within the DVD Pres
106. ONSOLE Your vehicle may be equipped with a variety of console features These include 1 Cupholders mS A 2 Utility compartment with coin XS A holder audio input jack USB port SS ta and power point O 5 Basic storage UIA WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision 3 Storage drawer with cupholders 4 Rear power point outlet 110 Volt power point outlet and rear climate controls if equipped 96 Driver Controls Second row center console features if equipped The second row center console incorporates the following features ee e Flip forward armrest to provide a 7 flat load floor e Utility compartment S e Cupholders fil e Refrigerator unit if equipped in the utility compartment Refer to Console refrigerator freezer A S WARNING Use only soft cups in the cupholder Hard objects can injure you in a collision Console refrigerator freezer if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a refrigerator freezer for keeping items cool frozen The refrigerator freezer will operate when the vehicle is on or the ignition is in the accessory mode Ford recommends only using the refrigerator freezer when the vehicle s engine is running If there is a need to use the refrigerator freezer when the engine is off turn the ignition to the accessory mode and limit the time the refrigerator is running to avoid draining the vehicle s batter
107. P3 mode If a disc is already loaded into the system CD MP38 play will begin where it ended last If no CD is loaded NO DISC will appear in the display LOAD For a single CD system This control is not operational To load a CD simply insert the disc label side up into the CD slot For a CD6 system Press LOAD When the display reads SELECT SLOT choose the desired slot number using memory presets 1 6 When the display reads LOAD CD load the desired disc label side up If you do not choose a slot within five seconds the system will choose for you Once loaded the first track will begin to play To auto load up to six discs Press and hold LOAD until the display reads AUTOLOAD Load the desired disc label side up The system will prompt you to load discs for the remaining available slots Insert the discs one at a time label side up when prompted Once loaded the disc in preset 1 will begin to play Press the number preset buttons 1 6 to choose the disc you want to play gt I Play Pause Press to play pause a track when playing a CD Eject For a single CD system press to eject the CD For a CD6 system press A and select the desired CD slot by pressing the corresponding memory preset number The display will read EJECTING When the system has ejected the CD the display will read REMOVE CD Remove the CD If you do not remove the CD the system will reload the disc To auto eject all
108. PremiumCare Our most comprehensive coverage With over 500 covered components this plan is so complete that we generally only discuss what s not covered ExtraCare Covers 113 components and includes many high tech items BaseCare Covers 84 components PowertrainCare Covers 29 critical components Ford ESP is honored by all Ford Lincoln and Mercury Dealers in the U S and Canada It s the only extended service plan authorized and backed by Ford Motor Company That means you get e Reliable quality service anywhere you go e Factory trained technicians e Genuine Ford and Motorcraft Parts Rental car reimbursement If your vehicle is kept overnight for covered repairs you are eligible for rental car coverage including Bumper to Bumper warranty repairs or manufacturer s recalls Transferable coverage If you sell your vehicle before your Ford ESP coverage expires you can transfer any remaining coverage to the new owner Whenever you re ready to sell your car prospective buyers may feel better about taking a risk on your used vehicle Ford ESP may add resale value Plus exclusive 24 7 roadside assistance including e Towing flat tire change and battery jump starts e Out of fuel and lock out assistance e Travel expense reimbursement for lodging meals and rental car e Destination assistance for taxi shuttle rental car coverage and emergency transportation 388 Ford Extended Service Plan F
109. R TEMPORARY USE ONLY When driving with one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above do not e Exceed 50 mph 80 km h e Load the vehicle beyond maximum vehicle load rating listed on the Safety Compliance Label e Tow a trailer e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment e Try to repair the dissimilar spare tire Use of one of the dissimilar spare tires listed above at any one wheel location can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability 3 Full size dissimilar spare without label on wheel When driving with the full size dissimilar spare tire wheel do not e Exceed 70 mph 113 km h e Use more than one dissimilar spare tire wheel at a time e Use commercial car washing equipment 303 Roadside Emergencies e Use snow chains on the end of the vehicle with the dissimilar spare tire wheel The usage of a full size dissimilar spare tire wheel can lead to impairment of the following e Handling stability and braking performance e Comfort and noise e Ground clearance and parking at curbs e Winter weather driving capability e Wet weather driving capability e All Wheel driving capability Gf applicable e Load leveling adjustment
110. Remote Start Systems section MyKey miles does not e MyKey is not being used by the accumulate intended user e MyKey system has been recently cleared 148 Locks and Security PERIMETER ALARM SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The perimeter anti theft system will help protect your vehicle from unauthorized entry If there is any potential perimeter anti theft problem with your vehicle ensure ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters are brought to the authorized dealer to aid in troubleshooting Arming the system When armed this system will respond if unauthorized entry is attempted When unauthorized entry occurs the system will flash the turn signal lamps and will sound the horn The system is ready to arm whenever the key is in the off position or is removed from the ignition Either of the following actions will prearm the alarm system e Press the control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter When you press the lock control twice within three seconds on the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT the horn will chirp once to let you know that all doors the hood and the liftgate are closed If any of these are not closed the horn will chirp twice to warn you that a door the hood or the liftgate is still open e Press the driver or passenger interior door lock control while T the door is open then close the door A a 149 Locks and Security
111. ST This vehicle is equipped with a SelectShift Automatic transmission SST gearshift lever SST is an automatic transmission with the ability for the driver to change gears up or down without a clutch as desired By moving the gearshift lever from drive position D Drive to M Manual you now have control of selecting the gear you desire using the paddle shifters on the steering wheel Paddle shifters The paddle shifters allow you to shift gears quickly without taking your hands off the steering wheel 1 To manually downshift the transmission with the gearshift lever in M Manual press the paddle shifters forward 2 To manually upshift the transmission with the gearshift lever in M Manual pull the paddle shifters rearward Recommended shift speeds Upshift according to the following chart Upshifts when accelerating recommended for best fuel economy Shift from 15 mph 24 km h p82 2 E CS 275 Driving The message center display in the instrument cluster will show the SST current selected gear you are in In order to prevent the engine from running at too low an RPM which may cause it to stall the SST will automatically make some downshifts even if it has determined that you have not downshifted in time It will still allow you to downshift at any time as long as the SST determines that the engine will not be damaged from over revving Engine damage may occur if excessive e
112. Security 5 The doors will lock then unlock to confirm that your personal entry code has been programmed to the module Tips e Do not set a code that uses five of the same number e Do not use five numbers in sequential order e The factory set code will work even if you have set your own personal code Erasing personal code 1 Enter the factory set 5 digit code 2 Within five seconds touch the 1 e 2 on the keypad and release 3 Touch and hold the 1 e 2 for two seconds This must be done within five seconds of completing Step 2 All personal codes are now erased and only the factory set 5 digit code will work Anti scan feature If the wrong code has been entered seven times 85 consecutive number touches the keypad will go into an anti scan mode This mode disables the keypad for one minute and the keypad lamp will flash The anti scan feature will turn off after e one minute of keypad inactivity e pressing the Oo control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter e the ignition is turned on Unlocking and locking the doors using keyless entry To unlock the driver s door enter the factory set 5 digit code or your personal code Each number must be touched within five seconds of each other The interior lamps will illuminate Note If the two stage unlocking feature is disabled all doors will unlock for more information regarding two stage unlocking refer to the Unl
113. Table of Contents Introduction 5 Instrument Cluster 12 Warning lights and chimes 12 Gauges 16 Message center 18 Entertainment Systems 28 AM FM stereo with CD MP3 28 Auxiliary input jack Line in 37 USB port 39 Satellite radio information 43 Family entertainment system 46 Navigation system 67 SYNC 67 Climate Controls 68 Manual heating and air conditioning 68 Dual electronic automatic temperature control 71 Navigation system based climate control 74 Rear window defroster 79 Lights 80 Headlamps 80 Turn signal control 84 Bulb replacement 86 Driver Controls 91 Windshield wiper washer control 91 Steering wheel adjustment 92 Power windows 101 Mirrors 103 Speed control 104 Moon roof 108 2010 Flex 471 Owners Guide 1st Printing USA fus Table of Contents Locks and Security Keys Locks Anti theft system Seating and Safety Restraints Seating Safety restraints Airbags Child restraints Tires Wheels and Loading Tire information Tire inflation Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS Vehicle loading Trailer towing Recreational towing Driving Starting Brakes AdvanceTrac Transmission operation Reverse sensing system Rear view camera system All wheel drive 126 126 140 151 151 171 184 199 218 220 222 236 242 249 253 255 255 260 262 270 276 278 285 Table of Contents Roadside Emergencies 292 Getting roadside assistance 292 Hazard flasher control 293 Fuel pump
114. UNMUTE AUDIO Displayed when a MyKey is in use and Belt Minder is activated Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information ADVTRAC ON MYKEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use when trying to disable the AdvanceTrac system and the optional setting is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SERVICE ADVANCETRAC Displayed when the AdvanceTrac system has detected a condition that requires service 26 Instrument Cluster TO STOP ALARM START VEHICLE Displayed when the perimeter alarm system is armed and the vehicle is entered using the key on the driver s side door In order to prevent the perimeter alarm system from triggering the ignition must be turned to start or on before the 12 second chime expires See Perimeter alarm system in the Locks and Security chapter POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP Displayed when vehicle performance is reduced due to high engine fluid temperatures See Engine fluid temperature management and What you should know about fail safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter SERVICE TIRE MOBILITY KIT if equipped Displayed when the tire mobility kit requires service See your authorized dealer for more information 27 Entertainment Systems AUDIO SYSTEMS Note If your volume is muted and MYKEY VOLUME LIMITED is displayed refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more informatio
115. When towing heavy loads with the mini spare tire vehicle handling may be diminished which could lead to loss of control and serious personal injury Note The temporary mobility kit sealant compound in the canister is to be used for one tire only See your authorized dealer for additional replacement sealant canisters 309 Roadside Emergencies Air compressor inside Diverter knob On Off switch Air pressure gauge Sealant bottle canister Sealant filling clear tube NYA TR ONE Sealant tube tire valve connector 8 Yellow cap tool 9 Air compressor hose 10 Air hose tire valve connector 11 Accessory power plug 12 Casing housing General information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death Do not attempt to repair punctures larger than 1 4 inch 6 4 mm or damage to the tire s sidewall The tire may not completely seal Note Do not use the temporary mobility kit if a tire has become severely damaged by driving the vehicle with a tire that has insufficient air pressure Only punctured areas located within the tire tread can be sealed with the temporary mobility kit Loss of air pressure may adversely affect tire performance For this reason e Do not drive the vehicle above 50 mph 80 km h e Do not drive further than 120 miles 200 km Drive only to the closest Ford Motor Company authorized dealer or
116. X PSLCOLD 4f AT XXX KPa XX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PAT _ XX RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR TP PS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX MFD BY FORD MOTOR 0 DATE xx xx BV XXXX LBAQOKKK tom hei N7 tan m PNBE AR XK 8 i G WITHZAVEC TIRES PNEUS XXXX OOOK XXXX XXXXX XXxXXX RIMSZJANTES XXxXXX ELEES VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX 10000 TYPE 1004 XXXX COMPLIES 2000700 00 otek papon IA me TPS TR il TR HSR X XX X XXXX M E XXX DOCG KOO KX AT AkPa PSI LPC xxx xx COLD A FROID rer WARNING Exceeding the Safety Compliance Certification Label vehicle weight rating limits could result in substandard vehicle handling or performance engine transmission and or structural damage serious damage to the vehicle loss of control and personal injury 246 Tires Wheels and Loading GCW Gross Combined Weight is the weight of the loaded vehicle GVW plus the weight of the fully loaded trailer GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the vehicle and the loaded trailer including all cargo and passengers that the vehicle can handle without risking damage Cmportant The to
117. a 202 Seating and Safety Restraints Follow all the safety restraint and airbag precautions that apply to adult passengers in your vehicle If the child is the proper height age and weight as specified by your child safety seat or booster manufacturer fits the restraint and can be restrained properly then restrain the child in the child safety seat or with the belt positioning booster Remember that child seats and belt positioning boosters vary and may be designed to fit children of different heights ages and weights Children who are too large for child safety seats or belt positioning boosters as specified by your child safety seat manufacturer should always properly wear safety belts SAFETY SEATS FOR CHILDREN Infant and or toddler seats Use a safety seat that is recommended for the size and weight of the child When installing a child safety seat e Review and follow the information presented in the Azrbag supplemental restraint system SRS section in this chapter Carefully follow all of the manufacturer s instructions included with the safety seat you put in your vehicle If you do not install and use the safety seat properly the child may be injured in a sudden stop or collision Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the vehicle seat all the way back
118. ability of the vehicle during adverse maneuvers RSC operates by detecting the vehicle s roll motion and the rate at which it changes and by applying the brakes to one or more wheels individually During an event that activates the Roll Stability Control RSC the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Roll Stability Control system which include e Emergency lane change e Taking a turn too fast e Quick maneuvering to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle Switching off Traction Control If the vehicle is stuck in snow mud or sand and seems to lose engine power switching off the Traction Control feature of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system may be beneficial because the wheels are allowed to spin This will restore full engine power and will enhance momentum through the obstacle To switch off the Traction Control press the AdvanceTrac with RSC A AIRBAG Off button Full features of the 2E Traction Control can be restored by pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again or by turning off and restarting the engine 265 Driving If you switch off the Traction Control the sliding car icon gi will illuminate steadily Pressing the AdvanceTrac with RSC Off button again will turn off the sliding car icon In R Reverse ABS and the Engine and Brake Tra
119. aching hardware should be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision to verify that the automatic locking retractor feature for child seats is still working properly Safety belt assemblies should be inspected by an authorized dealer and must be replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted Failure to replace the belt and retractor assembly could increase the risk of injury in a collision Unbuckle the combination lap shoulder belt and allow it to retract completely to disengage the automatic locking mode and activate the vehicle sensitive emergency locking mode 178 Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt height adjustment Your vehicle has safety belt height 4 adjustments at the front outboard seating positions Adjust the height 4 of the shoulder belt so the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder gt A To adjust the shoulder belt height squeeze and hold the buttons on the side and slide the height adjuster up or down Release the buttons and pull down on the height adjuster to make sure it is locked in place WARNING Position the safety belt height adjusters so that the belt rests across the middle of your shoulder Failure to adjust the safety belt properly could reduce the effectiveness of the safety belt and increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety belt pretensioner Your vehicle is equipped with safety belt pretensioners at the dr
120. ad Transmitter or the keyless entry system keypad is used to unlock the door s The illuminated entry system will turn off the interior lights if e the ignition is turned to the on position or e the Integrated Keyhead Transmitter control is pressed or e the vehicle is locked using the keyless entry keypad or e after 25 seconds of illumination The inside lights will not turn off if e they have been turned on with the dimmer control or e any door is open Illuminated exit e When all vehicle doors are closed and the key is removed from the ignition the interior dome lamps parking lamps and the exterior mirror puddle lamps if equipped will illuminate The lights will turn off if all the doors remain closed and e 25 seconds elapse or e the key is inserted in the ignition Battery saver The battery saver will shut off the interior lamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position e If the dome lamps were turned on using the panel dimmer control the battery saver will shut them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position e If the courtesy lamps were turned on because one of the vehicle doors or the liftgate was opened the battery saver will shut off them off 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position 137 Locks and Security e The battery saver will shut off the headlamps 10 minutes after the ignition has been turned to the off position
121. air pressure gauge reading on the compressor unit may indicate a higher value this is normal and should be no reason for concern The pressure will drop after about 30 seconds of operation The tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF position to get the correct tire pressure reading WARNING Do not stand directly over the temporary mobility kit while inflating the tire If you notice any unusual bulges or deformations in the tire s sidewall during inflation stop and call roadside assistance WARNING If the tire doesn t inflate to the recommended tire pressure within 15 minutes stop and call roadside assistance 9 When the recommended tire pressure is reached turn off the kit by pressing the on off button disconnect the kit from the tire valve and the power point Re install the valve cap on the tire valve place the tube cap on the metal connector and return the kit to the stowage area 10 Immediately and cautiously drive the vehicle 4 miles 6 km to distribute the sealant evenly inside the tire Do not exceed 50 mph 80 km h Note If you experience any unusual vibration ride disturbance or noise while driving reduce your speed until you can safely pull off to the side of the road to call for roadside assistance Do not proceed to the second stage of this operation 11 After 4 miles 6 km stop and check the tire pressure See Second stage Checking tire pressure Second stage Checking tire pressur
122. all the wheels off the ground to prevent damage to the automatic transmission AWD system or vehicle 325 Roadside Emergencies If the vehicle is towed by other means or incorrectly vehicle damage may occur Ford Motor Company produces a towing manual for all authorized tow truck operators Have your tow truck operator refer to this manual for proper hook up and towing procedures for your vehicle Emergency towing In case of a roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle without access to wheel dollies car hauling trailer or flatbed transport vehicle your vehicle regardless of transmission powertrain configuration can be flat towed all wheels on the ground under the following conditions e Vehicle is facing forward so that it is being towed in a forward direction e Place the transmission in N Neutral Refer to Brake shift interlock in the Driving chapter for specific instructions if you cannot move the gear shift lever into N Neutral e Maximum speed is not to exceed 35 mph 56 km h e Maximum distance is 50 miles 80 km 326 Customer Assistance GETTING THE SERVICES YOU NEED Warranty repairs to your vehicle must be performed by an authorized Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealer While any authorized dealer handling your vehicle line will provide warranty service we recommend you return to your selling authorized dealer who wants to ensure your continued satisfaction Please note that certain warranty repairs r
123. and folder structure Your MP3 system recognizes MP3 individual tracks and folder structure as follows e There are two different modes for MP3 disc playback MP3 track mode system default and MP3 folder mode For more information on track and folder mode refer to Sample MP3 structure in the following section e MP3 track mode ignores any folder structure on the MP3 disc The player numbers each MP3 track on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension from T001 to a maximum of T255 Note The maximum number of playable MP3 files may be less depending on the structure of the CD and exact model of radio present e MP3 folder mode represents a folder structure consisting of one level of folders The CD player numbers all MP8 tracks on the disc noted by the mp3 file extension and all folders containing MP3 files from F001 folder TOO1 track to F253 T255 Creating discs with only one level of folders will help with navigation through the disc files 42 Entertainment Systems Sample MP3 structure If you are burning your own MP3 discs it is important to understand 0 how the system will read the structures you create While various W7 4 mp3 i files may be present files with L_ mp3 extensions other than mp3 only a files with the mp3 extension will be played Other files will be ignored y mp3 3 by the system This enables you to mp3 use the same MP3 disc for a variety Ts sia
124. ant bottles may be disposed of at home however liquid residue from the sealing compound should be disposed by your local Ford Motor Company dealership or tire dealer or in accordance with local waste disposal regulations Note After the sealing compound has been used the maximum vehicle speed is 50 mph 80 km h and the maximum driving distance is 120 miles 200 km The sealed tire should be inspected immediately Note After sealant use the TPMS sensor and valve stem on the wheel must be replaced by an authorized Ford dealer You can check the tire pressure any time within the 120 miles 200 km by performing the procedure from Second stage Checking tire pressure listed previously 315 Roadside Emergencies Removal of the Sealant Canister from the Temporary Mobility Kit 1 Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing 2 Locate the yellow cap at the end of the clear tube 3 Using the yellow cap tool press the tab located on the temporary mobility kit compressor housing while pulling up on the sealant canister 316 Roadside Emergencies Installation of the Sealant Canister to the Temporary Mobility Kit 1 Align the sealant canister with the temporary mobility kit housing 2 Once aligned seat the sealant canister by lightly pushing down until you hear an audible click 3 Wrap the clear tube around the compressor housing 317 Roadside Emergencies Note If you experience any difficultie
125. ant reservoir Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Automatic transmission fluid dipstick Engine oil dipstick O OND FW HF Engine oil filler cap 10 Windshield washer fluid reservoir 345 Maintenance and Specifications 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine Engine coolant reservoir Brake fluid reservoir Battery Power distribution box Air filter assembly Automatic transmission fluid dipstick out of view Engine oil dipstick Engine oil filler cap O OND FW HF Windshield washer fluid reservoir 346 Maintenance and Specifications Engine shield Some vehicles may be equipped J J with an aero shield under the Q engine This shield needs to be NTO O A removed for service including oil and filter changes It is secured with four screws U WZ WINDSHIELD WASHER i FLUID lt Add fluid to fill the reservoir if the level is low In very cold weather do not fill the reservoir completely Only use a washer fluid that meets Ford specification WSB M8B16 A2 Do not use any special washer fluid such as windshield water repellent type fluid or bug wash They may cause squeaking chatter noise streaking and smearing Refer to the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section in this chapter State or local regulations on volatile organic compounds may restrict the use of methanol a common windshield washer antifr
126. ary inputs and the USB port on the headrest system MEDIA for Monitor B In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor B is chosen you can also use the auxiliary inputs and USB port on the headrest system For further information please refer to Single play Dual play later in this section Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system 16 MUTE Press to mute the volume of the active media source headphone and speakers where applicable Press again to restore volume 17 EJECT Press to eject a disc from the system OPEN will display on the screen 18 Fast reverse Previous When a DVD is playing press and hold for a quick reverse within the DVD Press and release for the previous chapter Press PLAY to resume normal playback speed and volume In CD MP3 mode press to access the previous track When using a flash thumb drive press to access the next track 19 MENU Press to access the DVD or CD disc menu for selections Press again to return to DVD play Note For certain discs you may need to press ENTER to return to DVD play 20 SUBTITLE DVD dependent Press to turn the subtitle feature ON or OFF 21 LANGUAGE DVD dependent Press to select the desired language 22 ENTER Press to select the highlighted menu option
127. ated and not overloaded Excessive speed underinflation or excessive loading either separately or in combination can cause heat buildup and possible tire failure TIRES Tires are designed to give many thousands of miles of service but they must be maintained in order to get the maximum benefit from them Glossary of tire terminology e Tire label A label showing the OE Original Equipment tire sizes recommended inflation pressure and the maximum weight the vehicle can carry e Tire Identification Number TIN A number on the sidewall of each tire providing information about the tire brand and manufacturing plant tire size and date of manufacture Also referred to as DOT code e Inflation pressure A measure of the amount of air in a tire e Standard load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a maximum load at 35 psi 87 psi 2 5 bar for Metric tires Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e Extra load A class of P metric or Metric tires designed to carry a heavier maximum load at 41 psi 43 psi 2 9 bar for Metric tires 221 Tires Wheels and Loading Increasing the inflation pressure beyond this pressure will not increase the tire s load carrying capability e kPa Kilopascal a metric unit of air pressure e PSI Pounds per square inch a standard unit of air pressure e Cold inflation pressure The tire pressure when t
128. ats The belt positioning booster booster seat is used to improve the fit of the vehicle safety belt Children outgrow a typical child seat e g convertible or toddler seat when they weigh about 40 Ib 18 kg and are around four 4 years of age Consult your child safety seat owner guide for the weight height and age limits specific to your child safety seat Keep your child in the child safety seat if it properly fits the child remains appropriate for their weight height and age AND if properly secured to the vehicle Although the lap shoulder belt will provide some protection children who have outgrown a typical child seat are still too small for lap shoulder belts to fit properly and wearing an improperly fitted vehicle safety belt could increase the risk of serious injury in a crash To improve the fit of both the lap and shoulder belt on children who have outgrown child safety seats Ford Motor Company recommends use of a belt positioning booster Booster seats position a child so that vehicle lap shoulder safety belts fit better They lift the child up so that the lap belt rests low across the hips and the knees bend comfortably at the edge of the cushion while minimizing slouching Booster seats may also make the shoulder belt fit better and more comfortably Try to keep the belt near the middle of the shoulder and across the center of the chest Moving the child closer a few centimeters or inches to the center of the vehicle
129. bel may be located The Safety Compliance Certification Label is located on the structure B Pillar by the trailing edge of the driver s door or the edge of the driver s door MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX XXXXXX RIMS XXXX XX AT XXX KPa XX PSLCOLD 4f ATOXXX KPaXX PSI COLD THIS VEHICLE CONFORMS TO ALL APPLICABLE FEDERAL MOTOR VEHICLE SAFETY AND THEFT PREVENTION STANDARDS IN EFFECT ON THE DATE OF MANUFACTURE SHOWN ABOVE VIN XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX XXXXX TYPE XXX XXXXX EXT PNT XX RC XX DSO WB BRK INTTR TP PS R AXLE TR SPR XXXXX XXX X XX X XX XXX XXX XXXXXXXXXXXXX XXX XXXX XXXXXXX XX 383 Maintenance and Specifications l XXXXXXXXXXXXXXXXX Please note that in the graphic XXXX is representative of your ke vehicle identification number Vehicle identification number VIN The vehicle identification number is located on the driver side instrument panel The Vehicle Identification Number VIN contains the following information 1 World manufacturer identifier XXX X XXX X X X X XXXXXX 2 Brake system Gross Vehicle Weight Rating GVWR Restraint Devices and their location 3 Make vehicle line series body type 4 Engine type 5 Check digit 6 Model year 7 Assembly plant 8 Production sequence number 384 Maintenance and Specifications TRANSMISSION CODE
130. ble will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag if e the front passenger seat is unoccupied or has small medium objects in the front seat 188 Seating and Safety Restraints e the system determines that an infant is present in a rear facing infant seat that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a forward facing child restraint that is installed according to the manufacturer s instructions e the system determines that a small child is present in a booster seat e a front passenger takes his her weight off of the seat for a period of time e achild or a small person occupies the front passenger seat When the passenger airbag off light is illuminated the passenger side airbag may be disabled to avoid the risk of airbag deployment injuries The front passenger sensing system uses a passenger airbag off or A pass airbag off indicator which will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled The indicator lamp is located in the center of the instrument panel above the radio Note The indicator lamp will illuminate for a short period of time when the ignition is turned to the on position to confirm it is functional When the front passenger seat is not occupied empty seat or in the event that the front passenger frontal airbag is enabled may inflate the in
131. but remaining in the same seating position may help provide a good shoulder belt fit When children should use booster seats Children need to use booster seats from the time they outgrow the toddler seat until they are big enough for the vehicle seat and lap shoulder belt to fit properly Generally this is when they reach a height of at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall around age eight to age twelve and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg or upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Many state and provincial laws require that children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or 80 lb 86 kg 213 Seating and Safety Restraints Booster seats should be used until you can answer YES to ALL of these questions when seated without a booster seat e Can the child sit all the way back against the vehicle seat back with knees bent comfortably at the edge of the seat cushion Can the child sit without slouching e Does the lap belt rest low across the hips e Is the shoulder belt centered on the shoulder and chest e Can the child stay seated like this for the whole trip Types of booster seats There are generally two types of belt positioning booster seats backless and high back Always use booster seats in conjunction with the vehicle lap shoulder belt e Backless booster seats If your backless booster seat has a re
132. c s 94 CAliDration oo eeeeeeeteeeeees 95 set zone adjustment 0 95 Console overhead sss iicsdisaseesesswsscassscixeasvede 94 Controls POWEF SEAL sioiias nas 156 steering column ceee 106 Coolant checking and adding 354 refill capacities 0 357 379 Specifications cceeeeeeeee 379 COOIEE oe eaten eevee eee 97 Cruise control see Speed control 0 0 104 392 Customer Assistance 000 292 Ford Extended Service PNA cccasic vasneie e 388 Getting assistance outside the U S and Canada 331 Getting roadside assistance 292 Getting the service you NOE onera erie 327 Ordering additional owner s literature wc Srsceeurietedaseeit aes 332 Utilizing the Mediation Arbitration Progra mannoia 330 D Daytime running lamps see Lamps cccesssceeeseseeeees 82 Defrost rear window and rearview MITOY S eere nene EEE 74 windshield sisccstteivecbccsettscorceseeses 74 Dipstick automatic transmission PLAC wrecesiins de E E EE 374 engine Oil synsi 349 Driving under special CONGITIONS siririna 287 289 SAN aee E E EE 288 snow and ICE essessooeessseeses000e 290 through water seese 288 291 DVD SYSTEM sestiers 46 E Electronic message center 18 Emergencies roadside Jump starting sssini 319 running out of fuel 319 365 Emission control system 370 EEIN seegers RE 382 CLEANING siscivcsseseieasstisideat
133. ced immediately by your authorized dealer 12 Instrument Cluster WARNING Under engine misfire conditions excessive exhaust temperatures could damage the catalytic converter the fuel system interior floor coverings or other vehicle components possibly causing a fire Powertrain malfunction reduced power lluminates when a A powertrain or a AWD fault has been detected Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Brake system warning light To confirm the brake system warning C P light is functional it will Sone illuminate when the B RAKE ignition is turned to the on position when the engine is not running or in a position between on and start or by applying the parking brake when the ignition is turned to the on position If the brake system warning light does not illuminate at this time seek service immediately from your authorized dealer Illumination after releasing the parking brake indicates low brake fluid level or a brake system malfunction and the brake system should be inspected immediately by your authorized dealer WARNING Driving a vehicle with the brake system warning light on is dangerous A significant decrease in braking performance may occur It will take you longer to stop the vehicle Have the vehicle checked by your authorized dealer Driving extended distances with the parking brake engaged can cause brake failure and the risk of personal injury Anti lock brake system If the ABS
134. ces and home lighting systems 113 Driver Controls WARNING Make sure that people and objects are clear of the garage door or security device you are programming Do not program the Car2U system with the vehicle in the garage Do not use the Car2U system with any garage door opener that lacks safety stop and reverse features as required by U S Federal Safety Standards this includes any garage door opener manufactured before April 1 1982 Be sure to keep the original remote control transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future Car2U system programming It is also recommended that upon the sale or lease termination of the vehicle the programmed Car2U system buttons should be erased for security reasons Refer to Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons later in this section Read the instructions completely before attempting to program the Car2U system Because of the steps involved it may be helpful to have another person assist you in programming the transmitter Additional Car2U system information can be found on line at www learcar2U com or by calling the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 572 2728 Types of garage door openers rolling code and fixed code The Car2U Home Automation System may be programmed to operate rolling code and fixed code garage door openers e Rolling code garage door openers were produced after 1996 and are code protected Rolling code means the coded
135. cle speed allows for first gear when vehicle reaches slower speeds 272 Driving Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6 speed with SelectShift Automatic transmission SST if equipped Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Switch the ignition off and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Dri
136. cle will be adversely affected 261 Driving Press the parking brake pedal downward again to release the parking brake Driving with the parking brake on will cause the brakes to wear out quickly and reduce fuel economy Note If the vehicle is driven with the parking brake applied a chime will sound ADVANCETRAC WITH ROLL STABILITY CONTROL RSC STABILITY ENHANCEMENT SYSTEM WARNING Vehicle modifications involving braking system aftermarket roof racks suspension steering system tire construction and or wheel tire size may change the handling characteristics of the vehicle and may adversely affect the performance of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system In addition installing any stereo loudspeakers may interfere with and adversely affect the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Install any aftermarket stereo loudspeaker as far as possible from the front center console the tunnel and the front seats in order to minimize the risk of interfering with the AdvanceTrac with RSC sensors Reducing the effectiveness of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system could lead to an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death WARNING Remember that even advanced technology cannot defy the laws of physics It s always possible to lose control of a vehicle due to inappropriate driver input for the conditions Aggressive driving on any road condition can cause you to lose control of your
137. cted button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command Erasing the Car2U Home Automation System buttons Note The system allows for three devices to be programmed If you need to change or replace any of the three devices after it has been initially programmed it will be necessary to erase the current settings using the procedure below and then reprogramming all of the devices being used 118 Driver Controls To erase programming on the Car2U system individual buttons cannot be erased use the following procedure 1 Firmly press the two outside Car2U system buttons simultaneously for approximately 20 seconds until the indicator lights begin to blink rapidly The indicator lights are located directly above the buttons NZ 2 Once the indicator lights begin to blink release your fingers from the buttons The codes for all buttons are erased If you sell your vehicle equipped with the Car2U system it is recommended that you erase the programming for security reasons FCC and RSS 210 Industry Canada Compliance The Car2U system complies with Part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes and modifications to the Car2U system
138. ction Control features will continue to function however ESC and RSC are disabled AdvanceTrac Features Control Message switch Center Dis RSC functions h play Default at System Initial Nothing Dis En start up ization i played Enabled Traction Con pee En Dis trol OFF OFF abled abled Control switch pressed AdvanceTrac ADVANCE En Enabled again after fully enabled TRAC ON abled deactiva tion Trailer sway control if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with trailer sway control When properly equipped trailer sway control will use the vehicle s AdvanceTrac with RSC system to detect and mitigate trailer sway by applying brake force at individual wheels and if necessary by reducing engine power Note Trailer sway control does not prevent a trailer from swaying it mitigates the sway from increasing once it has occurred TSC cannot stop all trailers from swaying If you are experiencing trailer sway it is likely that the trailer is improperly loaded for the correct tongue weight 266 Driving or the speed of the vehicle and trailer is too high Pull the vehicle trailer over to a safe location to check the trailer weight distribution and tongue load and reduce speed to a safe level while towing If trailer sway is experienced SLOW DOWN Always use caution when towing a trailer and follow the tongue weight recommendations Refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for
139. ctivate low heat e Press a third time to deactivate The indicator light on the control will illuminate when activated For low heat one light will be lit for high heat both lights will be lit 167 Seating and Safety Restraints Stowing the third row seat 1 Remove all objects from the seat and stowage tub 2 Stow the head restraints by pressing the head restraint release button while sliding the head restraints fully down 3 From the rear of the vehicle fold seatback by pulling and holding the number 1 strap while pushing the seatback forward Release strap once seatback starts rotating forward 4 Release the cushion latches by pulling the number 2 strap while pulling on the strap located at the top of the seatback to tumble the seat all the way into the tub in the floor Note Do not use the seat anchors as cargo tie downs 168 Seating and Safety Restraints Note Do not use the third row seatback as a load floor when the f P seatback is folded Gea ta L Note In order to allow the seat to latch in the stowed position do not stow objects under the seat before stowing Unstowing the third row seat Note Ensure that there are no objects such as books purses or brief cases on the load floor before unstowing the seat Failure to remove all objects from the top of the load floor prior to unstowing it may cause damage to the seat Note Ensure the area under the load floor is
140. d that does not meet Ford material and design specifications start up engine noises or knock may be experienced It is recommended you use the appropriate Motorcraft oil filter or another with equivalent performance for your engine application 351 Maintenance and Specifications BATTERY Your vehicle is equipped with a Motorcraft maintenance free battery which normally does not require additional water during its life of service If your battery has a cover shield make sure it is reinstalled after the battery has been cleaned or replaced For longer trouble free operation keep the top of the battery clean and dry Also make certain the battery cables are always tightly fastened to the battery terminals If you see any corrosion on the battery or terminals remove the cables from the terminals and clean with a wire brush You can neutralize the acid with a solution of baking soda and water It is recommended that the negative battery cable terminal be disconnected from the battery if you plan to store your vehicle for an extended period of time This will minimize the discharge of your battery during storage Note Electrical or electronic accessories or components added to the vehicle by the dealer or the owner may adversely affect battery performance and durability WARNING Batteries normally produce explosive gases which can cause personal injury Therefore do not allow flames sparks or lighted substances to c
141. d Weight Rating Trailer Weight Class Maximum Trailer weight Tongue load GCWR Class I towing 6900 Ib 2000 Ib 200 Ib 91 kg standard 3131 kg 907 kg lass III towing 9357 lb 4500 Ib 450 Ib 204 kg optional 4245 kg 2042 kg For towing trailers up to 3500 Ib 1588 kg use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through the vehicle s underbody structure For towing trailers over 3500 Ib 1588 kg up to 4500 Ib 2042 kg it is recommended to use a weight distributing hitch to increase front axle load while towing GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight Class Maximum Trailer weight Tongue load GCWR range Class I towing 7050 Ib 2000 Ib 200 Ib 91 kg standard 3199 kg 907 kg lass II towing 9521 Ib 4500 Ib 450 Ib 204 kg optional 4320 kg 2042 kg For towing trailers up to 4500 Ib 2042 kg use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through the vehicle s underbody structure EcoBoost AWD GCWR Gross Combined Weight Rating Trailer Weight Class Maximum Trailer weight Tongue load GCWR range Class I towing 7072 lb 2000 Ib 200 Ib 91 kg standard 3209 kg 907 kg lass HI towing 9622 Ib 4500 Ib 450 Ib 204 kg optional 4366 kg 2042 kg For towing trailers up to 4500 lb 2042 kg use a weight carrying hitch and ball which uniformly spreads the trailer tongue loads through
142. d chains e Use only SAE class S cables or equivalent on the front axle for P235 60R17 P235 60R18 and P235 55R19 equipped vehicles SAE class S chains or other conventional link chains may cause damage to the vehicles wheel house and or body Use of optional spike type traction devices or equivalent is also acceptable e Do not install tire chains cables or optional traction devices on the rear tires This could cause damage to the vehicle s wheel house or body e Do not use tire chains cables or optional traction devices with 255 45R20 tires Install cable chains securely verifying that the cables do not touch any wiring brake lines or fuel lines Drive cautiously If you hear the cables rub or bang against your vehicle stop and re tighten the cables If this does not work remove the cables to prevent damage to your vehicle 241 Tires Wheels and Loading If possible avoid fully loading your vehicle Remove the tire cables when they are no longer needed Do not use tire cables on dry roads e The suspension insulation and bumpers will help prevent vehicle damage Do not remove these components from your vehicle when using snow tires and chains e Do not exceed 30 mph 48 km h with tire cables on your vehicle VEHICLE LOADING WITH AND WITHOUT A TRAILER This section will guide you in the proper loading of your vehicle and or trailer to keep your loaded vehicle weight within its design rating ca
143. d of time e To reduce the risk of electrical shock do not use your heater with ungrounded electrical systems or two pronged cheater adapters Also ensure that the block heater especially the cord is in good condition before use e Make sure that when in operation the extension cord plug engine block heater cord plug connection is free and clear of water in order to prevent possible shock or fire e Be sure that areas where the vehicle is parked are clean and clear of all combustibles such as petroleum products dust rags paper and similar items e Be sure that the engine block heater heater cord and extension cord are solidly connected A poor connection can cause the cord to become very hot and may result in an electrical shock or fire Be sure to check for heat anywhere in the electrical hookup once the system has been operating for approximately a half hour e Finally have the engine block heater system checked during your fall tune up to be sure it s in good working order 259 Driving How to use the engine block heater Ensure the receptacle terminals are clean and dry prior to use To clean them use a dry cloth Depending on the type of factory installed equipment your engine block heater will use 4 to 1 0 kilowatt hours of energy per hour of use Your factory installed block heater system does not have a thermostat however maximum temperature is attained after approximately three hours of operation Block
144. d restraint manufacturer s instructions for additional inspection and maintenance information specific to the child restraint Ford Motor Company recommends that all safety belt assemblies in use in vehicles involved in a collision be replaced However if the collision was minor and an authorized dealer finds that the belts do not show damage and continue to operate properly they do not need to be replaced Safety belt assemblies not in use during a collision should also be inspected and replaced if either damage or improper operation is noted For proper care of soiled safety belts refer to Interior in the Cleaning chapter WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary replace the safety belt assembly or child restraint system under the above conditions could result in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision 217 Tires Wheels and Loading NOTICE TO CROSSOVER VEHICLE OWNERS Crossover vehicles handle differently than passenger cars in the various driving conditions that are encountered on streets highways and off road Crossover vehicles are not designed for cornering at speeds as high as passenger cars any more QT than low slung sports cars are designed to perform satisfactorily under off road conditions WARNING Crossover vehicles have a significantly higher rollover rate than other types of vehicles To reduce the risk of serious injury or death from a rollover or other crash you must e A
145. d sudden applications of power and quick changes of direction on snow and ice Apply the accelerator slowly and steadily when starting from a full stop Avoid sudden braking as well Although an AWD vehicle may accelerate better than a two wheel drive vehicle in snow and ice it won t stop any faster because as in other vehicles braking occurs at all four wheels Do not become overconfident as to road conditions Make sure you allow sufficient distance between you and other vehicles for stopping Drive slower than usual and consider using one of the lower gears In emergency stopping situations apply the brake steadily Since your vehicle is equipped with a four wheel anti lock brake system ABS do not pump the brakes Refer to the Brakes section of this chapter for additional information on the operation of the anti lock brake system WARNING If you are driving in slippery conditions that require tire chains or cables then it is critical that you drive cautiously Keep speeds down allow for longer stopping distances and avoid aggressive steering to reduce the chances of a loss of vehicle control which can lead to serious injury or death If the rear end of the vehicle slides while cornering steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 290 Driving Maintenance and Modifications The suspension and steering systems on your vehicle have been designed and tested to provide predictable performa
146. d using a vehicle transport trailer Do not tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly and the rear wheels on the ground This will cause damage to your AWD system If you are using a vehicle transport trailer follow the instruction specified by the equipment provider Note If you tow your vehicle with all four wheels on the ground follow these instructions Tow only in the forward direction Release the parking brake Place the transmission shift lever in N Neutral Place the ignition in the accessory position refer to Starting in the Driving chapter Do not exceed 65 mph 105 km h Start the engine and allow it to run for five minutes at the beginning of each day and at each fuel stop 254 Driving STARTING Positions of the ignition 1 Off locks the automatic 3 transmission gearshift lever and 2 allows key removal This position also shuts the engine and all Aa electrical accessories off without G locking the steering wheel To lock the steering wheel remove the key then turn the steering wheel 2 Accessory allows the electrical accessories such as the radio to operate while the engine is not running This position also unlocks the steering wheel 3 On all electrical circuits operational Warning lights illuminated Key position when driving 4 Start cranks the engine Release the key as soon as the engine starts Starting your v
147. dark in the left portion of the beam pattern The top edge of this cut off should be positioned two inches 50 8 mm below the horizontal reference line HID headlamp 83 Lights Halogen headlamp 5 Locate the vertical adjuster on each headlamp Using a Phillips 2 screwdriver turn the adjuster either clockwise to adjust down or counterclockwise to adjust up The horizontal edge of the brighter light should touch the horizontal reference line 6 Close the hood and turn off the lamps HORIZONTAL AIM IS NOT REQUIRED FOR THIS VEHICLE AND IS NON ADJUSTABLE TURN SIGNAL CONTROL 4 e Push down to activate the left A turn signal WF p e Push up to activate the right turn es SE signal Y Sih 84 Lights INTERIOR LAMPS Dome lamps and map lamps The map lamps are located on the overhead console Press the controls on either side of each map lamp to turn on the lamps Your vehicle may have reading lamps within the rear dome lamp s Press the switches on either side of the dome lamp to turn on the lamps Your vehicle may have second row lamps located within the grab handles Press the lens up to turn on the lamps Ambient lighting if equipped Illuminates footwells and cupholders with a choice of several colors The ambient lighting control switch
148. determine fuel economy Calculation 1 Divide total miles traveled by total gallons used Calculation 2 Multiply liters used by 100 then divide by total kilometers traveled Keep a record for at least one month and record the type of driving city or highway This will provide an accurate estimate of the vehicle s fuel economy under current driving conditions Additionally keeping records during summer and winter will show how temperature impacts fuel economy In general lower temperatures give lower fuel economy 368 Maintenance and Specifications Driving style good driving and fuel economy habits Give consideration to the lists that follow and you may be able to change a number of variables and improve your fuel economy Habits Smooth moderate operation can yield up to 10 savings in fuel Steady speeds without stopping will usually give the best fuel economy Idling for long periods of time greater than one minute may waste fuel Anticipate stopping slowing down may eliminate the need to stop Sudden or hard accelerations may reduce fuel economy Slow down gradually Driving at reasonable speeds traveling at 55 mph 88 km h uses 15 less fuel than traveling at 65 mph 105 km h Revving the engine before turning it off may reduce fuel economy Using the air conditioner or defroster may reduce fuel economy You may want to turn off the speed control in hilly terrain if unnecessary shifting between
149. dicator lamp will be unlit The front passenger sensing system is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag when a rear facing infant seat a forward facing child restraint or a booster seat is detected e When the front passenger sensing system disables will not inflate the front passenger frontal airbag the indicator lamp will illuminate and stay lit to remind you that the front passenger frontal airbag is disabled e If the child restraint has been installed and the indicator lamp is not lit then turn the vehicle off remove the child restraint from the vehicle and reinstall the restraint following the child restraint manufacturer s instructions The front passenger sensing system is designed to enable may inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag anytime the system senses that a person of adult size is sitting properly in the front passenger seat e When the front passenger sensing system enables the front passenger frontal airbag may inflate the indicator will be unlit and stay unlit 189 Seating and Safety Restraints If a person of adult size is sitting in the front passenger s seat but the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp is lit it is possible that the person isn t sitting properly in the seat If this happens e Turn the vehicle off and ask the person to place the seatback in the full upright position e Have the person sit upright in th
150. driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the vehicle label The tire suppliers may have additional markings notes or warnings such as standard load radial tubeless etc 233 Tires Wheels and Loading Additional information contained on the tire sidewall for LT type tires LT type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below Note Tire Quality Grades do not apply to this type of tire 1 LT Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that is intended for service on light trucks 2 Load Range Load Inflation Limits Indicates the tire s load carrying capabilities and its inflation limits 3 Maximum Load Dual Ib kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a dual defined as four tires on the rear axle a total of six or more tires on the vehicle 4 Maximum Load Single lb kg at psi kPa cold Indicates the maximum load and tire pressure when the tire is used as a single defined as two tires total on the rear axle 234 Tires Wheels and Loading Information on T type tires T type tires have some additional information beyond those of P type tires these differences are described below T145 80D16 is an example of a tire size Note The temporary tire size for
151. e Check the air pressure of your tires as follows 1 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 2 Unhook the black hose from the side of the compressor and fasten firmly on the valve stem by turning clockwise WARNING If you are proceeding from the First stage Reinflating the tire with sealing compound and air section and have injected sealant in the tire and the pressure is below 20 psi 1 4 bar stop and call roadside assistance If tire pressure is above 20 psi 1 4 bar continue to the next step 314 Roadside Emergencies 3 Turn the dial clockwise to the air position Turn on the kit by pressing the on off button 4 Adjust the tire to the recommended inflation pressure from the tire label located on the driver s door or door jam area Note The tire pressure has to be checked with the compressor in the OFF position to get the correct tire pressure reading 5 Turn the compressor off by wy pressing the on off button 6 Unplug the hoses re install the valve cap on the tire and return the kit to the stowage area WARNING The power plug may get hot after use and should be handled carefully while unplugging What to do after the tire has been sealed After using the temporary mobility kit to seal your tire you will need to replace the sealant canister and clear tube hose Sealing compound and spare parts can be obtained and replaced at an authorized Ford Motor Company dealership or tire dealer Empty seal
152. e Press and hold the 7 e 8 and 9 e 0 controls on the keyless entry pad at the same time to lock the doors driver s door must be closed There is a 20 second countdown when any of the above actions occur before the vehicle becomes armed Each door the hood and the liftgate is armed individually and if any are open they must be closed before the open entry point door hood or liftgate can enter the 20 second countdown The turn signal lamps will flash once when all doors the hood and the liftgate are closed indicating the vehicle is locked and entering the 20 second countdown Disarming the system You can disarm the system by any of the following actions e Unlock the doors by using the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter Unlock the doors by using your keyless entry pad Unlock the driver s door with a key Turn the key full rearward toward the rear of the vehicle to ensure the alarm disarms e Turn ignition to the on position with a valid SecuriLock key or Integrated Keyhead Transmitter KT e Press the panic control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT This will only shut off the horn and turn lamps when the alarm is sounding The alarm system will still be armed Pressing the power door unlock control within the 20 second prearmed mode will return the vehicle to a disarmed state Triggering the anti theft system The armed system will be triggered
153. e of a vehicle In a collision people riding in these areas are more likely to be seriously injured or killed Do not allow people to ride in any area of your vehicle that is not equipped with seats and safety belts Be sure everyone in your vehicle is in a seat and using a safety belt properly WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt WARNING Each seating position in your vehicle has a specific safety belt assembly which is made up of one buckle and one tongue that are designed to be used as a pair 1 Use the shoulder belt on the outside shoulder only Never wear the shoulder belt under the arm 2 Never swing the safety belt around your neck over the inside shoulder 3 Never use a single belt for more than one person WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position 175 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Front and rear seat occupants including pregnant women should wear safety belts for optimum protection in an accident Combination lap and shoulder belts 1 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming r from until you hear a snap and feel x A C it latch Make sure the tongue is V securely fastened in the buckle Na p 2 To unfasten press the release button and remove the tongue from the buckle N All res
154. e particles by wiping with clean rag and apply grease Apply grease only to the wheel pilot hole surface by smearing a dime 1 square cm sized glob of grease around the wheel pilot surface 1 with end of finger DO NOT apply grease to lugnut stud holes or wheel to brake surfaces RUNNING OUT OF FUEL If you have run out of fuel and need to refill the vehicle with a portable fuel container see Running out of fuel in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for proper fuel filling method using a portable fuel container and the included fuel filler funnel Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or any type of aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system as it can be damaged You must use the included funnel in such circumstances WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank all of which could result in serious personal injury JUMP STARTING WARNING The gases around the battery can explode if exposed to flames sparks or lit cigarettes An explosion could result in injury or vehicle damage WARNING Batteries contain sulfuric acid which can burn skin eyes and clothing if contacted Do not attempt to push start your automatic transmission vehicle Automatic transmissions do not have push start capab
155. e play mode b Press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the radio at the same time Press again to return to single play mode Note If the front seat passengers are listening to the radio the rear seat passengers can also listen to the radio however they will be limited to listening to the same radio channel e Once you have entered Dual play mode the Channel A or Channel B controls on the headphones are now active Both Channel A and Channel B can be listened to on the wired headphones not included or on the infrared IR wireless headphones e On the wireless headphones select the Channel A or Channel B buttons on each pair of wireless headphones Press MEDIA to change the audio source for the Channel A or Channel B headphones This information will display on the DVD system screen Note Channel B headphones can only listen to either the DVD media Monitor A or the DVD system auxiliary inputs Channel A headphones have access to all available media sources 58 Entertainment Systems Radio interaction If your vehicle is equipped with a non touchscreen audio system you can press AUX on the radio repeatedly until DVD appears in the display Then press MENU to access HEADPHONES ON OFF REAR ZONE CONTROL ON OFF and other options Turn the TUNE control to select ON OFF for HEADPHONES ON will activate Dual Play and OFF will activate Single Play For the REAR ZONE CONTROL selecting ON will give the rear seat passengers control o
156. e seat centered on the seat cushion with the person s legs comfortably extended e Restart the vehicle and have the person remain in this position for about two minutes This will allow the system to detect that person and enable the passenger s frontal airbag e If the indicator lamp remains lit even after this the person should be advised to ride in the rear seat Pass Airbag Off Disabled Small child in child Lit Disabled safety seat or booster Small child with safety Lit Disabled belt buckled or unbuckled WARNING Even with Advanced Restraints Systems children 12 and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position After all occupants have adjusted their seats and put on safety belts it s very important that they continue to sit properly A properly seated occupant sits upright leaning against the seat back and centered on the seat cushion with their feet comfortably extended on the floor Sitting improperly can increase the chance of injury in a crash event For example if an occupant slouches lies down turns sideways sits forward leans forward or sideways or puts one or both feet up the chance of injury during a crash is greatly increased WARNING Sitting improperly out of position or with the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the front passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit u
157. e tire s valve stem facing the rear of the vehicle Fasten the flat tire to the A WA vehicle by inserting the L shaped bolt through one of the lug bolt holes in the wheel and turning clockwise into the threaded hole in the vehicle until the tire is secured If you are stowing the temporary spare tire place the tire over the jack and secure it with the large wing nut 308 Roadside Emergencies TEMPORARY MOBILITY KIT IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a temporary mobility kit located under the driver s seat To remove the temporary mobility kit move the driver s seat fully forward and undo the Velcro strap that attaches it to the rear of the seat frame To replace the temporary mobility kit open the Velcro strap on the bag and slide the bag back under the driver s seat Wrap the strap over the rear frame bar loop it through the buckle and secure the bag to the seat frame The temporary mobility kit consists of an air compressor to reinflate the tire and a sealing compound in a canister that will effectively seal most punctures caused by nails or similar objects This kit will provide a temporary seal allowing you to drive your vehicle up to 120 miles 200 km at a maximum speed of 50 mph 80 km h WARNING When towing a trailer use the temporary mobility kit and not the mini spare tire if necessary The mini spare tire is not intended for the higher towing load limits of this vehicle
158. ease the effort it takes for you to steer This occurs to prevent internal overheating and permanent damage to your steering system If this should occur you will neither lose the ability to steer the vehicle manually nor will it cause permanent damage Typical steering and driving maneuvers will allow the system to cool and steering assist will return to normal 267 Driving The EPS system has diagnostic checks that continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation When a system error is detected the following message SERVICE POWER STEERING SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW or POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT may display in the message center refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information WARNING The EPS system has diagnostics checks that continuously monitor the EPS system to ensure proper operation of the electronic system When an electronic error is detected the message POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT will be displayed in the message center If this happens stop the vehicle in a safe place and turn off the engine After at least 10 seconds reset the system by restarting the engine and watch the message center for POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT If the message returns or returns while driving take the vehicle to your dealer to have it checked With the message displayed the steering assist is turned off making the vehicle harder to steer WARNING If the message SERVICE POWER STEERING is dis
159. eat mirrors and adjustable pedals Gf equipped to the desired memory position Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled Activating the memory feature To activate this feature 1 Position the seat mirrors and adjustable pedals if equipped to the desired positions 2 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door for five seconds A tone will be heard after Ly eff 11 2 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 3 Within three seconds press the a control on the transmitter 4 A tone will be heard when the activation is complete 5 Repeat this procedure for another transmitter if desired 135 Locks and Security Deactivating the memory feature To deactivate this feature 1 Press and hold either the 1 or 2 control on the driver s door for five seconds A tone will be heard after 14 seconds when the memory store is done continue to hold until a second tone is heard after five seconds 2 Within three seconds press the control on the transmitter 3 A tone will be heard when the deactivation is complete 4 Repeat this procedure for another transmitter if desired Replacing the battery The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter uses one coin type three volt lithium battery CR2032 or equivalent To replace the battery 1 Twist a thin coin in the
160. ed off in the message center the system cannot be activated with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The system will need to be turned on to resume operation with the outside release handle or rear cargo area control button The power liftgate is still operational through the use of the remote entry transmitter and instrument panel button when the power liftgate is turned off in the message center CARGO AREA FEATURES Cargo net if equipped The cargo pouch net secures lightweight objects in the cargo area Attach the net to the anchors provided Do not put more than 50 Ib 22 kg in the net WARNING The cargo net is not designed to restrain objects during a collision or heavy braking 124 Driver Controls ROOF RACK SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Loads should never be placed directly on the roof panel For proper function of the roof rack system loads must be placed directly on crossbars affixed to the roof rack side rails Your vehicle may be equipped with factory installed crossbars Ford Genuine Accessory crossbars designed specifically for your vehicle are also recommended for use with your roof rack system The vehicle s roof panel is NOT designed to directly carry a load The maximum recommended load is 100 lb 45 kg evenly distributed on the crossbars Ensure that the load is securely fastened WARNING When loading the roof rail crossbars it is recommended
161. ed to inflate in rear and side crashes or rollovers Td rather be thrown Not a good idea People who are ejected clear are 40 times more likely to DIE Safety belts help prevent ejection WE CAN T PICK OUR CRASH 182 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not sit on top of a buckled safety belt or insert a latchplate into the buckle to avoid the Belt Minder chime To do so may adversely affect the performance of the vehicle s airbag system Deactivating activating the Belt Minder feature The driver and front passenger Belt Minder are deactivated activated independently When deactivating activating one seating position do not buckle the other position as this will terminate the process Read Steps 1 5 thoroughly before proceeding with the deactivation activation programming procedure Note The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features must be disabled enabled separately Both cannot be disable enabled during the same key cycle Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder cannot be disabled Also if the Belt Minder has been previously disabled it will be re enabled during the use of MyKey Refer to MyKey in the Locks and security chapter The driver and front passenger Belt Minder features can be deactivated activated by performing the following procedure Before following the procedure make sure that e The parking brake is set e The gearshift is in P Park e The
162. eeze additive Washer fluids containing non methanol antifreeze agents should be used only if they provide cold weather protection without damaging the vehicle s paint finish wiper blades or washer system WARNING If you operate your vehicle in temperatures below 40 F 5 C use washer fluid with antifreeze protection Failure to use washer fluid with antifreeze protection in cold weather could result in impaired windshield vision and increase the risk of injury or accident Note Do not put washer fluid in the engine coolant reservoir Washer fluid placed in the cooling system may harm engine and cooling system components Checking and adding washer fluid for the liftgate Washer fluid for the liftgate is supplied by the same reservoir as the windshield 347 Maintenance and Specifications CHANGING THE WIPER BLADES 1 Pull the wiper arm away from the vehicle Turn the blade at an angle O from the wiper arm Press the lock tab to release the blade and pull the SB G5 wiper blade down toward the windshield to remove it from the arm 2 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard Replace wiper blades at least once per year for optimum performance Poor wiper quality can be improved by cleaning the wiper blades and the windshield Refer to Windows and wiper blades in the Cleaning chapter To prolong the life of the wiper blades it is highly recommended to scrape of
163. ehicle This system meets all Canadian interference causing equipment standard requirements regulating the impulse electrical field strength of radio noise Don t press the accelerator before or during starting Only use the accelerator when you have difficulty starting the engine For more information on starting the vehicle refer to Starting the engine in this chapter To avoid potential transmission damage at extremely cold temperatures below 20 F 30 C it is recommended that the vehicle be warmed up to normal operating temperature before driving at highway speeds above 50 mph 80 km h Normal operating temperature is normally reached after 10 minutes of moderate driving or idling WARNING Extended idling at high engine speeds can produce very high temperatures in the engine and exhaust system creating the risk of fire or other damage WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire 255 Driving WARNING Do not start your vehicle in a closed garage or in other enclosed areas Exhaust fumes can be toxic Always open the garage door before you start the engine See Guarding against exhaust fumes in this chapter for more instructions WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Impo
164. ehicle For additional information refer to Changing tires with TPMS in this section 238 Tires Wheels and Loading When you believe your system is not operating properly The main function of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is to warn you when your tires need air It can also warn you in the event the system is no longer capable of functioning as intended Please refer to the following chart for information concerning your Tire Pressure Monitoring System Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Solid Warning Light Tire s under inflated Spare tire in use TPMS malfunction 1 Check your tire pressure to ensure tires are properly inflated refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 2 After inflating your tires to the manufacturer s recommended inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label located on the edge of driver s door or the B Pillar the vehicle must be driven for at least two minutes over 20 mph 82 km h before the light will turn OFF Your temporary spare tire is in use Repair the damaged road wheel tire and reinstall it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description on how the system functions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section If your tires are properly inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the light remains ON contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 239 Tire
165. ehicle to transport four friends and your golf bags In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 5 x 99 kg 5 x 13 5 kg 635 495 67 5 72 5 kg e A final example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You and one of your friends decide to pick up cement from the local home improvement store to finish that patio you have been planning for the past 2 years Measuring the inside of the vehicle with the rear seat folded down you have room for 12 100 lb 45 kg bags of cement Do you have enough load capacity to transport the cement to your home If you and your friend each weigh 220 Ib 99 kg the calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 12 x 100 1 400 440 1 200 240 lb No you do not have enough cargo capacity to carry that much weight In metric units the 248 Tires Wheels and Loading calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 12 x 45 kg 635 198 540 103 kg You will need to reduce the load weight by at least 240 Ib 104 kg If you remove 3 100 lb 45 kg cement bags then the load calculation would be 1 400 2 x 220 9 x 100 1 400 440 900 60 lb Now you have the load capacity to transport the cement and your friend home In metric units the calculation would be 635 kg 2 x 99 kg 9 x 45 kg 635 198 405 82 kg The above calculations also assume that the loads are positioned in your vehicle in a manner that does not overload the Fr
166. eight includes all weight added to the Base Curb Weight including cargo and optional equipment When towing trailer tongue load weight is also part of cargo weight 244 Tires Wheels and Loading GAW Gross Axle Weight is the total weight placed on each axle front and rear including vehicle curb weight and all payload GAWR Gross Axle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight that can be carried by a single axle front or rear These numbers are shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The total load on each axle must never exceed its GAWR Note For trailer towing information refer to Trailer towing found in this chapter or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer GVW Gross Vehicle Weight is the Vehicle Curb Weight cargo passengers GVWR Gross Vehicle Weight Rating is the maximum allowable weight of the fully loaded vehicle including all options equipment passengers and cargo The GVWR is shown on the Safety Compliance Certification Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The GVW must never exceed the GVWR 245 Tires Wheels and Loading e Example only MFD BY FORD MOTOR CO DATE XX XX GVWR XXXXXLB XXXXXKG FRONT GAWR XXXXL REAR GAWR XXXXLB XXXXKG WITH XXXXKG WITH XXXX KXXXXXX TIRES XXXX XXXXXXX TIRES XXXXXX RIMS XXXX XX RIMS AT XXX kPa X
167. el motion is not obstructed by any objects The vehicle will steer itself from this point on as you follow the instructions in the message center to safely move the vehicle reverse and forward in the space You may cancel APA at anytime by grabbing the steering wheel or by pressing the APA control switch When the vehicle is in R Reverse the message center displays BACK UP USE CAUTION When you determine the vehicle is back far enough or you hear a solid tone from Reverse Sensing System bring the vehicle to a complete stop and move the gearshift to D Drive The message center will now display PULL FORWARD USE CAUTION followed by a chime When you determine the vehicle is far enough forward or a solid tone from Forward Sensing System if equipped is heard bring the vehicle to a complete stop and move the gearshift to R Reverse The message center may display BACK UP SLOWLY USE CAUTION followed by a chime The system may offer subsequent backward and forward maneuvers before proceeding to the finish phase 282 Driving APA Finished When Active Park Assist has completed the automated steering the message center displays ACTIVE PARK FINISHED followed by a chime The driver is responsible to assess and correct as necessary the final parking position and put the vehicle in P Park The system can also be deactivated at any time by the following e Pressing the APA control switch e Grabbing the stee
168. elt out of the retractor to make sure the retractor is in the automatic locking mode you should not be able to pull more belt out If the retractor is not locked repeat Steps 5 and 6 8 Remove remaining slack from the belt Force the seat down with extra weight e g by pressing down or kneeling on the child restraint while pulling up on the shoulder belt in order to force slack from the belt This is necessary to remove the remaining slack that will exist once the additional weight of the child is added to the child restraint It also helps to achieve the proper snugness of the child seat to the vehicle Sometimes a slight lean towards the buckle will additionally help to remove remaining slack from the belt 206 Seating and Safety Restraints 9 Attach the tether strap if the child seat is equipped Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter 10 Before placing the child in the seat forcibly move the seat forward and back to make sure the seat is securely held in place To check this grab the seat at the belt path and attempt to move it side to side and forward and back There should be no more than 1 inch 2 5 cm of movement for proper installation Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST to make certain the child restraint is properly installed In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST
169. eni genes 336 COOLA xi sishsscscsyssisiasisteesedveabestaa 354 fail safe cooling cee 359 idle speed control 0 352 lubrication specifications 379 refill capacities 0 0 ee 379 service points s es 345 346 Engine block heater 258 Engine Oil v5 55 cc aeeestehdeeeeeedvestact 349 change oil soon warning message Center iiss 349 checking and adding 349 ID SUCK oee netan 349 filter specifications 351 378 recommendations ccc 351 refill capacities c cee 379 Specifications cece 379 Event data recording 06 i Exhaust fumes ccceceeeeees 258 F Fail safe cooling cee 359 Family entertainment system 46 Fleet MyKey programming 143 Fluid capacities ee 379 Fog lamps sirr cdscanesedcesesdeaeweasis 81 Four Wheel Drive vehicles driving off road sesers 286 Pre Zer veeo on need 97 Oe eee cee ret ener een rer een 361 calculating fuel ECONOMY sssssussvevvacvatasdenevercss 20 367 CAD eee teat ce sara Meneses veteetscaececes es 363 CAD ACIUY ee te eO EREE 379 choosing the right fuel 364 Index comparisons with EPA fuel economy estimates 370 detergent in fuel 0 0 365 filler funnel cc eeeeeeeeees 365 filling your vehicle with PUIG enliassa 361 363 367 filter specifications 361 378 fuel pump shut off 00 294 improv
170. enu Press the A SEEK v to scroll through the following options a LOCK UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL Press OK when LOCK UNLOCK THIS CHANNEL is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN Enter your four digit PIN number initial PIN is 1234 and the system will lock unlock the channel and CHANNEL LOCKED or UNLOCKED will be displayed Note you must be tuned to the specific channel you want to lock unlock when using this feature 35 Entertainment Systems b CHANGE PIN Press OK when CHANGE PIN is displayed The display will read ENTER OLD PIN Enter your current old PIN number and when the system accepts your entry it will display ENTER NEW PIN Enter your new four digit PIN and the system will save the new PIN and PIN SAVED will display c UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS Press OK when UNLOCK ALL CHANNELS is displayed and the display will read ENTER PIN Enter your four digit PIN and the system will unlock all channels and the display will read CHANNEL UNLOCKED d RESET PIN Press OK when RESET PIN is displayed The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK again to automatically reset the PIN number to its initial password setting 1234 PIN RESET TO DEFAULT PIN will be displayed e RETURN Press OK when RETURN is displayed and the system will exit back to the satellite radio menu Sound Adjustments Press SOUND repeatedly to cycle through the following features BASS Press k SEEK P to adjust the level of bass TREBLE Press K SEEK P t
171. equire special training and or equipment so not all authorized dealers are authorized to perform all warranty repairs This means that depending on the warranty repair needed you may have to take your vehicle to another authorized dealer A reasonable time must be allowed to perform a repair after taking your vehicle to the authorized dealer Repairs will be made using Ford or Motorcraft parts or remanufactured or other parts that are authorized by Ford Away from home If you are away from home when your vehicle needs service contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center or use the online resources listed below to find the nearest authorized dealer In the United States Mailing address Ford Motor Company Customer Relationship Center P O Box 6248 Dearborn MI 48121 Telephone 1 800 392 3673 FORD TDD for the hearing impaired 1 800 232 5952 Online Additional information and resources are available online at www genuineservice com U S dealer locator by Dealer Name City State or Zip Code Owner Guides Maintenance Schedules Recalls Ford Extended Service Plans Ford Genuine Accessories e Service specials and promotions 327 Customer Assistance In Canada Mailing address Ford vehicles Customer Relationship Centre Ford Motor Company of Canada Limited P O Box 2000 Oakville Ontario L6J 5E4 Telephone 1 800 565 3673 FORD Online www ford ca Mailing address Lincoln vehicles Lincoln Centre
172. er fluid sissie seiisdeissiniiss 347 Water Driving through 291 Windows DOWET iessciiciecsadlvsesnsdeccauesiesieckecte 101 rear wiper washef c0008 92 Windshield washer fluid and WIDGETS cspero eE TO 91 checking and adding fluid 347 liftgate reservoir e e 347 replacing wiper blades 348 Wrecker towing cceeee 325 397
173. era delay is off Press the Settings button found on the navigation screen to set the rear camera delay feature to on or off When towing the camera system will only see what is being towed behind the vehicle this might not provide adequate coverage as it usually provides in normal operation and some objects might not be seen The camera lens for the camera is located on the liftgate Keep the lens clean so the video image remains clear and undistorted Clean the lens with a soft lint free cloth and non abrasive cleaner Note If the camera system image is not clear or seems distorted it may be covered with water droplets snow mud or any other substance If this occurs clean the camera lens before using the camera system WARNING The camera system is a reverse aid supplement device that still requires the driver to use it in conjunction with the rearview mirror and the side mirrors for maximum coverage WARNING Objects that are close to either corner of the bumper or under the bumper might not be seen on the screen due to the limited coverage of the camera system A WARNING Backup as slow as possible since higher speeds might limit your reaction time to stop the vehicle A WARNING Do not use the camera system with the liftgate open If the back end of the vehicle is hit or damaged then check with your authorized dealer to have your rear video system checked for proper coverage and operation 279 Driving Night
174. eral times 3 Turn the engine off 4 Check the fluid level in the reservoir It should be between the MIN and MAX lines Do not add fluid if the level is in this range 5 If the fluid is low add fluid in small amounts continuously checking the level until it reaches the range between the MIN and MAX lines Be sure to put the cap back on the reservoir Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter for the proper fluid type 373 Maintenance and Specifications BRAKE FLUID The fluid level will drop slowly as the brakes wear and will rise when the brake components are replaced Fluid levels between the MIN and MAX lines are within the normal operating range there is no need to add fluid If the fluid levels are outside of the normal operating range the performance of the system could be compromised seek service from your authorized dealer immediately TRANSMISSION FLUID Checking automatic transmission fluid Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for scheduled intervals for fluid checks and changes Your transmission does not consume fluid However the fluid level should be checked if the transmission is not working properly i e if the transmission slips or shifts slowly or if you notice some sign of fluid leakage Automatic transmission fluid expands when warmed To obtain an accurate fluid check drive the vehicle until it is warmed up approximately 20 miles 30 km If yo
175. erate the vehicle with the engine oil level dipstick and or the engine oil filler cap removed 350 Maintenance and Specifications Engine oil and filter recommendations Look for this certification trademark PREM S D MOTOR OIL Use SAE 5W 20 engine oil Only use oils Certified For Gasoline Engines by the American Petroleum Institute API An oil with this trademark symbol conforms to the current engine and emission system protection standards and fuel economy requirements of the International Lubricant Standardization and Approval Committee ILSAC comprised of U S and Japanese automobile manufacturers To protect your engine and engine s warranty use Motorcraft SAE 5W 20 or an equivalent SAE 5W 20 oil meeting Ford specification WSS M2C930 A SAE 5W 20 oil provides optimum fuel economy and durability performance meeting all requirements for your vehicle s engine Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities later in this chapter for more information Do not use supplemental engine oil additives cleaners or other engine treatments They are unnecessary and could lead to engine damage that is not covered by Ford warranty Change your engine oil and filter according to the appropriate schedule listed in the scheduled maintenance information Ford production and Motorcraft replacement oil filters are designed for added engine protection and long life If a replacement oil filter is use
176. es each time the engine is started All features of the AdvanceTrac with RSC system TCS ESC and RSC are active and monitor the vehicle from start up However the system will only intervene if the driving situation requires it The AdvanceTrac with RSC ae system includes an AdvanceTrac A AIRBAG with RSC Off button on the sail center of the instrument panel the sliding car icon igi in the instrument cluster The sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will illuminate temporarily during start up as part of a normal system self check The sliding car icon 44 may illuminate flash during certain driving situation which cause the AdvanceTrac with RSC system to operate If the sliding car icon 5 illuminates steadily have the system serviced by an authorized dealer immediately The message center will also indicate a failure with the AdvanceTrac with RSC system Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information When AdvanceTrac with RSC performs a normal system self check some drivers may notice a slight movement of the brake and or a rumble grunting or grinding noise after startup and when driving off 263 Driving When an event occurs that activates AdvanceTrac with RSC you may experience the following e A slight deceleration of the vehicle e The sliding car indicator
177. est of a hill without seeing what conditions are on the other side Do not drive in reverse over a hill without the aid of an observer When climbing a steep slope or hill start in a lower gear rather than downshifting to a lower gear from a higher gear once the ascent has started This reduces strain on the engine and the possibility of stalling If you do stall out Do not try to turn around because you might roll over It is better to back down to a safe location Apply just enough power to the wheels to climb the hill Too much power will cause the tires to slip spin or lose traction resulting in loss of vehicle control 289 Driving Descend a hill in the same gear you would use to climb up the hill to avoid excessive brake application and brake overheating Do not descend in neutral instead disengage overdrive or manually shift to a lower gear When descending a steep hill avoid sudden hard braking as you could lose control The front wheels have to be turning in order to steer the vehicle Your vehicle has anti lock brakes therefore apply the brakes steadily Do not pump the brakes Driving on snow and ice Note Excessive tire slippage can cause transmission damage AWD vehicles have advantages over 2WD vehicles in snow and ice but can skid like any other vehicle Should you start to slide while driving on snowy or icy roads turn the steering wheel in the direction of the slide until you regain control Avoi
178. estraint by pressing the head restraint release button while sliding the head restraint fully down 2 Pull on the strap located on the back of the second row seat This will fold the seatback forward Pull the strap a second time to tumble the seat forward allowing easy exit from the 3rd row seat 3 To return the seatback to the floor from tumbled position rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor 165 Seating and Safety Restraints 4 To return the seatback to the a upright position N e Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle and e Rotate the seatback until you ee hear a click locking it in the C upright position Ss Note The seatback will not raise if a the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker If the seatback does not raise then repeat steps 3 and 4 5 Pull the head restraint back up to its normal adjusted position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Ensure that the rear latch hooks are properly engaged with the floor striker Note Ensure that the seat and seatback are latched securely in position Keep floor area free of objects tha
179. estraints WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not stow objects in seat back map pocket if equipped or hang objects off seat back if a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console Gf equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag Status Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system In case there is a problem with the e P front passenger sensing system the airbag readiness lamp in the S instrument cluster will stay lit If the airbag readiness lamp is lit do the following The driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects that may be lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat If objects are lodged and or cargo is interfering with the seat please take the following steps to remove the obstruction e Pull the vehicle over e Turn the vehicle off e Driver and or adult passengers should check for any objects lodged underneath the front passenger seat or cargo interfering with the seat Remove the obstruction s Gf found Restart the vehicle e Wait at least two minutes and verify that the airbag readiness lamp is no longer illuminated If the airbag readiness lamp remains illuminated this may or may not be a problem due to the front passenger sens
180. et or exceed rigid specifications For best results use the following products or products of equivalent quality Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 Motorcraft Custom Clear Coat Polish ZC 8 A Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A Motorcraft Dusting Cloth ZC 24 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser U S only ZC 20 Motorcraft Engine Shampoo Canada only CXC 66 A Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner Canada only CXC 101 341 Cleaning Motorcraft Premium Glass Cleaner Canada only CXC 100 Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate U S only ZC 32 A Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover U S only ZC 14 Motorcraft Tire Clean and Shine ZC 28 Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner Canada only CXC 93 Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A 342 Maintenance and Specifications SERVICE RECOMMENDATIONS To help you service your vehicle we provide scheduled maintenance information which makes tracking routine service easy If your vehicle requires professional service your authorized dealer can provide the necessary parts and service Check your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide to find out which parts and services are covered Use only recommended fuels
181. etent ae and hold the switch to open AUTO e Pull up to the first detent and hold the switch to close Rear Window Buffeting When one or both of the rear windows are open the vehicle may demonstrate a wind throb or buffeting noise This noise can be alleviated by lowering a front window approximately two to three inches One touch up or down driver s window only This feature allows the driver s window to open or close fully without holding the control down To operate one touch down e Press the switch completely down to the second detent and release quickly The window will open fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal close or one touch up position during a one touch down event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal close or one touch up 101 Driver Controls To operate one touch up e Pull the switch completely up to the second detent and release quickly The window will close fully Momentarily press the switch to any position to stop the window operation If the switch is pressed and held to the normal open or one touch down position during a one touch up event the window will stop If after 1 2 second the switch is still held the window will perform a normal open or one touch down Window lock The window lock featu
182. ether strap afterward if included with the child seat Refer to Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children in this chapter Attaching child safety seats with tether straps s Many forward facing child safety seats include a tether strap which extends from the back of the child safety seat and hooks to an anchoring point called the top tether anchor Tether straps are available as an accessory for many older safety seats Contact the manufacturer of your child seat for information about ordering a tether strap or to obtain a longer tether strap if the tether strap on your safety seat does not reach the appropriate top tether anchor in the vehicle The rear seats of your vehicle are equipped with built in tether strap anchors located behind the seats as described below The tether strap anchors in your vehicle are in the following positions shown from top view e 40 40 second row seats and third row passenger side e 60 40 second row seats and third row passenger side E 4 Allik Attach the tether strap only to the appropriate tether anchor as shown The tether strap may not work properly if attached somewhere other than the correct tether anchor 210 Seating and Safety Restraints Once the child safety seat has been installed using either the safety belt the lower anchors of the LATCH system or both you can attach the top tether strap
183. ety practices Driving habits have a great deal to do with your tire mileage and safety e Observe posted speed limits e Avoid fast starts stops and turns e Avoid potholes and objects on the road e Do not run over curbs or hit the tire against a curb when parking WARNING If your vehicle is stuck in snow mud sand etc do not rapidly spin the tires spinning the tires can tear the tire and cause an explosion A tire can explode in as little as three to five seconds WARNING Do not spin the wheels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Highway hazards No matter how carefully you drive there s always the possibility that you may eventually have a flat tire on the highway Drive slowly to the closest safe area out of traffic This may further damage the flat tire but your safety is more important If you feel a sudden vibration or ride disturbance while driving or you suspect your tire or vehicle has been damaged immediately reduce your speed Drive with caution until you can safely pull off the road Stop and inspect the tires for damage If a tire is under inflated or damaged deflate it remove wheel and replace it with your spare tire and wheel If you cannot detect a cause have the vehicle towed to the nearest repair facility or tire dealer to have the vehicle inspected Tire and wheel alignment A bad jolt from hitting a curb or pothole can cause the front end of your vehicle t
184. ewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e Use Motorcraft Custom Bright Metal Cleaner ZC 15 available from your authorized dealer Apply the product as you would a wax to clean bumpers and other chrome parts allow the cleaner to dry for a few minutes then wipe off the haze with a clean dry rag e Never use abrasive materials such as steel wool or plastic pads as they can scratch the chrome surface e After polishing chrome bumpers apply a coating of Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product to help protect from environmental effects 334 Cleaning WAXING e Wash the vehicle first e Do not use waxes that contain abrasives use Motorcraft Premium Liquid Wax ZC 53 A which is available from your authorized dealer or an equivalent quality product e Do not allow paint sealant to come in contact with any non body ow gloss black colored trim such as grained door handles roof racks bumpers side moldings mirror housings or the windshield cowl area The paint sealant will gray or stain the parts over time PAINT CHIPS Your authorized dealer has touch up paint to match your vehicle s color Take your color code printed on a sticker in the driver s door jamb to your authorized dealer to ensure you get the correct color e Remove particles such as bird droppings tree sap insect deposits tar sp
185. ey is placed in the ignition The easy entry feature can be turned off or on through the vehicle message center Refer to Message center in the Driver controls chapter 159 Seating and Safety Restraints REAR SEATS Head restraints Lift the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head The head restraints can be moved 4 up by pulling up on the head restraint Press the release button to lower head restraint WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 160 Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it 4 reaches the highest adjustment position a 2 Press and hold the unlock remove button then pull up on the head A restraint LS To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks A Properly adjust the head restraint so that it is located directly or as close as possible behind your head WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly 161 Seating and Safety Restraints Adjusting second row bucket and bench seat back Lift the handle to adjust seatback Using same contr
186. f automatically in all airflow modes except MAX A C 8 ay Passenger heated seat control Press once to activate high heat setting two indicator lights press again to activate low heat setting one indicator light and press again to deactivate the passenger heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 9 PASS TEMP Press to activate separate passenger temperature control and turn the dial to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle 72 Climate Controls 10 Q Power Cabin temperature Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle Turn the dial to increase decrease the airflow temperature on the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when PASS TEMP is off 11 4 Driver heated seat control Press to heat the driver seat Press once to activate high heat two indicator lights Press again to activate low heat one indicator light Press again to deactivate the driver heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 12 69 Rear defroster Heated mirrors Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster and heated outside mirrors if equipped Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter and Heated outside mirrors in the Driver controls chapter
187. f the ice on the windshield before turning on the wipers The layer of ice has many sharp edges and can damage the micro edge of the wiper rubber element Changing rear window wiper blade The rear wiper arm is designed without a service position This reduces the risk of damage to the blade in an automatic car wash To replace the wiper blade 1 Grab the wiper arm with one hand close to the arm blade joint ee and pull it as far away from the ae glass as possible Do not use excessive force because it can break the wiper arm at the heel Hold it there until the next step 2 Grab the primary structure of the blade with the other hand close to the arm blade joint 3 Grip tightly and press on the arm blade joint from beneath and separate the blade from the arm 348 Maintenance and Specifications 4 Attach the new wiper to the wiper arm and press it into place until a click is heard If you find this procedure too difficult please see your dealer r ENGINE OIL Y7 Checking the engine oil Refer to the scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for checking the engine oil 1 Make sure the vehicle is on level ground 2 Turn the engine off and wait 15 minutes for the oil to drain into the oil pan 3 Set the parking brake and ensure the gearshift is securely latched in P Park 4 Open the hood Protect yourself from engine heat 5 Locate and carefully remove
188. f the service engine soon K indicator remains on have your vehicle serviced at the first available opportunity Although some malfunctions detected by the OBD II may not have symptoms that are apparent continued driving with the service engine soon C indicator on can result in increased emissions lower fuel economy reduced engine and transmission smoothness and lead to more costly repairs Readiness for Inspection Maintenance I M testing Some state provincial and local governments may have Inspection Maintenance I M programs to inspect the emission control equipment on your vehicle Failure to pass this inspection could prevent you from getting a vehicle registration Your vehicle may not pass the I M test if the service engine soon indicator is on or not working properly bulb is burned out or if the OBD II system has determined that some of the emission control systems have not been properly checked In this case the vehicle is considered not ready for I M testing If the service engine soon c indicator is on or the bulb does not work the vehicle may need to be serviced Refer to the On board diagnostics OBD II description in this chapter If the vehicle s engine or transmission has just been serviced or the battery has recently run down or been replaced the OBD II system may indicate that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing To determine if the vehicle is ready for I M testing turn the ignition key to the on po
189. fications chapter WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot AdvanceTrac Traction control Illuminates when the AdvanceTrac Traction control is active If the light remains on have the system serviced immediately refer to the Driving chapter for more information 14 pom i Instrument Cluster Low tire pressure warning Iluminates when your tire pressure is low If the light remains on at O start up or while driving the tire pressure should be checked Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter When the ignition is first turned to on the light will illuminate for three seconds to ensure the bulb is working If the light does not turn on or begins to flash have the system inspected by your authorized dealer For more information on this system refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Speed control Illuminates when the speed control is engaged Turns off when the speed control system is disengaged Overdrive cancel and grade assist if equipped Iluminates when the overdrive function of the transmission has been turned off and the grade assist function has been turned on refer to the Driving chapter Anti theft system Flashes when the SecuriLock Passive Anti theft System has been activated S3 D Door ajar Illuminates when the ignition is in the on position
190. fluid temperature management and What you should know about fail safe cooling in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter 7 sur 1 H WARNING Never remove the coolant reservoir cap while the engine is running or hot Fuel gauge Indicates l approximately how much fuel is left in the fuel tank when the ignition is in the on position The fuel gauge may vary slightly when the vehicle is in motion or on a grade m Ox The FUEL icon and arrow indicates which side of the vehicle the fuel filler door is located Refer to Falling the tank in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information speed in revolutions per minute Driving with your tachometer pointer continuously at the top of the scale may damage the engine Tachometer Indicates the engine Odometer Registers the total miles kilometers of the vehicle Refer to Message center in the Instrument o0 cluster chapter on how to switch the display from Metric to English Trip odometer See TRIP A B under Message center in this chapter 17 Instrument Cluster MESSAGE CENTER Your vehicle s message center allows you to configure personalize certain vehicle options to suit your needs The message center is also capable of monitoring many vehicle systems and will alert you to potential vehicle problems and various conditions with an informational message followed by a long indicator chime The message center dis
191. formation 25 Instrument Cluster MY KEY ACTIVE DRIVE SAFELY Displayed at startup when MyKey is in use Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information KEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a spare key using two existing MyKeys Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE SPEED 80 MPH MAX Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the Admin has enabled the MyKey speed limit and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information SPEED LIMITED TO 80 MPH Displayed when starting the vehicle and MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information CHECK SPEED DRIVE SAFELY Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the optional setting is on and the vehicle exceeds a preselected speed Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information VEHICLE NEAR TOP SPEED Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is approaching 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information TOP SPEED MY KEY SETTING Displayed when a MyKey is in use and the MyKey speed limit is on and the vehicle speed is 80 mph 130 km h Refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information BUCKLE UP TO
192. formation on the navigation system refer to the Navigation System supplement SYNC system hands free control feature if equipped Press h briefly to use the voice command feature You will hear a tone and LISTENING will appear in the radio display Press and hold m to exit voice command Press F to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to end a call or exit phone mode Press laa Pel to scroll through various menus and selections Press OK to confirm your selection For further information on the SYNC system refer to the SYNC supplement 107 Driver Controls Navigation system SYNC hands free control features if equipped Press ug control briefly until the voice mg icon appears on the Navigation display to use the voice command feature Press to activate phone mode or answer a phone call Press and hold to exit phone mode or end a call For further information on the Navigation system SYNC system refer to the Navigation System and SYNC supplements MULTI PANEL VISTA ROOF IF EQUIPPED The multi panel Vista Roof control is located on the overhead console WARNING Do not let children play with the multi panel vista roof or leave children unattended in the vehicle They may seriously hurt themselves The multi panel Vista Roof is equipped with an automatic one touch express opening and closing feature To stop motion at any time during the one
193. froster turns off automatically after 10 minutes or when the ignition is turned off To manually turn off the defroster before 10 minutes have passed press the control again Do not use razor blades or other sharp objects to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals from the inside of the rear window This may cause damage to the heated grid lines and will not be covered by your warranty CABIN AIR FILTER The cabin air filter element is designed to reduce the concentration of airborne particles such as dust spores and pollen in the air being supplied to the interior of the vehicle The presence of a particulate filter element provides the following benefits e Improves your driving comfort by reducing particle concentration e Improves the interior compartment cleanliness e Protects the climate control components from particle deposits Note A cabin air filter must be installed at all times to prevent foreign objects from entering the system Running the system without a filter in place could result in degradation or damage to the system The access door for the filter is located behind the glove box For replacement intervals regarding the cabin air filter see the scheduled maintenance information For more information regarding your filter see your authorized dealer 79 Lights HEADLAMP CONTROL Turns the lamps off p Turns on the parking lamps instrument panel lamps license plate lamps and tail la
194. fter which you will have 10 30 seconds to return to your vehicle and complete the following steps If you cannot locate the learn button refer to the Owner s Guide of your garage door opener or call the toll free Car2U system help line at 1 866 57Car2U 1 866 572 2728 3 Return to your vehicle Press and hold the Car2U system button you would like to use to control the O O O garage door You may need to hold the button from 5 20 seconds during which time the selected button indicator light will blink slowly Immediately within 1 second release the button once the garage door moves When the button is released the indicator light will begin to blink rapidly until programming is complete 4 Press and release the button again The garage door should move confirming that programming is successful If your garage door does not operate repeat the previous steps in this section After successful programming you will be able to operate your Car2U system by pressing the button you programmed to activate the opener The indicator light above the selected button will turn on to confirm that the Car2U system is responding to the button command To program another rolling code device such as an additional garage door opener a security device or home lighting repeat Steps 1 through 4 substituting a different function button in Step 3 than what you used for the garage door opener For example you could assign the
195. funnel or properly dispose of it Extra funnels can be purchased from your authorized dealer if you choose to dispose of the funnel Do not use aftermarket funnels they will not work with the Easy Fuel system and can damage it The included funnel has been specially designed to work safely with your vehicle ESSENTIALS OF GOOD FUEL ECONOMY Measuring techniques Your best source of information about actual fuel economy is you the driver You must gather information as accurately and consistently as possible Fuel expense frequency of fill ups or fuel gauge readings are NOT accurate as a measure of fuel economy We do not recommend taking fuel economy measurements during the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of driving engine break in period You will get a more accurate measurement after 2 000 miles 3 000 miles 3 000 km 5 000 km Filling the tank The advertised fuel capacity of the fuel tank on your vehicle is equal to the rated refill capacity of the fuel tank as listed in the Maintenance product specifications and capacities section of this chapter The advertised capacity is the amount of the indicated capacity and the empty reserve combined Indicated capacity is the difference in the amount of fuel in a full tank and a tank when the fuel gauge indicates empty Empty reserve is the small amount of fuel remaining in the fuel tank after the fuel gauge indicates empty 367 Maintenance and Specifications The amount of usable
196. gher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door The cold inflation pressure should never be set lower than the recommended pressure on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label When weather temperature changes occur tire inflation pressures also change A 10 F 6 C temperature drop can cause a corresponding drop of 1 psi 7 kPa in inflation pressure Check your tire pressures frequently and adjust them to the proper pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label To check the pressure in your tire s 1 Make sure the tires are cool meaning they are not hot from driving even a mile If you are checking tire pressure when the tire is hot i e driven more than 1 mile 1 6 km never bleed or reduce air pressure The tires are hot from driving and it is normal for pressures to increase above recommended cold pressures A hot tire at or below recommended cold inflation pressure could be significantly under inflated 223 Tires Wheels and Loading Note If you have to drive a distance to get air for your tire s check and record the tire pressure first and add the appropriate air pressure when you get to the pump It is normal for tires to heat up and the air pressure inside to go up as you drive 2 Remove t
197. ginal transmitter for use in other vehicles as well as for future programming procedures i e new HomeLink equipped vehicle purchase It is also suggested that upon the sale of the vehicle the programmed Homelink buttons be erased for security purposes refer to Programming in this section Programming Do not program HomeLink with the vehicle parked in the garage Note Your vehicle may require the ignition switch to be turned to the accessory position for programming and or operation of the HomeLink It is also recommended that a new battery be placed in the hand held transmitter of the device being programmed to HomeLink for quicker training and accurate transmission of the radio frequency signal 110 Driver Controls 1 Position the end of your hand held transmitter 1 3 inches 2 8 cm away from the HomeLink button you wish to program located on your visor while keeping the indicator light in view 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the chosen HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons until the HomeLink indicator light changes from a slow to a rapidly blinking light Now you may release both the HomeLink and hand held transmitter buttons Note Some entry gates and garage door openers may require you to replace Step 2 with procedures noted in the Gate Operator and Canadian Programming in this section for Canadian residents 3 Firmly press and hold for five seconds and release the programmed HomeLink
198. he appropriate loading capacity of your vehicle can be limited either by volume capacity Chow much space is available or by payload capacity how much weight the vehicle should carry Once you have reached the maximum payload of your vehicle do not add more cargo even if there is space available Overloading or improperly loading your vehicle can contribute to loss of vehicle control and vehicle rollover 243 Tires Wheels and Loading Example only TIRE AND LOADING INFORMATION SEATING CAPACITY TOTALS FRONT2 REAR3 The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs TIRE COLD TIRE PRESSURE me s eoor see OWNERS T145 80D16 420 KPA 60 PSI INFORMATION XXX XX XXXX XXXX P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI XXXXXXXXXXXXXXX TIRE AND LOAD INFORMATION RENSEIGNEMENTS RELATIFS AUX PNEUS ET A LA CHARGE SEATING CAPACITY TOTAL REAR NOMBRE DE PLACES TOTAL XX ARRI RE x The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg La charge du v hicule occupants et bagages ne doit jamais d passer XXX Ibs SZE COLD TIRE PRESSURE cee owners manuaL Ate ai PRESSION A FROID FoR aDDIMONAL LT22575R16 5E 200 KPA 29 PSI SONDAG CONSULTER LE GUIDE LT225 75R 16 5E 200KPA 29PS DUPROPRIETAmE POUR DE PLUS T145 80016 420 KPA 60 PSI AMPLES P225 60R17 200 KPA 29 PSI RENSEIGNEMENTS XXX XX XXXX XXXX XXKXXKXXKXAXXXXX CARGO Cargo W
199. he cap from the valve on one tire then firmly press the tire gauge onto the valve and measure the pressure 3 Add enough air to reach the recommended air pressure Note If you overfill the tire release air by pressing on the metal stem in the center of the valve Then recheck the pressure with your tire gauge 4 Replace the valve cap 5 Repeat this procedure for each tire including the spare Note Some spare tires operate at a higher inflation pressure than the other tires For T type mini spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tive wheel information section for description Store and maintain at 60 psi 4 15 bar For Full Size and Dissimilar spare tires see the Dissimilar spare tire wheel information section for description Store and maintain at the higher of the front and rear inflation pressure as shown on the Tire Label 6 Visually inspect the tires to make sure there are no nails or other objects embedded that could poke a hole in the tire and cause an air leak 7 Check the sidewalls to make sure there are no gouges cuts or bulges TIRE CARE Inspecting your tires and wheel valve stems Periodically inspect the tire treads for uneven or excessive wear and remove objects such as stones nails or glass that may be wedged in the tread grooves Check the tire and valve stems for holes cracks or cuts that may permit air leakage and repair or replace the tire and replace the valve stem Inspect the tire sidewalls for crack
200. he first time you try to restart and may take one additional attempt WARNING Failure to inspect and if necessary repair fuel leaks after a collision may increase the risk of fire and serious injury Ford Motor Company recommends that the fuel system be inspected by an authorized dealer after any collision FUSES AND RELAYS Fuses If electrical components in the vehicle are not working a fuse may have blown Blown fuses are identified by a broken wire within the fuse Check the appropriate 15 fuses before replacing any electrical components Note Always replace a fuse with one that has the specified amperage rating Using a fuse with a higher amperage rating can cause severe wire damage and could start a fire 294 Roadside Emergencies Standard fuse amperage rating and color COLOR Fuse Mini Standard Cartridge Fuse link maxi rating fuses cartridge C Roa 25a Natural Natural M o aoa Orange areen Green soa Red rea Red eoa Bue Yellow Yelow S ton Brown Peon Natural Black Black 295 Roadside Emergencies Passenger compartment fuse panel co fro is X Fe 2 PPPLD pp Ce K aj fa a le kar no i ef i nf prof fy e foo el el foo lel foo al JS fo gt fo io c cs cs Czy Ci6_ 3 C27 C28 5 b The fuse panel i
201. he horn will chirp once if autounlock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autounlock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 130 Locks and Security Keyless entry keypad autounlock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Touch and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 touch and release the 7 e 8 While still holding the 3 e 4 touch and release the 7 e 8a second time 5 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled CHILDPROOF DOOR LOCKS e When these locks are set the a rear doors cannot be opened from cli the inside e The rear doors can be opened G from the outside when the doors E are unlocked A A The childproof locks are located on rear edge of each rear door and must be set separately for each door Setting the lock for one door will not automatically set the lock for both doors e Insert the key and turn to the lock position key horizontal to engage the childproof locks Insert the key and turn to the unlock position key vertical to disengage the childproof locks 131 Locks and Security REMOTE ENTRY SYSTEM The Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT co
202. he tire pressures but shift to a lower gear and drive steadily through the terrain Apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning the wheels When driving at slow speeds in deep sand under high outside temperatures use a low gear when possible Lower gear operation will maximize the engine and transmission cooling capability Under severe operating conditions the A C may cycle on and off to protect overheating of the engine Avoid excessive speed because vehicle momentum can work against you and cause the vehicle to become stuck to the point that assistance may be required from another vehicle Remember you may be able to back out the way you came if you proceed with caution Mud and water If you must drive through high water drive slowly Traction or brake capability may be limited When driving through water determine the depth avoid water higher than the bottom of the wheel rims if possible and proceed slowly If the ignition system gets wet the vehicle may stall Once through water always try the brakes Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as effectively as dry brakes Drying can be improved by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Be cautious of sudden changes in vehicle speed or direction when you are driving in mud Even AWD vehicles can lose traction in slick mud As when you are driving over sand apply the accelerator slowly and avoid spinning your wheels If the vehicle does sl
203. he vehicle has been stationary and out of direct sunlight for an hour or more and prior to the vehicle being driven for 1 mile 1 6 km e Recommended inflation pressure The cold inflation pressure found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door e B pillar The structural member at the side of the vehicle behind the front door e Bead area of the tire Area of the tire next to the rim e Sidewall of the tire Area between the bead area and the tread e Tread area of the tire Area of the perimeter of the tire that contacts the road when mounted on the vehicle e Rim The metal support wheel for a tire or a tire and tube assembly upon which the tire beads are seated INFLATING YOUR TIRES Safe operation of your vehicle requires that your tires are properly inflated Remember that a tire can lose up to half of its air pressure without appearing flat Every day before you drive check your tires If one looks lower than the others use a tire gauge to check pressure of all tires and adjust if required At least once a month and before long trips inspect each tire and check the tire pressure with a tire gauge including spare if equipped Inflate all tires to the inflation pressure recommended by Ford Motor Company You are strongly urged to buy a reliable tire pressure gauge as automatic service station gauges may be inaccurate Ford recommends the use
204. heater operation longer than three hours will not improve system performance and will unnecessarily use additional electricity Make sure system is unplugged and properly stowed before driving the vehicle While not in use make sure the protective cover seals the prongs of the engine block heater cord plug BRAKES Occasional brake noise is normal If a metal to metal continuous grinding or continuous squeal sound is present the brake linings may be worn out and should be inspected by an authorized dealer If the vehicle has continuous vibration or shudder in the steering wheel while braking the vehicle should be inspected by an authorized dealer Refer to Brake system warning light in the Instrument Cluster chapter for information on the brake system warning light B RAKE Four wheel anti lock brake system ABS Your vehicle is equipped with an anti lock braking system ABS This system helps you maintain steering control during emergency stops by keeping the brakes from locking Noise from the ABS pump motor and brake pedal pulsation may be observed during ABS braking and the brake pedal may suddenly travel a little farther as soon as ABS braking is done and normal brake operation resumes These are normal characteristics of the ABS and should be no reason for concern Using ABS When hard braking is required apply continuous force on the brake pedal do not pump the brake pedal since this will reduce the effectiveness of the
205. heels at over 35 mph 56 km h The tires may fail and injure a passenger or bystander Emergency maneuvers e In an unavoidable emergency situation where a sudden sharp turn must be made remember to avoid over driving your vehicle e turn the steering wheel only as rapidly and as far as required to avoid the emergency Excessive steering will result in less vehicle control not more Additionally smooth variations of the accelerator and or brake pedal pressure should be utilized if changes in vehicle speed are called for Avoid abrupt steering acceleration or braking which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and or personal injury Use all available road surface to return the vehicle to a safe direction of travel 287 Driving e In the event of an emergency stop avoid skidding the tires and do not attempt any sharp steering wheel movements e If the vehicle goes from one type of surface to another i e from concrete to gravel there will be a change in the way the vehicle responds to a maneuver steering acceleration or braking Again avoid these abrupt inputs AWD Systems if equipped AWD uses all four wheels to power the vehicle This increases traction enabling you to drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot Sand When driving over sand try to keep all four wheels on the most solid area of the trail Avoid reducing t
206. hicle is equipped with remote start see the Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems section 144 Locks and Security Note The MyKey can be cleared within the same key cycle that it was created otherwise a standard key Administrator key is required to disable the MyKey programming To clear all MyKeys go to step 2 in the Disable MyKey section Programming MyKey Optional Settings Turn the ignition on using an Admin key To program the optional settings use the message center buttons to do the following 1 Press SETUP until RESET FOR MYKEY SETUP is displayed 2 Press and release the RESET button to display MyKey setup menus The first menu shown is MYKEY MAX MPH lt 80 MPH gt OFF 3 If you don t want to change the maximum speed setting press the SETUP button to display the next menu The remaining menus appear as follows with the default settings shown MYKEY MPH TONES 45 55 65 lt OFF gt MYKEY VOLUME LIMIT lt ON gt OFF MYKEY ADVTRAC CTRL ON lt OFF gt 4 On any of the menus press RESET to highlight your choice with the SAS 5 Press SETUP to enter your choice The next optional setting will be displayed 6 Repeat steps 4 and 5 until you are done changing the optional settings Disable MyKey To reset all MyKeys as Admin keys do the following 1 Turn the vehicle on using the Admin key 2 Press SETUP until PRESS RESET TO CLEAR MYKEY is displayed 3 Press and release the RESET button
207. hicle is parked for extended periods Always keep the power point caps closed when not being used Power point 110 VAC if equipped The 110 VAC power point outlet is used for powering electrical devices that require up to 150W Exceeding the 150W limit will cause the power point to cut off the power temporarily to provide overload protection Note The 110 VAC power point is equipped with a safety cap and a safety twist tab They both provide protection from inserting any object into the power point other than the 110 VAC electrical device plug The safety cap should always be ina closed position whenever the power point outlet is not in use The 110 VAC power point is located on the back of the center console 99 Driver Controls The power outlet is not designed for the following electric appliances they may not work properly e Cathode ray tube type televisions e Motor loads such as vacuum cleaners electric saws and other electric power tools compressor driven refrigerators etc e Measuring devices which process precise data such as medical equipment measuring equipment etc e Other appliances requiring an extremely stable power supply microcomputer controlled electric blankets touch sensor lamps etc WARNING Do not keep electrical devices plugged in the power point whenever the device is not in use Do not use any extension cord with the 110 VAC power point since it wil
208. icate and try again When inflating the tire for mounting pressures up to 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure on the tire sidewall the following precautions must be taken to protect the person mounting the tire 1 Make sure that you have the correct tire and wheel size 2 Lubricate the tire bead and wheel bead seat area again 3 Stand at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly 4 Use both eye and ear protection For a mounting pressure more than 20 psi 1 38 bar greater than the maximum pressure a Ford Dealer or other tire service professional should do the mounting Always inflate steel carcass tires with a remote air fill with the person inflating standing at a minimum of 12 ft 8 66 m away from the tire wheel assembly Important Remember to replace the wheel valve stems when the road tires are replaced on your vehicle It is recommended that the two front tires or two rear tires generally be replaced as a pair The tire pressure sensors mounted in the wheels originally installed on your vehicle are not designed to be used in aftermarket wheels The use of wheels or tires not recommended by Ford Motor Company may affect the operation of your Tire Pressure Monitoring System If the TPMS indicator is flashing your TPMS is malfunctioning Your replacement tire might be incompatible with your TPMS or some component of the TPMS may be damaged 227 Tires Wheels and Loading Saf
209. ide steer in the direction of the slide until you regain control of the vehicle 288 Driving If the engine transmission AWD system components or axles are submerged in water their fluids should be checked and changed if necessary Driving through deep water may damage the engine or transmission If the front or rear axle is submerged in water the axle lubricant and PTU Power Transfer Unit lubricant should be checked and changed if necessary After driving through mud clean off residue stuck to rotating driveshafts and tires Excess mud stuck on tires and rotating driveshafts causes an imbalance that could damage drive components Tread Lightly is an educational program designed to increase public awareness of land use regulations and responsibilities in our nations wilderness areas Ford Motor Company joins the U S Forest Service and the Bureau of Land Management in encouraging you to help preserve our national forest and other public and private lands by treading lightly Driving on hilly or sloping terrain Although natural obstacles may make it necessary to travel diagonally up or down a hill or steep incline you should always try to drive straight up or straight down Avoid driving crosswise or turning on steep slopes or hills A danger lies in losing traction slipping sideways and possibly rolling over Whenever driving on a hill determine beforehand the route you will use Do not drive over the cr
210. ide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 2 G Rear defroster Press to activate deactivate the rear window defroster Refer to Rear window defroster later in this chapter for more information 3 Multifunction control Press repeatedly to choose a setting e 3 Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e 2 Distributes air through the floor vents and rear seat floor vents 68 Climate Controls 4 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C G7 defrost and GA floor defrost 5 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except QH defrost When the ignition switch is turned off a
211. if e Any door the hood or the liftgate is opened without using the door key keypad or the remote entry transmitter portion of your IKT e The ignition is turned to the on position with an invalid SecuriLock key or IKT 150 Seating and Safety Restraints SEATING WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision WARNING Do not pile cargo higher than the seatbacks to reduce the risk of injury in a collision or sudden stop WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision Adjustable head restraints Your vehicle is equipped with front row outboard head restraints that are vertically adjustable WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash the driver and passenger occupants should not sit in and or operate the vehicle until the head restraint is placed in its proper position The driver should never adjust the head restraint while the vehicle is in motion The adjustable head restraints consist of e a trimmed energy absorbing foam and structure 1 e two steel stems 2 e a guide sleeve adjust re
212. ifications emission control such non Ford parts should be equivalent to genuine Ford Motor Company parts in performance and durability WARNING Do not park idle or drive your vehicle in dry grass or other dry ground cover The emission system heats up the engine compartment and exhaust system which can start a fire Illumination of the service engine soon indicator charging system warning light or the temperature warning light fluid leaks strange odors smoke or loss of engine power could indicate that the emission control system is not working properly An improperly operating or damaged exhaust system may allow exhaust to enter the vehicle Have a damaged or improperly operating exhaust system inspected and repaired immediately WARNING Exhaust leaks may result in entry of harmful and potentially lethal fumes into the passenger compartment Do not make any unauthorized changes to your vehicle or engine By law vehicle owners and anyone who manufactures repairs services sells leases trades vehicles or supervises a fleet of vehicles are not permitted to intentionally remove an emission control device or prevent it from working Information about your vehicle s emission system is on the Vehicle Emission Control Information Decal located on or near the engine This decal also lists engine displacement Please consult your Warranty Guide Customer Information Guide for complete emission warranty information On board diag
213. ight of the driver and passengers that will be riding in your vehicle 3 Subtract the combined weight of the driver and passengers from XXX kg or XXX lbs 4 The resulting figure equals the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity For example if the XXX amount equals 1 400 Ibs and there will be five 150 lb passengers in your vehicle the amount of available cargo and luggage load capacity is 650 lbs 1400 750 5 x 150 650 Ib In metric units 635 340 5 x 68 295 kg 5 Determine the combined weight of luggage and cargo being loaded on the vehicle That weight may not safely exceed the available cargo and luggage load capacity calculated in Step 4 6 If your vehicle will be towing a trailer load from your trailer will be transferred to your vehicle Consult this manual to determine how this reduces the available cargo and luggage load capacity of your vehicle The following gives you a few examples on how to calculate the available amount of cargo and luggage load capacity e Another example for your vehicle with 1 400 lb 635 kg of cargo and luggage capacity You decide to go golfing Is there enough load capacity to carry you 4 of your friends and all the golf bags You and four friends average 220 lb 99 kg each and the golf bags weigh approximately 30 lb 13 5 kg each The calculation would be 1 400 5 x 220 5 x 30 1 400 1 100 150 150 Ib Yes you have enough load capacity in your v
214. ility Attempting to push start a vehicle with an automatic transmission may cause transmission damage 319 Roadside Emergencies Preparing your vehicle When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the automatic transmission must relearn its shift strategy As a result the transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation 1 Use only a 12 volt supply to start your vehicle 2 Do not disconnect the battery of the disabled vehicle as this could damage the vehicle s electrical system 3 Park the booster vehicle close to the hood of the disabled vehicle making sure the two vehicles do not touch Set the parking brake on both vehicles and stay clear of the engine cooling fan and other moving parts 4 Check all battery terminals and remove any excessive corrosion before you attach the battery cables Ensure that vent caps are tight and level 5 Turn the heater fan on in both vehicles to protect from any electrical surges Turn all other accessories off Connecting the jumper cables 1 Connect the positive jumper cable to the positive terminal of the discharged battery Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 320 Roadside Emergencies 2 Connect the
215. in factory supplied materials or workmanship during the warranty period as well as any component damaged by the defective accessories The accessories will be warranted for whichever provides you the greatest benefit e 12 months or 12 000 miles 20 000 km whichever occurs first or e the remainder of your new vehicle limited warranty Contact your dealer for details and a copy of the warranty The following is a list of several Genuine Ford Accessories Not all accessories are available for all models For a complete listing of the accessories that are available for your vehicle please contact your dealer or visit our online store at www fordaccessories com Exterior style Bug shields Deflectors Chrome wheels Graphic kits Interior style Ambient lighting Backlit door sill plates Floor mats Lifestyle Ash cup coin holder Trailer hitches wiring harnesses and accessories 386 Accessories Peace of mind Remote start Locking fuel plug for capless fuel systems Cargo area protector Wheel locks For maximum vehicle performance keep the following information in mind when adding accessories or equipment to your vehicle e When adding accessories equipment passengers and luggage to your vehicle do not exceed the total weight capacity of the vehicle or of the front or rear axle GVWR or GAWR as indicated on the Safety Compliance Certification label Consult your authorized dealer for specific weight information
216. ing Understanding the gearshift positions of the 6 speed automatic transmission with transmission control switch if equipped Your vehicle has been designed to improve fuel economy by reducing fuel usage while coasting or decelerating When you take your foot off the accelerator pedal and the vehicle begins to slow down the torque converter clutch locks up and aggressively shuts off fuel flow to the engine while decelerating This fuel economy benefit may be perceived as a light to medium braking sensation when removing your foot from the accelerator pedal P Park This position locks the transmission and prevents the front wheels from turning To put your vehicle in gear e Press the brake pedal e Move the gearshift lever into the desired gear To put your vehicle in P Park e Come to a complete stop e Move the gearshift lever and securely latch it in P Park WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle R Reverse With the gearshift lever in R Reverse the vehicle will move backward Always come to a complete stop before shifting into and out of R Reverse N Neutral With the gearshift lever in N Neutral the vehicle can be started and is free to roll Hold the brake pedal down while in this position D Drive with Overdrive The normal driving position for the best fuel
217. ing cuts bruises and other signs of damage or excessive wear If internal damage to the tire is suspected have the tire demounted and inspected in case it needs to be repaired or replaced For your safety tires that are damaged or show signs of excessive wear should not be used because they are more likely to blow out or fail 224 Tires Wheels and Loading Improper or inadequate vehicle maintenance can cause tires to wear abnormally Inspect all your tires including the spare frequently and replace them if one or more of the following conditions exist Tire wear When the tread is worn down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm tires must be replaced to help prevent your vehicle from skidding and hydroplaning Built in treadwear indicators or wear bars which look like narrow strips of smooth rubber across the tread will appear on the tire when the tread is worn EEr down to 1 16th of an inch 2 mm aa A When the tire tread wears down to the same height as these wear bars the tire is worn out and must be replaced Damage Periodically inspect the tire treads and sidewalls for damage such as bulges in the tread or sidewalls cracks in the tread groove and separation in the tread or sidewall If damage is observed or suspected have the tire inspected by a tire professional Tires can be damaged during off road use so inspection after off road use is also recommended WARNING Age Tires degrade over time de
218. ing Association 2 215 Indicates the nominal width of the tire in millimeters from sidewall edge to sidewall edge In general the larger the number the wider the tire 3 65 Indicates the aspect ratio which gives the tire s ratio of height to width 4 R Indicates a radial type tire 5 15 Indicates the wheel or rim diameter in inches If you change your wheel size you will have to purchase new tires to match the new wheel diameter 6 95 Indicates the tire s load index It is an index that relates to how much weight a tire can carry You may find this information in your Owner s Guide If not contact a local tire dealer Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law 7 H Indicates the tire s speed rating The speed rating denotes the speed at which a tire is designed to be driven for extended periods of time under a standard condition of load and inflation pressure The tires on your vehicle may operate at different conditions for load and inflation pressure These speed ratings may need to be adjusted for the difference in conditions The ratings range from 81 mph 130 km h to 186 mph 299 km h These ratings are listed in the following chart 231 Tires Wheels and Loading Note You may not find this information on all tires because it is not required by federal law ETB VR po NT 8 mph 140 kv E k PQ 99 mph 59 rv k PR 106 mph ATL rv
219. ing fuel economy 367 octane rating 0 ee 364 382 GUAY sea oucneaseeuthlaheted te 365 running out of fuel 319 365 safety information relating to automotive fuels cccee 361 USES E EEA E T 294 G Garage door Opener 000 109 Gas cap see Fuel cap 363 Gas mileage see Fuel economy 00008 367 GAUGES spara nesie NR 16 H Hazard flashers cccccceeees 293 Head restraints 0 0 160 162 Headlamps s xscsesisesseasedecdvesverasaave 80 AMINE srusio 82 83 autolamp system cc cece 80 bulb specifications 00 86 daytime running lights 82 flash UO PASS reuen 81 high DAMM tirerai 81 replacing bulbs ee 87 turning on and off 80 Heating heating and air conditioning SVSUCIM sirere kee eeni 68 71 74 393 Index Homelink wireless control SVSUCIM seers kinka Ear nn EEEn 110 HOOd ruraran n 344 I IENitiIOT serseri inaa 255 382 Illuminated visor mirror 93 Infant seats see Safety seats oo 203 Inspection maintenance I M GESUING sapecak e 372 Instrument panel CLEANING erion 339 CISTET aaa ete 12 lighting up panel and ALETO A A ges 82 J JACK sroror asa ias 302 POSITIONING fs ssecccceesdsageashocsvavsse 302 Stora e porisee reiros enigis 302 Jump starting your vehicle 319 K Keyless entry system AULOLOCK eieo 127 keypad assessements 138 locking and unlocking doors 139 progra
220. ing speed control The speed controls are located on the steering wheel The following buttons work with speed control RESUME Press to resume a set speed SET Press to increase the set speed SET Press to decrease the set speed OFF ON Press to turn speed control off or on Setting speed conirol To set speed control 1 Press and release ON 2 Accelerate to the desired speed 3 Press and release SET or SET 4 Take your foot off the accelerator pedal 5 The indicator O light on the instrument cluster will turn on Note e Vehicle speed may vary momentarily when driving up and down a steep hill If the vehicle speed increases above the set speed on a downhill you may want to apply the brakes to reduce the speed If the vehicle speed decreases more than 10 mph 16 km h below your set speed on an uphill your speed control will disengage Disengaging speed control Press the brake pedal to disengage the speed control Disengaging the speed control will not erase the previous set speed Resuming a set speed Press and release RESUME This will automatically return the vehicle to the previously set speed 105 Driver Controls Increasing speed while using speed control To set a higher speed e Press and hold SET until you get to the desired speed then release You can also use SET to operate the tap up function Press and release SET to increase the vehicle set speed in 1 mph 1 6 km
221. ing stated Do not attach a child seat to any lower anchor if an adjacent child seat is attached to that anchor WARNING The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center Do not use LATCH lower anchors for the center seating position unless the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit and specify using anchors spaced at least as far apart as those in this vehicle If you install a child seat with rigid LATCH attachments do not tighten the tether strap enough to lift the child seat off the vehicle seat cushion when the child is seated in it Keep the tether strap just snug without lifting the front of the child seat Keeping the child seat just touching the vehicle seat gives the best protection in a severe crash Each time you use the safety seat check that the seat is properly attached to the lower anchors and tether anchor if applicable Tug the child seat from side to side and forward and back where it is secured to the vehicle The seat should move less than one inch when you do this for a proper installation If the safety seat is not anchored properly the risk of a child being injured in a crash greatly increases 209 Seating and Safety Restraints Combining safety belt and LATCH lower anchors for attaching child safety seats When used in combination either the safety belt or the LATCH lower anchors may be attached first provided a proper installation is achieved Attach the t
222. ing surfaces have a clear protective coating over the leather e For routine cleaning wipe the surface with a soft damp cloth For more thorough cleaning wipe the surface with a mild soap and water solution In Canada use Motorcraft Vinyl Cleaner CXC 93 Dry the area with a soft cloth If the leather cannot be completely cleaned using a mild soap and water solution the leather may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive leather e Do not use household cleaning products alcohol solutions solvents or cleaners intended for rubber vinyl and plastics or oil petroleum based leather conditioners These products may cause premature wearing of the clear protective coating Note In some instances color or dye transfer can occur when wet clothing comes in contact with leather upholstery If this occurs the leather should be cleaned immediately to avoid permanent staining UNDERBODY Flush the complete underside of your vehicle frequently Keep body and door drain holes free from packed dirt FORD AND LINCOLN MERCURY CAR CARE PRODUCTS Your Ford or Lincoln Mercury authorized dealer has many quality products available to clean your vehicle and protect its finishes These quality products have been specifically engineered to fulfill your automotive needs they are custom designed to complement the style and appearance of your vehicle Each product is made from high quality materials that me
223. ing system DO NOT attempt to repair or service the system take your vehicle immediately to an authorized dealer If it is necessary to modify an advanced front airbag system to accommodate a person with disabilities contact the Ford Customer Relationship Center at the phone number shown in the Customer Assistance chapter of this Owner s Guide 192 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Any alteration modification to the front passenger seat may affect the performance of the front passenger sensing system Determining if the system is operational The supplemental restraint system uses a warning indicator light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the airbag is not required A difficulty with the system is indicated by one or more of the following e The readiness light same light e for front and side airbag system will either flash or stay lit IN e The readiness light will not illuminate immediately after ignition is turned on e A series of five beeps will be heard The tone pattern will repeat periodically until the problem and or light are repaired If any of these things happen even intermittently have the supplemental restraint system serviced at an authorized dealer immediately Unless serviced the system may not function properly in the event of a collis
224. ion Seat mounted side airbag system fe WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the airbag cover on the side of the seatbacks of the front seats or in front seat areas that may come into contact with a deploying airbag Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision WARNING Do not use accessory seat covers The use of accessory seat covers may prevent the deployment of the side airbags and increase the risk of injury in an accident WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The side airbag could injure you as it deploys from the side of the seatback 193 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the airbag SRS its fuses or the seat cover on a seat containing an airbag Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible WARNING All occupants of the vehicle should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS is provided How does the side airbag system work The design and development of the side airbag system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags The side airbag system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon bag airbag with a gas generator concealed behind
225. ion DENSO cia ndeadeetessen cree tees 173 warning light and chime 180 Safety restraints LATCH ANICHOTS seri aaas 207 Safety seats for children 203 Safety Compliance Certification Label 383 Satellite Radio Gf equipped 28 Index Satellite Radio Information 43 DEALS ccccesdivssesccsecsseesssadonsnssncsaedscs child safety seats climate control 00cceeee easy access easyout feature 159 front seats sscseresrinisrasuss 154 heated n 71 158 167 Memory seat aeiee 135 159 second row seats 162 165 third row seats 165 168 169 Second row power fold seat 164 SecuriCode keyless entry SYSTE eae ves a ERE AE ESS 138 SecuriLock passive anti theft SySTET saei a ENEE 140 Servicing your vehicle 343 Setting the clock ccccee 29 SOS Post Crash Alert 198 Spare tire see Changing the Tire 304 Spark plugs specifications sesssrissns 378 382 Specification chart IWTIGANUS soreta sirs 379 Speed control ccceeeeeeeee 104 Starting your vehicle 255 257 JUMP starting scsicisessssaccaueabcctsis 319 Steering wheel CONEEOIS sivezsexesssseevessecediaiveeceears 106 UNE ccsdciseevesnsacishiheeisidaveseiebsale 92 Stereo 6 CD in dash acisicssssissessdevsscassacs 28 CD MPS ciscesccncsiseesdevcavehsdisetinenes 28 SYNGE apeirar an rE ERE 67 T Temporary mobility kit 309
226. ion Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door for the correct tire pressure for your vehicle 232 Tires Wheels and Loading 12 Treadwear Traction and Temperature Grades e Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 11 2 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 e Traction The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance e Temperature The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel 13 Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure Indicates the tire manufacturers maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally higher than the manufacturer s recommended cold inflation pressure which can be found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the
227. is possible with a hydrometer or antifreeze tester The level of coolant should be maintained at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE in the coolant reservoir If the level falls below add coolant per the instructions in the Adding engine coolant section Your vehicle was factory filled with a 50 50 engine coolant and water concentration If the concentration of coolant falls below 40 or above 60 the engine parts could become damaged or not work properly A 50 50 mixture of coolant and water provides the following e Freeze protection down to 34 F 36 C e Boiling protection up to 265 F 129 C e Protection against rust and other forms of corrosion e Proper function of calibrated gauges 354 Maintenance and Specifications When the engine is cold check the level of the engine coolant in the reservoir l o COLD FILL RANGE e The engine coolant should be at the FULL COLD level or within the COLD FILL RANGE as listed on the engine coolant reservoir depending upon application Refer to scheduled maintenance information for service interval schedules e Be sure to read and understand Precautions when servicing your vehicle in this chapter If the engine coolant has not been checked at the recommended interval the engine coolant reservoir may become low or empty If the reservoir is low or empty add engine coolant to the reservoir Refer to Adding engine coolant in this chapter
228. isk of unnecessary injuries is to make sure all occupants are properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are much safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front WARNING Air bags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active air bag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back WARNING When possible all children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position The front passenger sensing system can automatically turn off the passenger front airbag The system is designed to help protect small child size occupants from airbag deployments when they are improperly seated or restrained in the front passenger seat contrary to proper child seating or restraint usage recommendations Even with this technology parents are STRONGLY encouraged to always properly restrain children in the rear seat The sensor also turns off the passenger front airbag and seat mounted side airbag when the passenger seat is empty to prevent unnecessary replacement of airbag s after a collision Front safety belt usage sensors The front safety belt usage sensors detect whether or not the driver and front outboard passenger safety belts are fastened This information allows your Personal Safety System to tailor the airbag deployment and safety belt pretensioner activation depe
229. items follow these tips e The windshield rear windows and side windows may be cleaned with a non abrasive cleaner such as Motorcraft Ultra Clear Spray Glass Cleaner ZC 23 available from your authorized dealer 338 Cleaning e The wiper blades can be cleaned with isopropyl rubbing alcohol or Motorcraft Premium Windshield Washer Concentrate ZC 32 A available from your authorized dealer This washer fluid contains special solution in addition to alcohol which helps to remove the hot wax deposited on the wiper blade and windshield from automated car wash facilities Be sure to replace wiper blades when they appear worn or do not function properly e Do not use abrasives as they may cause scratches e Do not use fuel kerosene or paint thinner to clean any parts If you cannot remove those streaks after cleaning with the glass cleaner or if the wipers chatter and move in a jerky motion clean the outer surface of the windshield and the wiper blades using a sponge or soft cloth with a neutral detergent or mild abrasive cleaning solution After cleaning rinse the windshield and wiper blades with clean water The windshield is clean if beads do not form when you rinse the windshield with water Do not use sharp objects such as a razor blade to clean the inside of the rear window or to remove decals as it may cause damage to the rear window defroster s heated grid lines INSTRUMENT PANEL INTERIOR TRIM AND CLUSTER LENS C
230. ith a security label that iOSIAV provides important vehicle key cut information It is recommended that TOEI oO Og zzn009090 0194 yv OS you keep the label in a safe place for future reference CAUTION TORE REMOVED BY CUSTONER ONLY 126 Locks and Security POWER DOOR LOCKS e Press the control to unlock all doors D e Press the control to lock all doors a oa Smart locks This feature helps to prevent you from locking yourself out of the vehicle if your key is still in the ignition When you open one of the front doors or the liftgate and you lock the vehicle with the power door lock control on the driver or passenger door trim panel all the doors will lock then all doors will automatically unlock reminding you that your key is still in the ignition The vehicle can still be locked with the key in the ignition by locking the driver s door with a key using the lock control on the remote entry transmitter portion of your Integrated Keyhead Transmitter or locking the vehicle with the keyless entry keypad If both front doors and the liftgate are closed the vehicle can be locked from any method regardless of whether the key is in the ignition or not Autolock feature The autolock feature will lock all the doors when e all the doors are closed e the ignition is in the o
231. ither wait five seconds for the search to initiate or press OK to immediately initiate the search If you press another control within those five seconds the search will not initiate The 10 strongest stations will be filled and the station stored in preset 1 will begin playing If there are fewer than 10 strong stations the system will store the last one in the remaining presets RDS Radio Available only in FM mode This feature allows you to search RDS equipped stations for a certain category of music format CLASSIC COUNTRY JAZZ RB ROCK etc To activate Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON OFF appears in the display Use K SEEK gt to switch RDS ON OFF When RDS is OFF you will not be able to search for RDS equipped stations or view the station name or type CAT FOLD Category Folder This feature allows you to select from various music categories CAT FOLD To change RDS categories Press MENU repeatedly until RDS ON OFF appears in the display Use ad SEEK P to switch RDS between ON OFF Press CAT PRESS UP OR DOWN TO CHANGE RDS CATEGORY will appear in the display Press A SEEK vy to scroll through all possible categories When the desired category appears in the display press a SEEK Pl to find the next station playing that selection or press SCAN for a brief sampling of all stations playing that category of music 30 Entertainment Systems CD MP3 Player CD Press to enter CD M
232. iver and front outboard passenger seating positions The safety belt pretensioner tightens the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body at the start of the crash WARNING The driver and front passenger safety belt system including retractors buckles and height adjusters must be replaced if the vehicle is involved in a collision that results in deployment of front airbags seat mounted side airbags and Safety Canopy and safety belt pretensioners Safety belt extension assembly If the safety belt is too short when fully extended there is an 8 inch 20 cm safety belt extension assembly that can be added part number 611022 This assembly can be obtained from an authorized dealer Use only extensions manufactured by the same supplier as the safety belt Manufacturer identification is located at the end of the webbing on the label Also use the safety belt extension only if the safety belt is too short for you when fully extended 179 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not use extensions to change the fit of the shoulder belt across the torso Safety belt warning light and indicator chime A The safety belt warning light illuminates in the instrument cluster and a chime sounds to remind the occupants to fasten their safety belts Conditions of operation The driver s safety belt is not The safety belt warning light buckled before the ignition illuminates 1 2 minutes and the switch is turned to the on wa
233. k refer to Clock in the Driver Controls chapter for instructions on how to set the time AM FM Radio Q VOL Power Volume Press to turn the radio on off Turn the knob to increase decrease volume If the volume is set above a certain level and the ignition is turned off the volume will come back on at a nominal listening level when the ignition switch is turned back on AM FM Press repeatedly to select AM FM1 FM2 frequency band ae TUNE Turn the knob to go up down the frequency band in individual increments DIRECT Press DIRECT and then select the desired radio frequency DIRECT i e 93 9 using the memory preset numbers 0 9 SEEK Press SEEK P to a access the previous next strong SEEK gt radio station az SCAN Press for a brief sampling of SCAN all strong radio stations 29 Entertainment Systems MEMORY PRESETS 0 9 When G tuned to any station press and hold a preset button until sound returns and PRESET SAVED appears in the display You can save up to 30 stations 10 in AM 10 in FM1 and FM2 Saving presets automatically Autoset allows you to set the strongest local radio stations without losing your original manually set preset stations for AM FM1 FM2 To activate the autoset feature Press MENU repeatedly until AUTO PRESET ON OFF appears in the display Use K SEEK P to switch AUTO PRESET to ON and e
234. l defeat the safety protection design provided by the cap and twist tab Doing so my cause the power point to overload due to powering multiple devices that can reach beyond the 150W load limit and could result in fire or serious injury The power point can switch to a fault mode when it is overloaded overheated or shorted For overloading and shorting conditions unplug your device and turn the ignition key off then on For an overheating condition let the system cool off then turn the ignition key off then on The 110 VAC power point can provide power whenever the vehicle ignition is in the run position and the power point green indicator light located in the top left corner is turned on Refer to the indicator light code below for the power point status Indicator light Code Green light is On Power point is ready to supply power Green light is Off Power point power supply is off Ignition is not in RUN position Green light is blinking Power point is in fault mode 100 Driver Controls POWER WINDOWS WARNING Do not leave children unattended in the vehicle and do not let children play with the power windows They may seriously injure themselves WARNING When closing the power windows you should verify they are free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the window openings Press and pull the window switches to open and close windows e Press down to the first d
235. lacement bulbs are specified in the chart below Headlamp bulbs must be marked with an authorized D O T for North America and an E for Europe to ensure lamp performance light brightness and pattern and safe visibility The correct bulbs will not damage the lamp assembly or void the lamp assembly warranty and will provide quality bulb burn time 86 Lights number Front park turnlamp 2 BISTNA Front sidemarkerlamp NA WED 9008 H13 Headlamp D3 HID optional 3157K optional Supplemental taillamp j x Rear sidemarker N A LED optional C5WL High mount brake lamp NA WD Fog lamp ifequipped 2 m Map lamp 2 LeNGW Dome reading lamps 6 To replace all instrument panel lights see your authorized mae To replace these lamps see your authorized dealer Replacing interior bulbs Check the operation of all bulbs frequently Replacing headlamp high beam low beam halogen bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Reach in behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets and connectors 87 Lights 3 Locate the high beam low beam headlamp bulb electrical connector and remove it by squeezing the locking tab and pulling it straight out 4 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out WARNING Handle a halogen headlamp bulb carefull
236. lamp 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position and open the liftgate 2 Remove the hex screws in the liftgate opening then pull the lamp assembly away from the vehicle This will disengage two snap attachments along the side of the vehicle 3 Remove the bulb socket by rotating it counterclockwise then pulling it out of the lamp assembly 4 Pull the bulb straight from the socket Install new bulb s in reverse order Replacing license plate lamp bulbs 1 Make sure the headlamp switch is in the off position 2 Remove the two screws from the license plate lamp assembly and pull S 3 Carefully pull the bulb out from the contacts Install new bulb s in reverse order 89 Lights Replacing fog lamp bulbs if equipped 1 Make sure the fog lamp switch is in the off position 2 From underneath the vehicle partially remove the tire splash shield by removing four drive screws After removing to allow free access to the front fog lamp bulb and electrical wire harness the splash shield flap should be able to be repositioned 3 Rotate the harness bulb assembly counterclockwise to remove from the fog lamp 4 Carefully disconnect the bulb from the harness assembly by releasing the two snap clips Install the new bulb in reverse order 90 Driver Controls MULTI FUNCTION LEVER Windshield wiper Rotate the end of the control away from you to inc
237. lay CHECK PARK AID if equipped Displayed when the transmission is in R Reverse and the reverse sensing system park aid is disabled REMOVE OBJECTS NEAR PASS SEAT Displayed when objects are by the passenger seat After the objects are moved away from the seat if the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible BRAKE FLUID LEVEL LOW Indicates the brake fluid level is low and the brake system should be inspected immediately Refer to Brake fluid in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter AWD OFF if equipped Displayed when the AWD system has been automatically disabled to protect itself This is caused by operating the vehicle with the compact spare tire installed or if the system is overheating The AWD system will resume normal function and clear this message after driving a short distance with the road tire re installed or after the system is allowed to cool CHECK AWD if equipped Displayed when a problem exists with the AWD system Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LOW TIRE PRESSURE Displayed when one or more tires on your vehicle has low tire pressure Refer to Inflating your tires in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter TIRE PRESSURE MONITOR FAULT Displayed when the Tire Pressure Monitoring System is malfunctioning If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 23 Instr
238. le Press RESET to turn it off or on REAR PARK AID if equipped This feature sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper and functions only when R Reverse gear is selected Press RESET to turn it off or on 21 Instrument Cluster TRAILER SWAY CONTROL if equipped This feature uses the electronic stability control to mitigate trailer sway Press RESET to turn it off or on CREATE MYKEY MYKEY SETUP CLEAR MYKEY For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter LANGUAGE ENGLISH SPANISH FRENCH Allows you to choose which language the message center will display in Selectable languages are English Spanish or French Waiting four seconds or pressing the RESET button cycles the message center through each of the language choices Press and hold RESET for two seconds to set the language choice System warnings System warnings alert you to possible problems or malfunctions in your vehicle s operating systems In the event of a multiple warning situation the message center will cycle the display to show all warnings by displaying each one for four seconds The message center will display the last selected feature if there are no more warning messages Types of messages and warnings e Some messages will appear briefly to inform you of something you may need to take action on or be informed of e Some messages will appear once and then again when the vehicle is re
239. lean the instrument panel interior trim areas and cluster lens with a clean damp white cotton cloth then use a clean and dry white cotton cloth to dry these areas e Avoid cleaners or polishes that increase the gloss of the upper portion of the instrument panel The dull finish in this area helps protect the driver from undesirable windshield reflection e Be certain to wash or wipe your hands clean if you have been in contact with certain products such as insect repellent and suntan lotion in order to avoid possible damage to the interior painted surfaces e Do not use household or glass cleaners as these may damage the finish of the instrument panel interior trim and cluster lens WARNING Do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents when cleaning the steering wheel or instrument panel to avoid contamination of the airbag system 339 Cleaning If a staining liquid like coffee juice has been spilled on the instrument panel or on interior trim surfaces clean as follows 1 Wipe up spilled liquid using a clean white cotton cloth 2 Wipe the surface with a damp clean white cotton cloth For more thorough cleaning use a mild soap and water solution If the spot cannot be completely cleaned by this method the area may be cleaned using a commercially available cleaning product designed for automotive interiors 3 If necessary apply more soap and water solution or cleaning product to a clean white cotton cloth and pres
240. lease button 3 e and a guide sleeve unlock remove button 4 151 Seating and Safety Restraints To adjust the head restraint do the following 1 Adjust the seatback to an upright driving riding position Refer to Adjusting the front manual seat later in this chapter 2 Raise the head restraint by pulling up on the head restraint A 3 Lower the head restraint by pressing and holding the guide sleeve adjust release button and pushing down on the head restraint 4 WA Properly adjust the head restraint so that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position WARNING The adjustable head restraint is a safety device Whenever possible it should be installed and properly adjusted when the seat is occupied 152 Seating and Safety Restraints To remove the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Pull up the head restraint until it reaches the highest adjustment position 2 Simultaneously press and hold both the adjust release button and the unlock remove button then pull up on the head restraint OB De To reinstall the adjustable head restraint do the following 1 Insert the two stems into the guide sleeve collars 2 Push the head restraint down until it locks ft Properly adjust the head restraint so
241. ler See Adding engine coolant in this chapter for more information Refer to fail safe cooling for additional information What you should know about fail safe cooling If the engine coolant supply is depleted this feature allows the vehicle to be driven temporarily before incremental component damage is incurred The fail safe distance depends on ambient temperatures vehicle load and terrain 359 Maintenance and Specifications How fail safe cooling works If the engine begins to overheat e The engine coolant temperature gauge will move to the red hot area e The coolant temperature warning light will illuminate e The service engine soon cx indicator will illuminate If the engine reaches a preset over temperature condition the engine will automatically switch to alternating cylinder operation Each disabled cylinder acts as an air pump and cools the engine When this occurs the vehicle will still operate However e The engine power will be limited e The air conditioning system will be disabled Continued operation will increase the engine temperature and the engine will completely shut down causing steering and braking effort to increase Once the engine temperature cools the engine can be re started Take your vehicle to a service facility as soon as possible to minimize engine damage When fail safe mode is activated You have limited engine power when in the fail safe mode so drive the vehicle
242. less effective e The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight e After you have traveled 50 miles 80 km thoroughly check your hitch electrical connections and trailer wheel lug nuts e To aid in engine transmission cooling and A C efficiency during hot weather while stopped in traffic place the gearshift lever in P Park Vehicles with trailers should not be parked on a grade If you must park on a grade place wheel chocks under the trailer s wheels RECREATIONAL TOWING Follow these guidelines for your specific powertrain combination to tow your vehicle for personal travel such as behind a motor home or a truck Note Put your climate control system in recirculated air mode to prevent exhaust fumes from entering the vehicle Refer to the Climate Controls chapter for more information In case of roadside emergency with a disabled vehicle please refer to Wrecker towing in the Roadside Emergencies chapter These guidelines are designed to prevent damage to your vehicle Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles Tow your Front Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with the front wheels off the ground by using a tow dolly If you are using a tow dolly follow the instructions specified by the equipment provider 253 Tires Wheels and Loading All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles Tow your All Wheel Drive vehicle with all four wheels on the ground or with all four wheels off the groun
243. lies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Perform the following steps when installing the child seat with combination lap shoulder belts Note Although the child seat illustrated is a forward facing child seat the steps are the same for installing a rear facing child seat 204 Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Position the child safety seat in a seat with a combination lap and shoulder belt 2 Pull down on the shoulder belt and then grasp the shoulder belt and lap belt together 3 While holding the shoulder and lap belt portions together route the tongue through the child seat according to the child seat manufacturer s instructions Be sure the belt webbing is not twisted 205 Seating and Safety Restraints 4 Insert the belt tongue into the proper buckle the buckle closest to the direction the tongue is coming from for that seating position until you hear a snap and feel the latch engage Make sure the tongue is latched securely by pulling on it 5 To put the retractor in the automatic locking mode grasp the shoulder portion of the belt and pull downward until all of the belt is pulled out ee 6 Allow the belt to retract to remove slack The belt will click as it retracts to indicate it is in the automatic locking mode 7 Try to pull the b
244. light will flash e If your foot is on the brake pedal a vibration in the pedal e If the driving condition is severe and your foot is not on the brake the brake pedal may move as the systems applies higher brake forces You may also hear a whoosh of air from under the instrument panel during this severe condition e The brake pedal may feel stiffer than usual Traction Control TCS Traction Control is a driver aid feature that helps your vehicle maintain traction of the wheels typically when driving on slippery and or hilly road surfaces by detecting and controlling wheel spin Excessive wheel spin is controlled in two ways which may work separately or in tandem Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control Engine Traction Control works to limit drive wheel spin by momentarily reducing engine power Brake Traction Control works to limit wheel spin by momentarily applying the brakes to the wheel that is slipping Traction Control is most active at low speeds During Traction Control events the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will flash If the Traction Control system is activated excessively in a short period of time the braking portion of the system may become temporarily disabled to allow the brakes to cool down In this situation Traction Control will use only engine power reduction or transfer to help control the wheels from over spinning When the brakes have cooled down the system will regain all fea
245. lines to avoid electrostatic charge build up when filling an ungrounded fuel container e Place approved fuel container on the ground e DO NOT fill a fuel container while it is in the vehicle including the cargo area e Keep the fuel pump nozzle in contact with the fuel container while filling e DO NOT use a device that would hold the fuel pump handle in the fill position Easy Fuel no cap fuel system Your fuel tank is equipped with an Easy Fuel no cap fuel filler system This allows you to simply open the fuel filler door and insert the fuel filler nozzle into the fuel system The Easy Fuel system is self sealing and protected against dust dirt water and snow ice When fueling your vehicle 1 Turn the engine off 2 Open the fuel filler door 3 Slowly insert the fuel filler nozzle fully into the fuel system Pump fuel as normal 4 After you are done pumping fuel slowly remove the fuel filler nozzle allow about five seconds after pumping fuel before removing the fuel filler nozzle This allows residual fuel to drain back into the fuel tank and not spill onto the vehicle Note A fuel spillage concern may occur if overfilling the fuel tank Do not overfill the tank to the point that the fuel is able to bypass the fuel filler nozzle The overfilled fuel may run down the drain located below and in front of the fuel filler door If the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message come
246. lockwise 306 7 Remove the jack and fully tighten the lug nuts in the order shown Refer to Wheel lug nut torque specifications later in this chapter for the proper lug nut torque specification 8 Install the wheel cover if equipped Stowing the tire and jack 1 Fully collapse the jack fold the lug wrench socket into the handle and place the jack and wrench into the felt bag as shown Place the extension bolt or L shaped bolt into the external pocket of the felt bag Take care to position the jack as shown to ensure that the locating holes in the jack base can be placed on the locating tabs of the jack mounting bracket in the spare tire tub Roadside Emergencies 2 Securely close the wrench compartment and the jack bag using the Velcro strips 3 Place the jack kit on the angled bracket in the spare tire tub using the locating tabs to position the jack correctly 307 Roadside Emergencies 4 Insert the straight end of the jack retention bracket through the eyelet of the angled bracket and swing the retention bracket over the jack With the jack in place place the looped end of the retention bracket over the threaded stud in the trunk floor and secure it with the plastic wing nut If you are stowing the flat tire remove the L shaped bolt from from the external pocket of the felt bag With the 3rd row seat in the raised position stand the flat tire in the rear of the vehicle with th
247. lowly turn cap counterclockwise Cleft until pressure begins to release 3 Step back while the pressure releases 356 Maintenance and Specifications 4 When you are sure that all the pressure has been released use the cloth to turn it counterclockwise and remove the cap 5 Fill the coolant reservoir slowly with the proper coolant mixture to within the COLD FILL RANGE or the FULL COLD level on the reservoir If you removed the radiator cap in an overflow system fill the radiator until the coolant is visible and radiator is almost full 6 Replace the cap Turn until tightly installed Cap must be tightly installed to prevent coolant loss After any coolant has been added check the coolant concentration refer to Checking engine coolant If the concentration is not 50 50 protection to 34 F 36 C drain some coolant and adjust the concentration It may take several drains and additions to obtain a 50 50 coolant concentration Whenever coolant has been added the coolant level in the coolant reservoir should be checked the next few times you drive the vehicle If necessary add enough 50 50 concentration of engine coolant and distilled water to bring the liquid level to the proper level If you have to add more than 1 0 quart 1 0 liter of engine coolant per month have your authorized dealer check the engine cooling system Your cooling system may have a leak Operating an engine with a low level of coolant can result in engine
248. ly careful if you are taking Antabuse or other forms of disulfiram for the treatment of alcoholism Breathing gasoline vapors or skin contact could cause an adverse reaction In sensitive individuals serious personal injury or sickness may result If fuel is splashed on the skin promptly wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Consult a physician immediately if you experience an adverse reaction WARNING When refueling always shut the engine off and never allow sparks or open flames near the filler neck Never smoke while refueling Fuel vapor is extremely hazardous under certain conditions Care should be taken to avoid inhaling excess fumes WARNING The flow of fuel through a fuel pump nozzle can produce static electricity which can cause a fire if fuel is pumped into an ungrounded fuel container Refueling WARNING Fuel vapor burns violently and a fuel fire can cause severe injuries To help avoid injuries to you and others e Read and follow all the instructions on the pump island e Turn off your engine when you are refueling e Do not smoke if you are near fuel or refueling your vehicle e Keep sparks flames and smoking materials away from fuel e Stay outside your vehicle and do not leave the fuel pump unattended when refueling your vehicle this is against the law in some places e Keep children away from the fuel pump never let children pump fuel 362 Maintenance and Specifications Use the following guide
249. mage to your vehicle s electrical system Contact your authorized dealer or trailer rental agency for proper instructions and equipment for hooking up trailer lamps Driving while you tow When towing a trailer e Turn off the speed control The speed control may shut off automatically when you are towing on long steep grades e Consult your local motor vehicle speed regulations for towing a trailer e It is recommended to select the L Low gear position when additional engine braking is needed In situations such as prolonged downhill driving on steep grades i e driving in mountainous areas additional engine braking is needed to reduce the load on the vehicle s regular brake system to prevent them from overheating e Anticipate stops and brake gradually Servicing after towing If you tow a trailer for long distances your vehicle will require more frequent service intervals Refer to your scheduled maintenance information for more information 252 Tires Wheels and Loading Trailer towing tips e Practice turning stopping and backing up before starting on a trip to get the feel of the vehicle trailer combination When turning make wider turns so the trailer wheels will clear curbs and other obstacles e Allow more distance for stopping with a trailer attached e If you are driving down a long or steep hill shift into the lowest gear position Do not apply the brakes continuously as they may overheat and become
250. mental conditions may be damaged or perform at less than maximum capability To avoid these outcomes whenever possible avoid exposing your DVD player to e extremely hot or cold temperatures direct sunlight high humidity e a dusty environment e locations where strong magnetic fields are generated Temperature extremes When the vehicle is parked under direct sunlight or in an extremely cold place for a long period of time wait until the cabin temperature of the vehicle is at normal temperature before operating the system Humidity and moisture condensation Moisture in the air will condense in the DVD player under extremely humid conditions or when moving from a cold place to a warm one Moisture condensation may cause damage to the DVD and or player If moisture condensation occurs do not insert a CD or DVD into the player If one is already in the player remove it Turn the DVD player ON to dry the moisture before inserting a DVD This could take an hour or more 66 Entertainment Systems Foreign substances Exercise care to prevent dirt and foreign objects from entering the DVD player compartment Be especially careful not to spill liquids of any kind onto the media controls or into the system If liquid is accidentally spilled onto the system immediately turn the system OFF and consult a qualified service technician Cleaning the liquid crystal display LCD screen Clean the display screen by applying a small am
251. mes called an infant carrier convertible seat or toddler seat Use a belt positioning booster seat Use a vehicle safety belt having the lap belt snug and low across the hips shoulder belt centered across the shoulder and chest and seatback upright e You are required by law to properly use safety seats for infants and toddlers in the U S and Canada e Many states and provinces require that small children use approved booster seats until they reach age eight a height of 4 ft 9 in 1 45 meters tall or 80 Ib 86 kg Check your local and state or provincial laws for specific requirements regarding the safety of children in your vehicle e When possible always properly restrain children twelve 12 years of age and under in a rear seating position of your vehicle Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in a front seating position 200 Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for attaching child safety restraints for children Use any attachment method as indicated below by X LATCH LATCH lower lower Restraint Child Type Weight and Rear Up to facing 48 lb child seat 21 kg Forward Up to facing 48 Ib child seat 21 kg Forward Over facing 48 lb child seat 21 kg WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must
252. mmed To program additional new unprogrammed key s wait 20 seconds and then repeat this procedure from Step 1 Note To program MyKey features refer to MyKey in this chapter MYKEY The MyKey feature allows you to program a restricted driving mode to promote good driving habits All but one of the keys programmed to the vehicle can be activated as a MyKey The key will remain restricted until MyKey is disabled Any remaining keys are referred to as an Administrator key or Admin key The Admin key can be used to create a MyKey program optional MyKey settings and disable the MyKey feature When the MyKey feature is enabled the user can use System Check in the message center to see how many MyKeys and Admin keys are programmed to the vehicle and how many total miles have been driven with the MyKey active 143 Locks and Security MyKey Restricted Features Standard settings These settings cannot be changed e The audio system will be muted whenever Belt Minder is activated until the safety belts are buckled Refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for a detailed description of Belt Minder operation e Low fuel warnings are displayed in the message center followed by a chime when the Distance to Empty value reaches 75 miles 120 km e The reverse sensing system cannot be turned off Optional settings These settings can be changed e Vehicle speed is limited to 80 mph
253. mming entry code 138 Key na RE 126 141 positions of the ignition 255 L Lamps autolamp system c00cc 80 394 bulb replacement specifications chart 86 daytime running light 0 82 fog AAIMPS racerne 81 headlamps sisnessrnsiistinass 80 headlamps flash to pass 81 instrument panel dimming 82 interior lamps 00 85 87 replacing bulbs eee 87 LATCH anchors c ccccceeeees 207 Liftgate oo 119 120 134 Lights warning and indicator 12 anti lock brakes ABS 261 Load mit scecsisssecesssetsedsvedseetse 242 Locks AULOLOGCK nucgreseeninnrannsms 127 ChIGPLOOL rurarina iain 131 GOOUS eene E E 127 Lubricant specifications 379 Lug NULS skssr ea EE 318 Lumbar support seats 155 158 M Message center secgrenineceriri 18 english metric button 22 system check button 22 warning Messages cecce 22 NMOTTOTS dedero 103 automatic dimming rearview TOLETOL parria iain endian 103 heated esaiccivivs cevevenaasetveereyss 74 104 programmable memory 135 side view mirrors power 103 MOON TOOT sissecssessecveisisscesoeeecseerts 108 Motorcraft parts s s 341 378 WIV KG arinen areena S 143 N Navigation system cccceceeeee 67 o Octane rating Oil see Engine oil Overdrive P Parental MyKey programming Park Assist Parking brake Parts
254. more information on towing a trailer with your vehicle During trailer sway control events the f icon in the instrument cluster will flash momentarily The cluster message center will also display TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED In some cases when trailer sway is detected the vehicle speed is too high and may be at or above a speed at which trailer sway will grow continuously This may cause the system to activate multiple times causing a gradual reduction in speed Disabling trailer sway control Trailer sway control can be disabled during any key cycle To disable trailer sway control refer to the Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note that regardless of chosen enable state trailer sway control will be re enabled each new key cycle WARNING Turning off trailer sway control increases the risk of loss of vehicle control serious injury or death Ford does not recommend disabling this feature except in situations where speed reduction may be detrimental e g hill climbing the driver has significant trailer towing experience and can control trailer sway and maintain safe operation STEERING 3 5L EcoBoost engine Your vehicle is equipped with an Electric Power Steering EPS system There is no fluid reservoir to check or fill If your vehicle loses electrical power while you are driving or if the ignition is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort Extreme continuous steering may incr
255. movable shield remove the shield If a vehicle seating position has a low seat back or no head restraint a backless booster seat may place your child s head as measured at the tops of the ears above the top of the seat In this case move the backless booster to another seating position with a higher seat back or head restraint and lap shoulder belts or consider using a high back booster seat 214 Seating and Safety Restraints e High back booster seats If with a backless booster seat you cannot find a seating position that adequately supports your child s head a high back booster seat would be a better choice Children and booster seats vary in size and shape Choose a booster that keeps the lap belt low and snug across the hips never up across the stomach and lets you adjust the shoulder belt to cross the chest and rest snugly near the center of the shoulder The drawings below compare the ideal fit center to a shoulder belt uncomfortably close to the neck and a shoulder belt that could slip off the shoulder The drawings below also show how the lap belt should be low and snug across the child s hips 215 Seating and Safety Restraints If the booster seat slides on the vehicle seat placing a rubberized mesh sold as shelf or carpet liner under the booster seat may improve this condition Do not introduce any item thicker than this under the booster seat Check with the booster seat manufact
256. mplies with part 15 of the FCC rules and with RSS 210 of Industry Canada Operation is subject to the following two conditions 1 This device may not cause harmful interference and 2 This device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation Changes or modifications not expressly approved by the party responsible for compliance could void the user s authority to operate the equipment There are two possible types of IKTs e Vehicles equipped with a power liftgate N Y 132 Locks and Security e Vehicles not equipped with a power liftgate The typical operating range for your IKT is approximately 33 feet 10 meters A decrease in operating range could be caused by e weather conditions e nearby radio towers e structures around the vehicle or e other vehicles parked next to your vehicle The IKT allows you to remotely unlock the vehicle doors remotely lock all the vehicle doors remotely open the power liftgate Gf equipped activate the personal alarm arm and disarm the perimeter anti theft system operate the illuminated entry feature The remote entry lock unlock feature operates in any ignition position except while the key is held in the start position The panic feature operates with the key in the off position If there are problems with the remote entry system make sure to take ALL Integrated Keyhead Transmitters with you to the a
257. mps ZD Turns the low beam headlamps on Autolamp control if equipped The autolamp system provides light sensitive automatic on off control of the exterior lights normally controlled by the headlamp control e To turn autolamps on rotate the control clockwise to wW e To turn autolamps off rotate the control counterclockwise to The autolamp system also keeps the lights on for a predetermined amount of time after the ignition switch is turned to off You can change the amount of time the lamps stay on by using the programming procedure that follows Note If the vehicle is equipped with autolamps it will have the headlamps on with windshield wipers feature If the windshield wipers are turned on for a brief period of time the exterior lamps will turn on with the headlamp control in the Autolamp position Autolamps Programmable exit delay Programmable exit delay allows the length of the autolamp exit delay to be changed To program the auto lamp exit time delay 1 Start with the ignition in the off position and the headlamp control in the autolamp position 2 Turn the headlamp control to off 80 Lights 3 Turn the ignition switch to on and then back to off 4 Turn the headlamp control to the autolamp position The headlamps will turn on 5 Wait the desired amount of time for the exit delay you want up to three minutes then turn the headlamps off Fog lamp control if equipped
258. n AM FM CD MP3 satellite compatible sound system DIRECT TEXT A MENU i CLOCK 4 SEEK gt SCAN CAT FOLD v SOUND PHONE SIRIUS AUX WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so Accessory delay Your vehicle is equipped with accessory delay With this feature the radio and other electrical accessories may be used for up to ten minutes after the ignition is turned off or until either front door is opened Note Your vehicle is equipped with a unique audio system If your display shows six small circles in the display your audio system is a CD6 system six disc changer If not your system is a single CD system 28 o0 639 NE Entertainment Systems Setting the clock To set the time press CLOCK The display will read SET TIME Use the coca memory preset numbers 0 9 to enter in the desired time hours and minutes The clock will then begin from that time If your vehicle is equipped with an in dash cloc
259. n auxiliary audio video source game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc by connecting RCA cords not included to the RCA gt 71 jacks behind the cover panels on the E OQ right corner of the system n S e Yellow 1 video input e White 2 left channel audio input e Red 3 right channel audio input 3 Whatever is plugged in will automatically begin to play on your screen If your auxiliary source does not have a video signal or if the DVD system does not detect a video signal from the auxiliary source the screen will remain black 49 Entertainment Systems DVD player controls 1 gt 11 Play Pause Press to play or pause a CD DVD or flash thumb drive track 2 i Stop Press to stop the current DVD CD MP3 or flash thumb drive track 3 amp Eject Press to eject a disc from the DVD system 4 MENU When playing a DVD press MENU to enter the DVD disc root menu if available Press again to exit and return to the movie SEL Press to confirm the current selection that has been highlighted through the use of the cursor controls Cursor controls Use to navigate through selections when in any menu When not in a menu you can also use them for the following features e A IV Use to scroll through menu sources e Fast forward next Press to access the next track or chapter
260. n control system and may cause engine knocking or serious engine damage Ford Motor Company Ford of Canada is not responsible for any damage caused by use of improper fuel Using leaded fuel may also result in difficulty importing your vehicle back into the U S If your vehicle must be serviced while you are traveling or living in Central America the Caribbean or the Middle East contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer cannot help you contact FORD MOTOR COMPANY FORD EXPORT OPERATIONS 1555 Fairlane Drive Fairlane Business Park 3 Allen Park Michigan 48101 U S A Telephone 313 594 4857 FAX 813 390 0804 Email expcac ford com 331 Customer Assistance If you are in another foreign country contact the nearest authorized dealer If the authorized dealer employees cannot help you they can direct you to the nearest Ford affiliate office If you buy your vehicle in North America and then relocate outside of the U S or Canada register your vehicle identification number VIN and new address with Ford Motor Company Export Operations Customers in the U S should call 1 800 392 3673 ORDERING ADDITIONAL OWNER S LITERATURE To order the publications in this portfolio contact Helm Incorporated at HELM INCORPORATED P O Box 07150 Detroit Michigan 48207 Or to order a free publication catalog call toll free 1 800 782 4356 Monday Friday 8 00 a m 6 00 p m EST Helm Incorporated can also be
261. n position e you shift into any gear putting the vehicle in motion and e the vehicle attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h The autolock feature repeats when e any door is opened then closed while the ignition is in the on position and the vehicle speed is 9 mph 15 km h or lower and e the vehicle then attains a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h 127 Locks and Security Deactivating activating autolock feature Your vehicle comes with the autolock features activated there are four methods to enable disable this feature Through your authorized dealer e by using a power door unlock lock procedure e using a keypad procedure or by using the instrument cluster message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter Note The autolock feature can be activated deactivated independently of the autounlock feature Power door lock switch autolock enable disable procedure Before starting ensure the ignition is in the off position and all vehicle doors are closed You must complete Steps 1 5 within 30 seconds or the procedure will have to be repeated If the procedure needs to be repeated wait a minimum of 30 seconds before beginning again 1 Place the key in the ignition and turn the ignition to the on position z 2 Press the power door unlock control on the door panel three times A 3 Turn the ignition from the on CEE position to the off position 4 Press the power doo
262. n tire wear e loose or worn suspension components e loose or worn steering components e improper vehicle alignment A high crown in the road or high crosswinds may also make the steering seem to wander pull BRAKE SHIFT INTERLOCK This vehicle is equipped with a brake shift interlock feature that prevents the gearshift lever from being moved from P Park when the ignition is in the on position unless the brake pedal is pressed If you cannot move the gearshift lever out of P Park with ignition in the on position and the brake pedal pressed it is possible that a fuse has blown or the vehicle s brakelamps are not operating properly Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter If the fuse is not blown and the brakelamps are working properly the following procedure will allow you to move the gearshift lever from P Park 1 Apply the parking brake turn the ignition key to the off position and remove the key 2 Using a screwdriver or similar tool carefully pry off and remove the chrome trim ring 1 from the shifter base 3 Open the storage compartment lid and carefully pry the trim panel 2 up from rear attachments on the storage compartment and disconnect it from the console 269 Driving 4 Locate the brake shift interlock lever on the passenger side of the shifter assembly 5 Apply the brake pedal Using a screwdriver or similar tool press and hold the brake shift interlock le
263. nce whether loaded or empty and durable load carrying capability For this reason Ford Motor Company strongly recommends that you do not make modifications such as adding or removing parts such as lift kits or stabilizer bars or by using replacement parts not equivalent to the original factory equipment Any modifications to a vehicle that raise the center of gravity can make it more likely the vehicle will rollover as a result of a loss of control Ford Motor Company recommends that caution be used with any vehicle equipped with a high load or device such as ladder or luggage racks Failure to maintain your vehicle properly may void the warranty increase your repair cost reduce vehicle performance and operational capabilities and adversely affect driver and passenger safety Frequent inspection of vehicle chassis components is recommended if the vehicle is subjected to heavy off highway usage DRIVING THROUGH WATER If driving through deep or standing water is unavoidable proceed very slowly especially when the depth is not known Never drive through o water that is higher than the bottom A A of the wheel rims for cars or the bottom of the hubs for trucks When driving through water traction or brake capability may be limited Also water may enter your engine s air intake and severely damage your engine or your vehicle may stall Driving through deep water where the transmission vent tube is submerged may allow water in
264. nd back on the climate system will return to the recirculated air mode only if the A C button LED is illuminated and the air distribution selection is either X panel or 4 panel floor 6 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 7 Temperature control Controls the temperature of the airflow in the vehicle 8 Fan speed adjustment Controls the volume of air circulated in the vehicle 9 b Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle 10 Q Power Press to activate deactivate the rear climate control system 11 REAR CTRL Press to change control of the rear climate system from the front to the rear controls 12 Temp Press to lower the temperature for the rear climate area 13 Temp Press to increase the temperature for the rear climate area 14 Rear fan speed control Press to decrease the fan speed for the rear climate area 15 Ei Rear fan speed control Press to increase the fan speed for the rear climate area 69 Climate Controls Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the
265. nd release RESET in order to start the timer 2 Press and release RESET to pause the timer 3 Press and hold RESET until the timer resets Blank Screen The message center display will be blank after cycling through all of the Info menu items 19 Instrument Cluster System check and vehicle feature customization Press SETUP repeatedly to cycle the message center through the INFO SEI RESET FOR SYSTEM CHECK following features When this message appears press RESET and the message center will begin to cycle through the following systems and provide a status of the item if needed Note Some systems show a message only if a condition is present OIL LIFE CHARGING SYSTEM WASHER FLUID LEVEL DOOR AJAR STATUS LIFTGATE STATUS BRAKE SYSTEM TIRE PRESSURE FUEL LEVEL MYKEY DISTANCE Gif MyKey is programmed 10 MYKEY S PROGRAMMED 11 ADMIN KEYS PROGRAMMED 12 ADVANCTRAC OIL LIFE This displays the remaining oil life An oil change is required whenever indicated by the message center and according to the recommended maintenance schedule USE ONLY RECOMMENDED ENGINE OILS To reset the oil monitoring system to 100 after each oil change approximately 7 500 miles 12 000 km or 12 months perform the following 1 Press and release SETUP to display OIL LIFE XXX HOLD RESET NEW 2 Press and hold RESET for two seconds and release to reset the oil life to 100 Note To change oil life 10
266. nding upon safety belt usage 173 Seating and Safety Restraints Front safety belt pretensioners The safety belt pretensioners at the front outboard seating positions are designed to tighten the safety belts firmly against the occupant s body during frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers This helps increase the effectiveness of the safety belts In frontal collisions the safety belt pretensioners can be activated alone or if the collision is of sufficient severity together with the front airbags Front safety belt energy management retractors The front outboard safety belt energy management retractors allow webbing to be pulled out of the retractor in a gradual and controlled manner in response to the occupant s forward momentum This helps reduce the risk of force related injuries to the occupant s chest by limiting the load on the occupant Refer to Energy management feature front outboard section in this chapter Determining if the Personal Safety System is operational The Personal Safety System uses a warning light in the instrument cluster or a back up tone to indicate the condition of the system Refer to the Warning lights and chimes section in the Instrument Cluster chapter Routine maintenance of the Personal Safety System is not required The Restraints Control Module RCM monitors its own internal circuits and the circuits for the airbag supplemental restraints crash sensor s safety
267. ng a disabled battery 319 maintenance free 000000 352 replacement specifications 378 SCTVIGING S sscitaaveriinictaravesesecves 352 Belt Minder neeese 180 Booster Seats uo 213 BEAK CS oeren ose eaaa ea 260 antilock ranner han 260 anti lock brake system ABS warning light 0 0 eee 261 fluid checking and adding 374 fluid refill capacities 379 fluid specifications 379 lubricant specifications 379 pat king senrose 261 shift interlock 0 0 0 269 BUDS ea E 86 C Capacities for refilling fluids 379 Car2U Home Automation SYSUGIM MEEA AE chica neeene 113 Cargo NEL secina 124 CD aeneae AER 28 Cell phone use ou cceceesseceeeseees 9 Changing a tire essiri 302 Index Child safety seats cee 203 in front seat wee 204 IM PEALE SCA rioei iniiai 204 LATO Hres eraen nsa 207 recommendations cccc 201 tether anchorage hardware 210 Child safety seats booster SEIS porse EErEE E E S 213 Cleaning your vehicle engine compartment 336 instrument panel 0008 339 INGSQION EE E 340 plastice parts vce cesseausseesicsssasens 338 WASHING sesi penae 334 WAKING yra tae EA ET 335 wWNEElS arenen E EE 335 wiper blades cceeeeeeeeeees 338 Climate control see Air conditioning or Heating csecciaviesdesesssesceses 68 71 74 ClOCR seisen eie 93 Clock adjust AM FM sosrssrsrsrni kreita 29 Compass electroni
268. ngine components e Spray Motorcraft Engine Shampoo and Degreaser ZC 20 on all parts that require cleaning and pressure rinse clean In Canada use Motorcraft Engine Shampoo CXC 66 A e Never wash or rinse the engine while it is running water in the running engine may cause internal damage e Never wash or rinse any ignition coil spark plug wire or spark plug well or the area in and around these locations e Cover the highlighted areas to prevent water damage when cleaning the engine 336 Cleaning N 3 5L V6 engine Yh A QO EN a A Ji m 0 pa A S Qs 337 Cleaning 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine PLASTIC NON PAINTED EXTERIOR PARTS Use only approved products to clean plastic parts These products are available from your authorized dealer e For routine cleaning use Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A e If tar or grease spots are present use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 WINDOWS AND WIPER BLADES The windshield rear and side windows and the wiper blades should be cleaned regularly If the wipers do not wipe properly substances on the vehicle s glass or the wiper blades may be the cause These may include hot wax treatments used by commercial car washes water repellent coatings tree sap or other organic contamination these contaminants may cause squeaking or chatter noise from the blades and streaking and smearing of the windshield To clean these
269. ngine revving is held without shifting REVERSE SENSING SYSTEM The Reverse Sensing System RSS sounds a tone to warn the driver of obstacles near the rear bumper when the R Reverse is selected and the vehicle is moving at speeds less than 3 mph 5 km h The system is not effective at speeds above 3 mph 5 km h and may not detect certain angular or moving objects WARNING To help avoid personal injury please read and understand the limitations of the reverse sensing system as contained in this section Reverse sensing is only an aid for some generally large and fixed objects when moving in reverse on a flat surface at parking speeds Inclement weather may also affect the function of the RSS this may include reduced performance or a false activation WARNING To help avoid personal injury always use caution when in R Reverse and when using the RSS WARNING This system is not designed to prevent contact with small or moving objects The system is designed to provide a warning to assist the driver in detecting large stationary objects to avoid damaging the vehicle The system may not detect smaller objects particularly those close to the ground 276 Driving WARNING Certain add on devices such as large trailer hitches bike or surfboard racks and any device that may block the normal detection zone of the RSS system may create false beeps The RSS detects obstacles up to six feet two meters from the rear bumpe
270. nia to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm In addition certain fluids contained in vehicles and certain products of component wear contain or emit chemicals known to the State of California to cause cancer and birth defects or other reproductive harm PERCHLORATE MATERIAL Certain components of this vehicle such as airbag modules seat belt pretensioners and button cell batteries may contain Perchlorate Material Special handling may apply for service or vehicle end of life disposal See www dtsc ca gov hazardouswaste perchlorate BREAKING IN YOUR VEHICLE Your vehicle does not need an extensive break in Try not to drive continuously at the same speed for the first 1 000 miles 1 600 km of new vehicle operation Vary your speed frequently in order to give the moving parts a chance to break in Drive your new vehicle at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km before towing a trailer For more detailed information about towing a trailer refer to Trawler towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Do not add friction modifier compounds or special break in oils since these additives may prevent piston ring seating See Engine oil in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter for more information on oil usage SPECIAL NOTICES New Vehicle Limited Warranty For a detailed description of what is covered and what is not covered by your vehicle s New Vehicle Limited Warranty refer to the Warranty Guide Customer Information
271. normal Normally adding 1 gallon 3 8L of fuel is enough to restart the engine If the vehicle is out of fuel and on a steep grade more than 1 gallon 8 8L may be required e The service engine soon Cc indicator may come on For more information on the service engine soon indicator refer to Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter Refilling with a portable fuel container With the Easy Fuel no cap fuel system use the following directions when filling from a portable fuel container WARNING Do not insert the nozzle of portable fuel containers or aftermarket funnels into the Easy Fuel system This could damage the fuel system and its seal and may cause fuel to run onto the ground instead of filling the tank which could result in serious personal injury WARNING Do not try to pry open or push open the Easy Fuel system with foreign objects This could damage the fuel system and its seal and cause injury to you or others When filling the vehicle s fuel tank from a portable fuel container use the funnel included with the vehicle 1 After lifting the carpeted floor panel locate the white plastic funnel It is attached to the rear lower edge of the spare tire compartment 366 Maintenance and Specifications 2 Slowly insert the funnel into the Easy Fuel system 3 Fill the vehicle with fuel from the portable fuel container 4 When done clean the
272. nostics OBD II Your vehicle is equipped with a computer that monitors the engine s emission control system This system is commonly known as the On Board Diagnostics System OBD II The OBD II system protects the environment by ensuring that your vehicle continues to meet government emission standards The OBD II system also assists your authorized dealer in properly servicing your vehicle When the service engine soon C indicator illuminates the OBD II system has detected a malfunction Temporary malfunctions may cause the service engine soon indicator to illuminate Examples are 1 The vehicle has run out of fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 2 Poor fuel quality or water in the fuel the engine may misfire or run poorly 371 Maintenance and Specifications 3 The fuel fill inlet may not have been properly closed See Easy Fuel no cap fuel system in this chapter 4 Driving through deep water the electrical system may be wet These temporary malfunctions can be corrected by filling the fuel tank with good quality fuel properly closing the fuel fill inlet or letting the electrical system dry out After three driving cycles without these or any other temporary malfunctions present the service engine soon C indicator should stay off the next time the engine is started A driving cycle consists of a cold engine startup followed by mixed city highway driving No additional vehicle service is required I
273. nt lateral deceleration WARNING Several air bag system components get hot after inflation Do not touch them after inflation WARNING If the side airbag has deployed the airbag will not function again The side airbag system including the seat must be inspected and serviced by an authorized dealer If the airbag is not replaced the unrepaired area will increase the risk of injury in a collision Safety Canopy System 4 WARNING Do not place objects or mount equipment on or near the headliner at the siderail that may come into contact with a deploying Safety Canopy Failure to follow these instructions may increase the risk of personal injury in the event of a collision CU WARNING Do not lean your head on the door The Safety Canopy could injure you as it deploys from the headliner 195 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Safety Canopy system its fuses the A B C or D pillar trim or the headliner on a vehicle containing a Safety Canopy See your authorized dealer WARNING All occupants of the vehicle including the driver should always wear their safety belts even when an airbag SRS and Safety Canopy system is provided WARNING To reduce risk of injury do not obstruct or place objects in the deployment path of the inflatable Safety Canopy How does the Safety Canopy system work The design and development of the Safe
274. nt location or to the nearest authorized dealer If a member requests to be towed to an authorized dealer more than 35 miles 56 km from the disablement location the member shall be responsible for any mileage costs in excess of 35 miles 56 km Trailers shall be covered up to 200 if the disabled eligible vehicle requires service at the nearest authorized dealer If the trailer is disabled but the towing vehicle is operational the trailer does not qualify for any roadside services Canadian customers refer to your Customer Information Guide for information on e coverage period e exact fuel amounts 292 Roadside Emergencies e towing of your disabled vehicle e emergency travel expense reimbursement e travel planning benefits In Canada for uninterrupted Roadside Assistance coverage you may purchase extended coverage prior to your Basic Warranty s Roadside Assistance expiring For more information and enrollment contact 1 877 294 2582 or visit our website at www ford ca Using roadside assistance Complete the roadside assistance identification card and place it in your wallet for quick reference In the United States this card is found in the Owner Guide portfolio in the glove compartment In Canada the card is found in the Customer Information Guide in the glove compartment U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers who require Roadside Assistance call 1 800 241 3673 Canadian customers who require roadside as
275. nt safety belt usage sensors driver seat position sensor front passenger sensing system and indicator lights How does the Personal Safety System work The Personal Safety System can adapt the deployment strategy of your vehicle s safety devices according to crash severity and occupant conditions A collection of crash and occupant sensors provides information to the Restraints Control Module RCM During a crash the RCM activates the safety belt pretensioners and or either one or both stages of the dual stage airbag supplemental restraints based on crash severity and occupant conditions The fact that the pretensioners or airbags did not activate for both front seat occupants in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the Personal Safety System determined the accident conditions crash severity belt usage etc were not appropriate to activate these safety devices Front airbags are designed to activate only in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollovers side impacts or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The pretensioners are designed to activate in frontal and near frontal collisions and in side collisions and rollovers Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints The dual stage airbags offer the capability to tailor the level of airbag inflation energy A lower less forceful energy level is provided for more
276. ntinue cranking for up to 10 seconds or until the vehicle starts Note Cranking may be stopped at any time by turning the key to the off position 3 After idling for a few seconds release the parking brake apply the brake shift into gear and drive Note If the engine does not start on the first try turn the key to the off position wait 10 seconds and try Step 2 again If the engine still fails to start press the accelerator to the floor and try Step 2 again keeping the accelerator on the floor until the engine begins to accelerate above cranking speeds this will allow the engine to crank with the fuel shut off in case the engine is flooded with fuel Guarding against exhaust fumes Carbon monoxide is present in exhaust fumes Take precautions to avoid its dangerous effects WARNING If you smell exhaust fumes inside your vehicle have your dealer inspect your vehicle immediately Do not drive if you smell exhaust fumes Important ventilating information If the engine is idling while the vehicle is stopped for a long period of time open the windows at least 1 inch 2 5 cm or adjust the heating or air conditioning to bring in fresh air ENGINE BLOCK HEATER IF EQUIPPED An engine block heater warms the engine coolant which aids in starting and allows the heater defroster system to respond quickly If your vehicle is equipped with this system your equipment includes a heater element which is installed in your engine block
277. o adjust the level of treble BALANCE Press E SEEK pl to adjust the audio between the left L and right R speakers FADE Press a SEEK gt to adjust the audio between the back B and front F speakers SPEED COMPENSATED VOLUME With this feature on radio volume automatically gets louder with increasing vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise The default setting is off Use k SEEK PP to adjust between SPEED OFF and levels 1 7 Increasing the level from 1 lowest setting to 7 highest setting allows the radio volume to automatically change slightly with vehicle speed to compensate for road and wind noise Recommended level is 3 SPEED OFF turns the feature off and level 7 is the maximum setting DSP MODE if equipped Press ja SEEK P to choose between STEREO SURROUND mode and STEREO mode 36 SOUND Entertainment Systems Extra Features AUX Press repeatedly to cycle through LINE auxiliary audio mode SYNC if equipped and FES modes if equipped For location and further information on auxiliary audio mode refer to Auxiliary input jack later in this chapter If your vehicle is equipped with SYNC refer to the SYNC information included with your vehicle for further information gt I1 Play Pause In CD DVD mode if equipped When a CD or DVD is playing in the family entertainment system press this control to play or pause the current CD DVD The
278. o allow the rear passengers to control the rear climate system using the rear mounted controls Temperature Press up down to increase decrease the rear climate temperature Fan Speed Press to decrease increase the fan speed VOICE COMMANDS IN CLIMATE MODE Please refer to the Voice commands in climate mode section of the Navigation supplement for more information on using voice commands with the climate control system Operating tips e To reduce fog build up on the windshield during humid weather place the air flow selector in the 7 position e To reduce humidity build up inside the vehicle do not drive with the system off or with recirculated air engaged e Do not put objects under the front seats that will interfere with the airflow to the back seats e Remove any snow ice or leaves from the air intake area at the base of the windshield For maximum cooling performance MAX A C In AUTO mode press AUTO control and set to desired temperature 77 Climate Controls In manual override mode select X or F A C and recirculated air A and set the temperature to 60 F 16 C Set the fan to the highest speed initially then adjust to maintain passenger comfort To improve the A C cool down drive with the windows slightly open for 2 3 minutes after starting the vehicle or until the vehicle has aired out In extremely cold temperatures to maximize overall heater performance it is suggested to not operate the auxilia
279. o become misaligned or cause damage to your tires If your vehicle seems to pull to one side when you re driving the wheels may be out of alignment Have an authorized dealer check the wheel alignment periodically 228 Tires Wheels and Loading Wheel misalignment in the front or the rear can cause uneven and rapid treadwear of your tires and should be corrected by an authorized dealer Front wheel drive FWD vehicles and those with an independent rear suspension if equipped may require alignment of all four wheels The tires should also be balanced periodically An unbalanced tire and wheel assembly may result in irregular tire wear Tire rotation Rotating your tires at the recommended interval as indicated in the scheduled maintenance information that comes with your vehicle will help your tires wear more evenly providing better tire performance and longer tire life e Front Wheel Drive FWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram YN VANANAA 4 VA Z YN NANNY A AS eo Tires Wheels and Loading e Rear Wheel Drive RWD vehicles Four Wheel Drive 4WD All Wheel Drive AWD vehicles front tires at top of diagram LL YN AAANAA LL YVAAANAA NA AAANAA Sometimes irregular tire wear can be corrected by rotating the tires Note If your tires show uneven wear ask an authorized dealer to check for and correct any wheel misalignment tire imbalance or mechanical problem involved before tire rotation Note Yo
280. ocking the doors Two stage unlock section earlier in this chapter To unlock all doors enter the factory set code or your personal code then touch the 3 e 4 control within five seconds To lock all doors press and hold the 7 e 8 and the 9 e 0 at the same time with the driver s door closed for two seconds You do not need to enter the keypad code first 139 Locks and Security SECURILOCK PASSIVE ANTI THEFT SYSTEM SecuriLock passive anti theft system is an engine immobilization system This system is designed to help prevent the engine from being started unless a coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitter IKT programmed to your vehicle is used The use of the wrong type of coded key may lead to a no start condition Your vehicle comes with two coded Integrated Keyhead Transmitters additional coded IKTs may be purchased from your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired The authorized dealer can program your spare IKTs to your vehicle or you can program the IKTs yourself Refer to Programming spare keys for instructions on how to program the coded key Note The SecuriLock passive anti theft system is not compatible with non Ford aftermarket remote start systems Use of these systems may result in vehicle starting problems and a loss of security protection Note Large metallic objects electronic devices that
281. of a digital or dial type tire pressure gauge rather than a stick type tire pressure gauge Use the recommended cold inflation pressure for optimum tire performance and wear Under inflation or over inflation may cause uneven treadwear patterns 222 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Under inflation is the most common cause of tire failures and may result in severe tire cracking tread separation or blowout with unexpected loss of vehicle control and increased risk of injury Under inflation increases sidewall flexing and rolling resistance resulting in heat buildup and internal damage to the tire It also may result in unnecessary tire stress irregular wear loss of vehicle control and accidents A tire can lose up to half of its air pressure and not appear to be flat Always inflate your tires to the Ford recommended inflation pressure even if it is less than the maximum inflation pressure information found on the tire The Ford recommended tire inflation pressure is found on the Safety Compliance Certification Label or Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door Failure to follow the tire pressure recommendations can cause uneven treadwear patterns and adversely affect the way your vehicle handles Maximum Permissible Inflation Pressure is the tire manufacturer s maximum permissible pressure and or the pressure at which the maximum load can be carried by the tire This pressure is normally hi
282. off the jack even if the vehicle is in P Park WARNING To help prevent the vehicle from moving when you change a tire be sure to place the transmission in P Park set the parking brake and block Gin both directions the wheel that is diagonally opposite other side and end of the vehicle to the tire being changed WARNING If the vehicle slips off the jack you or someone else could be seriously injured WARNING Do not attempt to change a tire on the side of the vehicle close to moving traffic Pull far enough off the road to avoid the danger of being hit when operating the jack or changing the wheel Note Passengers should not remain in the vehicle when the vehicle is being jacked 305 Roadside Emergencies 1 Block the diagonally opposite wheel 2 Remove wheel cover if equipped with the lug wrench tip and loosen each wheel lug nut one half turn counterclockwise but do not remove them until the wheel is raised off the ground 3 Put the jack in the jack notch next to the tire you are changing Turn the jack handle clockwise until the wheel is completely off the ground 4 Remove the lug nuts with the lug wrench 5 Replace the flat tire with the spare tire making sure the valve stem is facing outward Reinstall the lug nuts until the wheel is snug against the hub Do not fully tighten the lug nuts until the wheel has been lowered 6 Lower the wheel by turning the jack handle counterc
283. ol will fold the seatback flat Note For the bench seat only make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips WARNING Reclining the seatback can cause an occupant to slide under the seat s safety belt resulting in severe personal injuries in the event of a collision Adjusting second row seats six passenger vehicles only Lift the control to adjust the seat forward or backward 4 gt 4 XN Accessing the third row seats Fold and tumble the second row seat to access the third row Remove items from the second row seat and ensure that no bulky objects such as purses or briefcases are on the floor in front of the second row seats before tumbling them For second row bench seats make sure the center safety belt is unbuckled before folding the seatback Note You may have to move the front row seat forward to allow the 2nd row seat to be fully tumbled Stow the head restraint by pressing the head restraint release button while sliding the head restraint fully down 162 Seating and Safety Restraints 1 Lift the handle located on the side of the seat The seatback will fold flat 2 Lift the handle all the way up until the seat releases from the floor Rotate the seat forward to allow access to the third row 163 Seating and Safety Restraints 3 To retu
284. ome near the battery When working near the battery always shield your face and protect your eyes Always provide proper ventilation WARNING When lifting a plastic cased battery excessive pressure on the end walls could cause acid to flow through the vent caps resulting in personal injury and or damage to the vehicle or battery Lift the battery with a battery carrier or with your hands on opposite corners 352 Maintenance and Specifications WARNING Keep batteries out of reach of children Batteries contain sulfuric acid Avoid contact with skin eyes or clothing Shield your eyes when working near the battery to protect against possible splashing of acid solution In case of acid contact with skin or eyes flush immediately with water for a minimum of 15 minutes and get prompt medical attention If acid is swallowed call a physician immediately WARNING Battery posts terminals and related accessories contain lead and lead compounds Wash hands after handling Because your vehicle s engine is electronically controlled by a computer some control conditions are maintained by power from the battery When the battery is disconnected or a new battery is installed the engine must relearn its idle and fuel trim strategy for optimum driveability and performance To begin this process 1 With the vehicle at a complete stop set the parking brake 2 Put the gearshift in P Park turn off all accessories and start the engine
285. omy when operated in the top cruise gear and with steady pressure on the gas pedal e Close windows for high speed driving EPA fuel economy estimates Every new vehicle should have a sticker on the window called the Monroney Label which contains EPA fuel economy estimates Contact your authorized dealer if the Monroney Label is not supplied with your vehicle The EPA fuel economy estimates should be your guide for the fuel economy comparisons with other vehicles Your fuel economy may vary depending upon the method of operation and conditions EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM tC Your vehicle is equipped with various emission control components and a catalytic converter which will enable your vehicle to comply with applicable exhaust emission standards To make sure that the catalytic converter and other emission control components continue to work properly e Use only the specified fuel listed e Avoid running out of fuel e Do not turn off the ignition while your vehicle is moving especially at high speeds e Have the items listed in scheduled maintenance information performed according to the specified schedule The scheduled maintenance items listed in scheduled maintenance information are essential to the life and performance of your vehicle and to its emissions system If other than Ford Motorcraft or Ford authorized parts are used for maintenance replacements or for service of components affecting 370 Maintenance and Spec
286. on safety belts will lock to help reduce forward movement of the driver and passengers Webbing extraction sensitive mode The webbing sensitive locking mode locks the webbing and prevents more belt from being pulled out if the belt is pulled out too quickly The belt will unlock when you stop pulling on it Automatic locking mode When to use the automatic locking mode In this mode the shoulder belt is automatically pre locked The belt will still retract to remove any slack in the shoulder belt The automatic locking mode is not available on the driver safety belt This mode should be used any time a child safety seat except a booster is installed in a passenger front or rear seating position with a combination lap shoulder safety belt Children 12 years old and under should be properly restrained in a rear seating position whenever possible Refer to Safety restraints for children or Safety seats for children later in this chapter 177 Seating and Safety Restraints How to use the automatic locking mode e Buckle the combination lap and shoulder belt e Grasp the shoulder portion and pull downward until the entire belt is pulled out e Allow the belt to retract As the belt retracts you will hear a clicking sound This indicates the safety belt is now in the automatic locking mode How to disengage the automatic locking mode WARNING Ford Motor Company recommends that all passenger safety belt assemblies and att
287. oning of the driver seat outside rearview mirrors and Ly eff adjustable pedals to two programmable positions The memory seat control is located on the driver door e To program position one move the driver seat exterior mirrors and adjustable pedals to the desired positions using the associated controls Press and hold control button 1 for at least two seconds A tone will be heard when the memory save is complete e To program position two repeat the previous procedure using control button 2 A position can only be recalled when the transmission gearshift is in Park automatic transmission A memory seat position may be programmed at any time The memory seat positions are also recalled when you press your remote entry transmitter cl unlock control and the transmitter is programmed to a memory seat position or when you enter a valid customer code 1 or 2 on the keypad To program the memory seat to remote entry transmitter refer to Remote entry system in the Locks and Security chapter Note The seat will not travel to its final position if the key is not in the ignition and the easy entry feature is enabled Easy entry exit feature if equipped This feature automatically moves the driver s seat rearward 2 in 5 cm when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the key is removed from the ignition The seat will move to the original position when e the transmission is in N Neutral or P Park e the k
288. ont or the Rear Gross Axle Weight Rating specified for your vehicle on the Safety Compliance Certification Label found on the edge of the driver s door TRAILER TOWING Trailer towing puts additional loads on your vehicle s engine transmission axle brakes tires and suspension For your safety and to maximize vehicle performance be sure to use the proper equipment while towing Follow these guidelines to ensure safe towing procedure e Stay within your vehicle s load limits e Thoroughly prepare your vehicle for towing Refer to Preparing to tow in this chapter e Use extra caution when driving while trailer towing Refer to Driving while you tow in this chapter e Service your vehicle more frequently if you tow a trailer Refer to the severe duty schedule in the scheduled maintenance guide e Do not tow a trailer until your vehicle has been driven at least 1 000 miles 1 600 km Refer to the instructions included with towing accessories for the proper installation and adjustment specifications e The trailer tongue weight should be 10 15 of the loaded trailer weight Do not exceed the maximum loads listed on the Safety Compliance Certification label For load specification terms found on the label refer to Vehicle loading with and without a trailer in this chapter Remember to figure in the tongue load of your loaded vehicle when figuring the total weight 249 Tires Wheels and Loading GCWR Gross Combine
289. or icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press v to select and enter the TV display menu 4 When TV display is highlighted press B gt to enter the menu 5 Press A IV to select from the following settings Normal P S Pan and Scan Displays the wide picture on the screen with a portion of the left and right sides removed Normal L B Letter Box Displays the wide picture with black bands on the upper and lower portions of the screen e Wide Displays the wide picture 6 When the desired selection is highlighted press ENTER on the remote control to confirm the selection OSD language This screen allows you to select the gM language you would like for use with General Setup Page OHD lems nglish the DVD player commands and PTET on tea s set up screens FXE 82 To access pha ahd Deutsch italiane Espa ol Portugues 60 Entertainment Systems 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press lt q gt to highlight the monitor icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press W to select and enter the OSD language menu 4 When OSD Lang is highlighted press B gt to access the menu 5 Press A W to select from all available languages 6 When the desired language is highlighted press ENTER on the remote to confirm the selection Note The default language is English Angle mark
290. ord ESP Can Quickly Pay for Itself One service bill the cost of parts and labor can easily exceed the price of your Ford ESP Service Contract With Ford ESP you minimize your risk for unexpected repair bills and rising repair costs Avoid the rising cost of properly maintaining your vehicle Ford ESP also offers a Premium Maintenance Plan that covers items that routinely wear out The coverage is prepaid so you never have to worry about affording your vehicle maintenance It covers regular checkups routine inspections preventive care and replacement of items that require periodic attention for normal wear e Wiper blades e Brake pads and linings Spark plugs except e Shock absorbers California e Clutch disc e Belts and hoses Contact your selling Ford Lincoln or Mercury dealership today so they can customize a Ford Extended Service Plan that fits your driving lifestyle and budget Interest free finance options available Take advantage of our installment payment plan just a 10 down payment will provide you with an affordable no interest no fee payment opportunity 389 Ford Extended Service Plan IWA A diz SLVLS ALIO ON LdV ssayqqv LNIdd SSV31d SWVN 66 8908r IIN 4eO IeAoy ZZ08 XOg O d ds3 p104 0 SIU iew pue mojaq uonewoju BU 349 dwo9 aow urea oL idSJ P404 1M pulpy Jo 3923d aujnuay jay 390 A Accessory delay cccccccccceeees 102 Active Park As
291. osition Select 2 Normal speed operation of rear wiper 1 Intermittent operation of rear wiper 0 off Rear wiper and washer off For rear wash cycle rotate and hold as desired the rear wiper washer control to either J position From either position the control will automatically return to the 2 or 0 off position Rear heated wiper blades The wiper blades are heated automatically to reduce ice buildup and activates when the vehicle is started The wiper rests are designed to operate regardless of the geographic location of the vehicle TILT AND TELESCOPE IF EQUIPPED STEERING WHEEL To adjust the steering wheel 1 Pull the lever down to unlock the steering column 2 While the lever is in the down position move the steering wheel up or down and in or out if equipped with the telescopic feature until you find the desired position 3 While holding the steering wheel in place pull the lever up to its original position to lock the steering column WARNING Never adjust the steering wheel when the vehicle is moving 92 Driver Controls ILLUMINATED VISOR MIRROR Lift the mirror cover to turn on the visor mirror lamp Slide on rod feature The visor will slide back and forth on the rod for increased sunlight coverage Rotate the visor towards the side window and extend it rearward for additional sunlight coverage Note To stow the visor back into the headliner
292. ot required prior to enforcing state created rights or other rights which are independent of the Magnuson Moss Warranty Act or state replacement or repurchase laws IN CALIFORNIA U S ONLY California Civil Code Section 1793 2 d requires that if a manufacturer or its representative is unable to repair a motor vehicle to conform to the vehicle s applicable express warranty after a reasonable number of attempts the manufacturer shall be required to either replace the vehicle with one substantially identical or repurchase the vehicle and reimburse the buyer in an amount equal to the actual price paid or payable by the consumer less a reasonable allowance for consumer use The consumer has the right to choose whether to receive a refund or replacement vehicle California Civil Code Section 1793 22 b presumes that the manufacturer has had a reasonable number of attempts to conform the vehicle to its applicable express warranties if within the first 18 months of ownership of a new vehicle or the first 18 000 miles 29 000 km whichever occurs first 1 Two or more repair attempts are made on the same non conformity likely to cause death or serious bodily injury OR 2 Four or more repair attempts are made on the same nonconformity a defect or condition that substantially impairs the use value or safety of the vehicle OR 3 The vehicle is out of service for repair of nonconformities for a total of more than 30 calendar days not neces
293. other end of the positive cable to the positive terminal of the assisting battery 3 Connect the negative cable to the negative terminal of the assisting battery 321 Roadside Emergencies 4 Make the final connection of the negative cable to an exposed metal part of the stalled vehicle s engine away from the battery and the carburetor fuel injection system Note Do not attach the negative cable to fuel lines engine rocker covers the intake manifold or electrical components as grounding points WARNING Do not connect the end of the second cable to the negative terminal of the battery to be jumped A spark may cause an explosion of the gases that surround the battery 5 Ensure that the cables are clear of fan blades belts moving parts of both engines or any fuel delivery system parts Jump starting 1 Start the engine of the booster vehicle and run the engine at moderately increased speed 2 Start the engine of the disabled vehicle 3 Once the disabled vehicle has been started run both engines for an additional three minutes before disconnecting the jumper cables 322 Roadside Emergencies Removing the jumper cables Remove the jumper cables in the reverse order that they were connected 1 Remove the jumper cable from the ground metal surface Note In the illustrations lightning bolts are used to designate the assisting boosting battery 2 Remove the jumpe
294. ots road salt and industrial fallout before repairing paint chips e Always read the instructions before using the products ALUMINUM WHEELS AND WHEEL COVERS Aluminum wheels and wheel covers are coated with a clearcoat paint finish In order to maintain their shine e Clean weekly with Motorcraft Wheel and Tire Cleaner ZC 37 A which is available from your authorized dealer Heavy dirt and brake dust accumulation may require agitation with a sponge Rinse thoroughly with a strong stream of water e Never apply any cleaning chemical to hot or warm wheel rims or covers e Some automatic car washes may cause damage to the finish on your wheel rims or covers Chemical strength cleaners or cleaning chemicals in combination with brush agitation to remove brake dust and dirt could wear away the clearcoat finish over time e Do not use hydrofluoric acid based or high caustic based wheel cleaners steel wool fuels or strong household detergent e To remove tar and grease use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 available from your authorized dealer 335 Cleaning ENGINE Engines are more efficient when they are clean because grease and dirt buildup keep the engine warmer than normal When washing e Take care when using a power washer to clean the engine The high pressure fluid could penetrate the sealed parts and cause damage e Do not spray a hot engine with cold water to avoid cracking the engine block or other e
295. ould immediately inform Transport Canada using their toll free number 1 800 333 0510 333 Cleaning WASHING THE EXTERIOR Wash your vehicle regularly with cool or lukewarm water and a neutral pH shampoo such as Motorcraft Detail Wash ZC 3 A which is available from your authorized dealer e Never use strong household detergents or soap such as dish washing or laundry liquid These products can discolor and spot painted surfaces e Never wash a vehicle that is hot to the touch or during exposure to strong direct sunlight e Always use a clean sponge or car wash mitt with plenty of water for best results e Dry the vehicle with a chamois or soft terry cloth towel in order to eliminate water spotting e It is especially important to wash the vehicle regularly during the winter months as dirt and road salt are difficult to remove and cause damage to the vehicle e Immediately remove items such as gasoline diesel fuel bird droppings and insect deposits because they can cause damage to the vehicle s paintwork and trim over time Use Motorcraft Bug and Tar Remover ZC 42 which is available from your authorized dealer e Remove any exterior accessories such as antennas before entering a car wash e Suntan lotions and insect repellents can damage any painted surface if these substances come in contact with your vehicle wash off as soon as possible Exterior chrome e Wash the vehicle first using cool or luk
296. ount of water or any ammonia based household glass cleaner directly to a soft cloth Rub the screen gently until the dust dirt or fingerprints are removed Do not spray the screen directly with water or glass cleaning solvents Overspray from these fluids could drip down into the internal electronics of the screen and cause damage Do not apply excessive pressure while cleaning the screen Cleaning DVD and CD discs Inspect all discs for contamination before playing If necessary clean discs only with an approved DVD and CD cleaner and wipe from the center out to the edge Do not use circular motion NAVIGATION SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a navigation system Refer to the Navigation System supplement for further information SYNC IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with SYNC a hands free communications and entertainment system with special phone and media features For more information please refer to the SYNC supplement or to the SYNC section in the Navigation System supplement if equipped 67 Climate Controls SINGLE ZONE CLIMATE CONTROL WITH REAR PASSENGER COMPARTMENT CLIMATE CONTROL REAR CLIMATE gt at CTRL TEMP TEMP EYE YYJ 1 G47 Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and demister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically prov
297. pability with or without a trailer Properly loading your vehicle will provide maximum return of vehicle design performance Before loading your vehicle familiarize yourself with the following terms for determining your vehicle s weight ratings with or without a trailer from the vehicle s Tire Label or Safety Compliance Certification Label Base Curb Weight is the weight of the vehicle including a full tank of fuel and all standard equipment It does not include passengers cargo or optional equipment Vehicle Curb Weight is the weight of your new vehicle when you picked it up from your authorized dealer plus any aftermarket equipment 242 Tires Wheels and Loading PAYLOAD Payload is the combined weight of cargo and passengers that the vehicle is carrying The maximum payload for your vehicle can be found on the Tire Label on the B Pillar or the edge of the driver s door vehicles exported outside the US and Canada may not have a Tire Label Look for THE COMBINED WEIGHT OF OCCUPANTS AND CARGO SHOULD NEVER EXCEED XXX kg OR XXX Ib for maximum payload The payload listed on the Tire Label is the maximum payload for the vehicle as built by the assembly plant If any aftermarket or authorized dealer installed equipment has been installed on the vehicle the weight of the equipment must be subtracted from the payload listed on the Tire Label in order to determine the new payload WARNING T
298. pare tire of a different size other than the tire provided should never be used If the spare tire is installed the AWD system may disable automatically and enter front wheel drive only mode to protect driveline components This condition may be indicated by an AWD OFF message in the message center see Message center section in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information If there is an AWD OFF message in the message center from using the spare tire this indicator should turn off after reinstalling the repaired or replaced normal road tire and driving a short distance It is recommended to reinstall the repaired or replaced road tire as soon as possible Major dissimilar tire sizes between the front and rear axles could cause the AWD system to stop functioning and default to front wheel drive or damage the AWD system 285 Driving Note The AWD OFF message may also be displayed in the message center if the AWD system has overheated and defaulted to front wheel drive This condition may occur if the vehicle was operated in extreme conditions with excessive wheel slip such as deep sand To resume normal AWD function as soon as possible stop the vehicle in a safe location and allow it to idle The AWD OFF message will turn off when the system cools and normal AWD function returns Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are
299. peatedly until SHUFFLE ON OFF appears in the display Use E SEEK gt to switch between ON OFF If you wish to engage shuffle mode right away press ja SEEK P to begin random play Otherwise random play will begin when the current track is finished playing The system will only shuffle the disc currently playing 32 Entertainment Systems Satellite Radio if equipped Satellite radio is available only with a valid SIRIUS radio subscription Check with your authorized dealer for availability SIRIUS Press repeatedly to access satellite radio mode if equipped Press repeatedly to cycle through SAT1 SAT2 and SAT3 modes TUNE Turn to go to the next previous available SIRIUS satellite station DIRECT Press DIRECT then enter the desired channel i e 002 using DIRECT the memory preset buttons 0 9 If you only enter one digit press OK and the system will go to that satellite channel If you enter three digits the system will automatically go to that channel if available You may cancel your entry by pressing DIRECT If an invalid station number is entered INVALID CHANNEL will appear in the display and the system will continue playing the current station SEEK Press E SEEK P to seek a to the previous next channel If a I lt SEEK gt l specific category is selected Jazz M Rock News etc press SEEK gt to seek to the previous next channel in the selected category P
300. pending on many factors such as weather storage conditions and conditions of use load speed inflation pressure etc the tires experience throughout their lives In general tires should be replaced after six years regardless of tread wear However heat caused by hot climates or frequent high loading conditions can accelerate the aging process and may require tires to be replaced more frequently You should replace your spare tire when you replace the road tires or after six years due to aging even if it has not been used 225 Tires Wheels and Loading U S DOT Tire Identification Number TIN Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall This begins with the letters DOT and indicates that the tire meets all federal standards The next two numbers or letters are the plant code designating where it was manufactured the next two are the tire size code and the last four numbers represent the week and year the tire was built For example the numbers 317 mean the 31st week of 1997 After 2000 the numbers go to four digits For example 2501 means the 25th week of 2001 The numbers in between are identification codes used for traceability This informa
301. personal affairs However drivers must not compromise their own or others safety when using such equipment Mobile Communications can enhance personal safety and security when appropriately used particularly in emergency situations Safety must be paramount when using mobile communications equipment to avoid negating these benefits Mobile Communication Equipment includes but is not limited to cellular phones pagers portable email devices in vehicle communications systems telematics devices and portable two way radios WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so EXPORT UNIQUE NON UNITED STATES CANADA VEHICLE SPECIFIC INFORMATION For your particular global region your vehicle may be equipped with features and options that are different from the features and options that are described in this Owner s Guide A market unique supplement may be supplied that complements this book By referring to the market unique supplement if provided you can properly identify those features recommendations and specifications that are unique to your vehicle This Owner s Guide is written primarily for the
302. play is located in the instrument cluster TRIP A B Registers the distance of individual journeys Press and release INFO button until the A or B trip appears in the display this represents the trip mode Press and hold RESET until it resets Refer to UNITS later in this section to switch the display from Metric to English MYKEY MILES km If programmed For more information refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter MILES km TO E This displays an estimate of approximately how far you can drive with the fuel remaining in your tank under normal driving conditions Remember to turn the ignition off when refueling to allow this feature to correctly detect the added fuel LOW FUEL LEVEL will display when you have approximately 50 miles 80 km to empty Press RESET to clear this warning message It will return at approximately 25 miles 40 km 10 miles 16 km and 0 miles 0 km miles to empty Distance to empty is calculated using a running average fuel economy which is based on your recent driving history of 500 miles 800 km This value is not the same as the average fuel economy display The running average fuel economy is re initialized to a factory default value if the battery is disconnected AVG MPG L 100km Average fuel economy displays your average fuel economy in miles gallon or liters 100 km 18 Info Press the INFO button repeatedly to cycle through the following features
303. played in the message center the EPS system has detected a problem with the system function On the next key cycle the message SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW will be displayed and steering assist will be removed until the steering system is serviced Have your vehicle taken to the nearest dealer as soon as possible 3 5L 4V Duratec V6 engine Your vehicle is equipped with a hydraulic steering system To help prevent damage to the power steering system never hold the steering wheel at its furthest turning points until it stops for more than a few seconds when the engine is running If the power steering system breaks down or if the engine is turned off you can steer the vehicle manually but it takes more effort e Do not operate the vehicle with a low power steering pump fluid level below the MIN mark on the reservoir e Some noise is normal during operation If excessive check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer e Heavy or uneven steering efforts may be caused by low power steering pump fluid level Check for low power steering pump fluid level before seeking service by your authorized dealer 268 Driving e Do not fill the power steering pump reservoir above the MAX mark on the reservoir as this may result in leaks from the reservoir If the steering wanders or pulls equipped with either EPS or hydraulic steering system check for e an improperly inflated tire e uneve
304. poration and is intended for home and other limited viewing uses only unless otherwise authorized by Macrovision Corporation Reverse engineering or disassembly is prohibited MP3 MPG WAV JPG WMA HDCD and all other file types referenced in this Owner s Guide Supply of this product only conveys a license for private non commercial use and does not convey a license nor imply any right to use this product in any commercial i e revenue generating real time broadcasting terrestrial satellite cable and or any other media broadcasting streaming via internet intranets and or other networks or in other electronic content distribution systems such as pay audio or audio on demand applications An independent license for such use is required For details please visit http www mp3licensing com Safety information WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 64 Entertainment Systems Read all of the safety and operating instructions before operating the system and retain for future reference Do not attempt to service repair or modify the Family Entertainment System FES
305. pright against your seatback with your feet on the floor 190 Seating and Safety Restraints The front passenger sensing system may detect small or medium objects placed on the seat cushion For most objects that are in the front passenger seat the passenger airbag will be disabled Even though the passenger airbag is disabled the pass airbag off lamp may or may not be illuminated according to the table below Small i e three ring Unlit Disabled binder small purse bottled water Medium i e heavy Lit Disabled briefcase fully packed luggage Empty seat or small Lit Disabled to medium object with safety belt buckled If you think that the status of the passenger airbag off indicator lamp is incorrect check for the following e Objects lodged underneath the seat e Objects between the seat cushion and the center console Cif equipped e Objects hanging off the seat back e Objects stowed in the seatback map pocket if equipped e Objects placed on the occupant s lap e Cargo interference with the seat e Other passengers pushing or pulling on the seat e Rear passenger feet and knees resting or pushing on the seat The conditions listed above may cause the weight of a properly seated occupant to be incorrectly interpreted by the passenger sensing system The person in the front passenger seat may appear heavier or lighter due to the conditions described in the list above 191 Seating and Safety R
306. r cable on the negative connection of the booster vehicle s battery 323 Roadside Emergencies 3 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the booster vehicle s battery 4 Remove the jumper cable from the positive terminal of the disabled vehicle s battery After the disabled vehicle has been started and the jumper cables removed allow it to idle for several minutes so the engine computer can relearn its idle conditions 324 Roadside Emergencies WRECKER TOWING If you need to have your vehicle towed contact a professional towing service or if you are a member of a roadside assistance program your roadside assistance service provider It is recommended that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment Do not tow with a slingbelt Ford Motor Company has not approved a slingbelt towing procedure On FWD vehicles if your vehicle is to be towed from the front ensure proper wheel lift equipment is used to raise the front wheels off the ground The rear wheels can be left on the ground when towed in this fashion If your vehicle is to be towed from the rear using wheel lift equipment it is recommended that the front wheels drive wheels be placed on a dolly to prevent damage to the automatic transmission On AWD vehicles it is required that your vehicle be towed with a wheel lift and dollies or flatbed equipment with
307. r or attempt to readjust the mirror glass if it is frozen in place These actions could cause damage to the glass and mirrors Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products POWER ADJUSTABLE FOOT PEDALS IF EQUIPPED The accelerator and brake pedal should only be adjusted when the vehicle is stopped and the gearshift lever is in the P Park position Orr Press and hold the rocker control to adjust accelerator and brake pedal e Press the back of the control to adjust the pedals toward you e Press the front of the control to adjust the pedals away from you WARNING Never adjust the accelerator and brake pedal with feet on the pedals while the vehicle is moving Memory feature if equipped The accelerator and brake pedal positions are saved when doing a memory set function and can be recalled along with the vehicle personality features when a memory position is selected through the remote entry transmitter keyless entry keypad or memory switch on the driver s door if equipped with memory feature Refer to Memory seat power mirrors adjustable pedals in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter SPEED CONTROL With speed control set you can maintain a set speed without keeping your foot on the accelerator pedal 104 Driver Controls WARNING Do not use the speed control in heavy traffic or on roads that are winding slippery or unpaved Us
308. r to completely latching the liftgate could result in damage to the liftgate and or its power components Make sure the liftgate is fully latched before operating the vehicle Care should be exercised in starting the engine before the liftgate is fully closed latched If the ignition is cycled during a liftgate power close cycle and the liftgate is 6 10 inches 15 24 cm from being latched the liftgate may reverse to the full open position Verify that the gate is closed before operating or moving the vehicle especially in an enclosure like a garage or a parking structure The liftgate or its components could be damaged in an enclosure if the liftgate is open When power operating the liftgate at temperatures below 32 F 0 C the liftgate may stop about five inches 12 7 cm from the full open position The liftgate can be fully opened by pushing it upward to the maximum open position The power liftgate feature can be enabled or disabled using the message center With the control in the OFF position power operation is disabled from the liftgate handle button and from the rear cargo area button The integrated keyhead transmitter and instrument panel switch will still continue to operate the liftgate regardless of the position state of the message center Refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter 121 Driver Controls To power open or close the liftgate from the instrument panel Press the button located on the
309. r unlock control on the door panel three times 5 Turn the ignition back to the on position The horn will chirp one time to confirm programming mode has been entered and is active 6 To enable disable the autolock feature press the unlock control then press the lock control The horn will chirp once if autolock was deactivated or twice one short and one long chirp if autolock was activated 7 Turn the ignition to the off position The horn will chirp once to confirm the procedure is complete 128 Locks and Security Keyless entry keypad autolock enable disable procedure 1 Turn the ignition to the off position 2 Close all the doors 3 Enter factory set 5 digit entry code 4 Touch and hold the 3 e 4 While holding the 3 e 4 touch the 7 e 8 5 Release the 7 e 8 6 Release the 3 e 4 The user should receive a horn chirp to indicate the system has been disabled or a chirp followed by a honk to indicate the system has been enabled Autounlock feature The autounlock feature will unlock all the doors when e the ignition is in the on position all the doors are closed and the vehicle has been in motion at a speed greater than 12 mph 20 km h e the vehicle has then come to a stop and the ignition is turned to the off or accessory position and the driver door is opened within 10 minutes of the ignition being transitioned to the off or accessory position Note The doors will not autounlock if the
310. r vehicle has tires of a different size than the size indicated on the vehicle placard or tire inflation pressure label you should determine the proper tire inflation pressure for those tires As an added safety feature your vehicle has been equipped with a tire pressure monitoring system TPMS that illuminates a low tire pressure telltale when one or more of your tires is significantly under inflated Accordingly when the low tire pressure telltale illuminates you should stop and check your tires as soon as possible and inflate them to the proper pressure Driving on a significantly under inflated tire causes the tire to overheat and can lead to tire failure Under inflation also reduces fuel efficiency and tire tread life and may affect the vehicle s handling and stopping ability Please note that the TPMS is not a substitute for proper tire maintenance and it is the driver s responsibility to maintain correct tire pressure even if under inflation has not reached the level to trigger illumination of the TPMS low tire pressure telltale Your vehicle has also been equipped with a TPMS malfunction indicator to indicate when the system is not operating properly The TPMS malfunction indicator is combined with the low tire pressure telltale When the system detects a malfunction the telltale will flash for approximately one minute and then remain continuously illuminated This sequence will continue upon subsequent vehicle start ups as
311. r with a decreased coverage area at the outer corners of the bumper refer to the figures for approximate zone coverage areas As you move closer to the obstacle the rate of the tone increases When the obstacle is less than 10 inches 25 0 cm away the tone will sound continuously If the RSS detects a stationary or receding object further than 10 inches 25 0 cm from the side of the vehicle the tone will sound for only three seconds Once the system detects an object approaching the tone will sound again While receiving a warning the radio volume will be reduced to a predetermined level After the warning goes away the radio will return to the previous value The RSS automatically turns on when the gearshift lever is placed in R Reverse and the ignition is on A control in the message center allows the driver to disable the system refer to Message center in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information Note If the system cannot be turned off refer to MyKey in the Locks and Security chapter for more information Keep the RSS sensors located on the rear bumper fascia free from snow ice and large accumulations of dirt do not clean the sensors with sharp objects If the sensors are covered it will affect the accuracy of the RSS If your vehicle sustains damage to the rear bumper fascia leaving it misaligned or bent the sensing zone may be altered causing inaccurate measurement of obstacles or false alarm
312. rbag system increasing the risk of injury Do not modify the front end of the vehicle Children and airbags Children must always be properly restrained Accident statistics suggest that children are safer when properly restrained in the rear seating positions than in the front seating position Failure to follow these instructions may increase the A risk of injury in a collision WARNING Airbags can kill or injure a child in a child seat NEVER place a rear facing child seat in front of an active airbag If you must use a forward facing child seat in the front seat move the seat all the way back aN 186 Seating and Safety Restraints How does the airbag supplemental restraint system work The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains longitudinal deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Front airbags are designed to inflate in frontal and near frontal collisions not rollover side impact or rear impacts unless the collision causes sufficient longitudinal deceleration The airbags inflate and deflate rapidly upon activation After airbag deployment it is normal to notice a smoke like powdery residue or
313. re allows only the driver to operate the power windows A J To lock out all the window controls except for the driver s press the right side of the control Press the left side to restore the window controls Bounce back driver s window only When an obstacle has been detected in the window opening as the window is moving upward the window will automatically reverse direction and move down This is known as bounce back If the ignition is turned off without accessory delay being active during bounce back the window will move down until the bounce back position is reached Security override To override a bounce back condition within two seconds after the window reaches the bounce back position pull and hold the switch up and the window will travel up with no bounce back or pinch protection If the switch is released before the window is fully closed the window will stop For example this can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the window or seals Accessory delay With accessory delay the radio power windows and moon roof if equipped operate for up to 10 minutes after the ignition switch is turned from on to off or until one of the front doors are opened 102 Driver Controls INTERIOR MIRROR The interior rear view mirror has two pivot points on the support arm which lets you adjust the mirror up or down and from side to side WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle i
314. rease the speed of the wipers rotate towards you to decrease the speed of the wipers Windshield washer Press the end of the stalk e briefly causes a single swipe of the wipers without washer fluid e a quick press and hold the wipers will swipe three times with washer fluid e along press and hold the wipers and washer fluid will be activated for up to ten seconds Courtesy wipe feature One extra wipe will occur a few seconds after washing the front window to clear any excess washer fluid remaining on the windshield Note Do not operate the washer when the washer reservoir is empty This may cause the washer pump to overheat Check the washer fluid level frequently Do not operate the wipers when the windshield is dry This may scratch the glass damage the wiper blades and cause the wiper motor to burn out Before operating the wiper on a dry windshield always use the windshield washer In freezing weather be sure the wiper blades are not frozen to the windshield before operating the wipers Windshield wiper rainlamp feature if equipped with Autolamp When the windshield wipers are turned on during daylight and the headlamp control is in the autolamp position the exterior lamps will turn on after a brief delay and will remain on until the wipers are turned off 91 Driver Controls Rear window wiper washer controls For rear wiper operation rotate the rear window wiper and washer control to the desired p
315. red while the vehicle is in motion USB port if equipped WARNING Driving while distracted can result in loss of vehicle control accident and injury Ford strongly recommends that drivers use extreme caution when using any device that may take their focus off the road The driver s primary responsibility is the safe operation of their vehicle Only use cell phones and other devices not essential to the driving task when it is safe to do so 39 Entertainment Systems Your vehicle may be equipped with a USB port inside your center console This feature allows you to plug in media playing devices memory sticks and also to charge devices if they support this feature For further information on this feature refer to Accessing and using your USB port in the SYNC supplement or Navigation System supplement GENERAL AUDIO INFORMATION Radio frequencies AM and FM frequencies are established by the Federal Communications Commission FCC and the Canadian Radio and Telecommunications Commission CRTC Those frequencies are AM 530 540 1700 1710 kHz FM 87 7 87 9 107 7 107 9 MHz Radio reception factors There are three factors that can affect radio reception e Distance strength The further you travel from an FM station the weaker the signal and the weaker the reception Terrain Hills mountains tall buildings power lines electric fences traffic lights and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception e
316. ress and hold ja SEEK gt to fast seek through the previous next channels SCAN Press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels If a specific category is selected Jazz Rock News etc press SCAN for a brief sampling of all available SIRIUS satellite channels within the selected category MEMORY PRESETS 0 9 There Tho aloe te el ae lca eo are 30 available presets 10 each for SAT1 SAT2 and SATS To save satellite channels in your memory presets tune to the desired channel then press and hold a memory preset number 0 9 until sound returns 33 Entertainment Systems TEXT Press and release to display the artist and song title While in tl TEXT MODE press again to scroll through the Artist AR Song SO Channel CH and Category CA In TEXT MODE Sometimes the display requires additional text to be displayed When the lt gt indicator is active press TEXT and then press kd SEEK gt to view the additional display text CAT Category FOLD Folder Press to switch between carrot turning the most recently selected satellite radio category on or off The category icon CAT will illuminate in the display when a specific category is selected the icon will not illuminate during CATEGORY ALL If no category has ever been selected NO CATEGORY SELECTED will display Note Separate categories can be set for SAT1 SAT2 or SATS Refer to Satellite radio menu for fur
317. rformance please observe the following instructions when attaching your portable music device to the audio system If your vehicle is equipped with a navigation system refer to Auxiliary input jack section in the Audio features chapter of your Navigation system supplement Required equipment 1 Any portable music player designed to be used with headphones 2 An audio extension cable with stereo male 1 8 in 3 5 mm connectors at each end To play your portable music player using the auxiliary input jack 1 Begin with the vehicle parked and the radio turned off 2 Ensure that the battery in your portable music player is new or fully charged and that the device is turned off 3 Attach one end of the audio extension cable to the headphone output of your player and the other end of the audio extension cable to the AIJ in your vehicle 4 Turn the radio on using either a tuned FM station or a CD loaded into the system Adjust the volume to a comfortable listening level 5 Turn the portable music player on and adjust the volume to 1 2 the volume 6 Press AUX on the vehicle radio repeatedly until LINE LINE IN or SYNC LINE IN appears in the display You should hear audio from your portable music player although it may be low 7 Adjust the sound on your portable music player until it reaches the level of the FM station or CD by switching back and forth between the AUX and FM or CD controls 38 Entertainment Systems
318. ring wheel e Exceeding a vehicle speed of 18 mph 80 km h for 30 seconds during Active Park Searching Exceeding a vehicle speed of 6 mph 10 km h during automatic steering Deactivating the AdvanceTrac system or the system has activated on a slippery or loose surface e ABS activation or failure e Any door except the driver s door opens e Something touching the steering wheel If a fault is present in the system the message ACTIVE PARK FAULT will be displayed followed by a chime Contact an authorized dealer to have your vehicle serviced The system should not be used if e A foreign object i e bike rack trailer etc is attached to the front or rear of the vehicle or at another location close to the sensors e The front bumper or side sensors are damaged i e in a collision or obstructed by a foreign object i e front bumper cover e A mini spare tire is used 283 Driving Troubleshooting Why isn t APA searching for a parking space e You may have deactivated the AdvanceTrac system e One of the doors except the driver s door may not be securely closed Why doesn t APA offer a particular parking space e Something may be contacting the front bumper or side sensors Clear any material stuck to the sensors e There may not be enough room to maneuver the vehicle into the space Remember there needs to be enough space on the opposite side of the vehicle to allow the front of the vehicle to
319. riving e One of the parked vehicles has a high altitude attachment i e salt sprayer snow plow moving truck high bed etc High altitude attachments may not be detected by the system e The parking space length or parked objects position have changed after the vehicle has passed the parking space e The temperature around your vehicle changed quickly such as you just drove from a heated garage into the cold or just left a car wash As a result the outside air temperature displayed in the vehicle may not be close enough to the actual temperature APA relies on a correctly sensing the temperature outside for precisely positioning the vehicle ALL WHEEL DRIVE AWD SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time All Wheel Drive AWD system The AWD system is an active system meaning it not only responds to wheel slip between the front and rear axles but also has the ability to anticipate wheel slip and transfer torque to the rear wheels before slip occurs The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator All components of the AWD system are sealed for life and require no maintenance Note When an AWD system fault is present the warning CHECK AWD will display in the message center The AWD system is not functioning correctly and defaulted to front wheel drive When this warning is displayed have your vehicle serviced at an authorized dealer If your vehicle is equipped with AWD a s
320. riving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK CANCELLED if equipped Displayed when the active park assist feature has been canceled when it is in use Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CANCELLED BY OVER SPEED if equipped Displayed when the active park assist feature self cancels due to vehicle speed over the preset limit allowed by the active park assist system Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CANCELLED BY DRIVER INPUT if equipped Displayed when the autopark feature has been canceled due to driver inputs Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information 24 Instrument Cluster CANCELLED BY ADV TRAC EVENT if equipped Displayed when the active park feature has been canceled due to the AdvanceTrac system activating Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information CANCELLED BY ABS EVENT if equipped Displayed when the active park feature has been canceled due to the ABS activating Refer to Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK REDUCE SPEED if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK SEARCHING if equipped May display when using the active park assist system See Active park assist in the Driving chapter for more information SPACE FOUN
321. rn the seatback to the floor from tumbled position rotate the seat down until you hear it latching to the floor 4 To return the seatback to the upright position e Lift the seatback toward the rear of the vehicle and e Rotate the seatback until you ee hear a click locking it in the upright position 5 Note The seatback will not raise if Cee the rear latch hooks are not properly engaged to the floor striker If the seatback does not raise then repeat steps 3 and 4 5 Pull the head restraint back up to its normal adjusted position WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 2nd row PowerFold and tumble seat WARNING Ensure that the seat is unoccupied when folding it down Folding the seat while occupied could result in occupant injury or damage to the seat This feature is available for the right hand seat on seven passenger vehicles and on both sides for six passenger vehicles 164 Seating and Safety Restraints Press the control located at the back of the rear door opening one time to fold the seat back down and tumble the seat forward for access to the 3rd row Exiting the third row seat 1 Stow the head r
322. rned on Audio from the DVD system will not play over the rear two speakers until dual play mode is turned off When dual play mode is turned on the audio sound plays over the front two speakers until dual play mode is turned off Note Each headrest monitor is labeled with an identifier either A or B found in the upper right corner of the system To watch a DVD playing in the other headrest system Press MEDIA repeatedly until the desired system Monitor A or Monitor B appears in the display 47 Entertainment Systems To play a CD or MP3 disc The DVD system can play audio CDs CD R and CD R W CD ROM To ensure proper disc operation check the disc for finger prints and scratches Clean the disc with a soft cloth wiping from the center to the edge 1 Insert a disc into the system 2 47 04 22 120 label side facing the rear O82 7020 sce ttt AER REE passengers The disc slot indicator lights will iluminate The system will automatically load the disc and it will begin to play If it is an MP3 the MP3 audio disc screen will display and allow you to access the folders and files The folder track and elapsed time will appear in the status bar The screen will list the title album and file name Press the arrow controls on the headrest DVD system to scroll through the folders When the desired folder is highlighted press SEL to confirm the selection 2 If there is already a disc in the system press the power but
323. rning chime sounds 4 8 seconds position The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled while the indicator warning chime turn off light is illuminated and the warning chime is sounding The driver s safety belt is The safety belt warning light and buckled before the ignition indicator chime remain off switch is turned to the on position Belt Minder The Belt Minder feature is a supplemental warning to the safety belt warning function This feature provides additional reminders by intermittently sounding a chime and illuminating the safety belt warning light in the instrument cluster when the driver s and front passenger s safety belt is unbuckled The Belt Minder feature uses information from the front passenger sensing system to determine if a front seat passenger is present and therefore potentially in need of a warning To avoid activating the Belt Minder feature for objects placed in the front passenger seat warnings will only be given to large front seat occupants as determined by the front passenger sensing system 180 Seating and Safety Restraints Both the driver s and passenger s safety belt usages are monitored and either may activate the Belt Minder feature The warnings are the same for the driver and the front passenger If the Belt Minder warnings have expired warnings for approximately five minutes for one occupant driver or front passenger the other occ
324. roperly install a child seat with R LATCH attachments 7 Follow the instructions on attaching child safety seats with tether straps Refer to Attaching child safety seats with tether straps later in this chapter Attach LATCH lower attachments of the child seat only to the anchors shown WARNING Never attach two child safety seats to the same anchor In a crash one anchor may not be strong enough to hold two child safety seat attachments and may break causing serious injury or death 208 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Depending on where you secure a child restraint and depending on the child restraint design you may block access to certain safety belt buckle assemblies and or LATCH lower anchors rendering those features potentially unusable To avoid risk of injury occupants should only use seating positions where they are able to be properly restrained Use of inboard lower anchors from the outboard seating positions center seating use The lower anchors at the center of the second row rear seat are spaced 520 mm 20 5 inches apart The standardized spacing for LATCH lower anchors is 280 mm 11 inches center to center A child seat with rigid LATCH attachments cannot be installed at the center seating position LATCH compatible child seats with attachments on belt webbing can only be used at this seating position provided that the child seat manufacturer s instructions permit use with the anchor spac
325. rough the saved titles When the song title appears in the display that you would like to replace press OK SONG REPLACED will appear in the display b DELETE A SONG Press OK to delete a song from the system s memory Press A SEEK to cycle through the saved songs When the song appears in the display that you would like to delete press OK The song will appear in the display for confirmation Press OK again and the display will read SONG DELETED If you do not want to delete the currently listed song press A SEEK y to select either RETURN or CANCEL Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS c DELETE ALL SONGS Press OK to delete all song s from the system s memory The display will read ARE YOU SURE Press OK to confirm deletion of all saved songs and the display will read ALL DELETED Note If there are no songs presently saved the display will read NO SONGS d DISABLE ALERTS ENABLE ALERTS Press OK to enable disable the satellite alert status which alerts you when your selected songs are playing on a satellite radio channel The system default is disabled SONG ALERTS ENABLED DISABLED will appear in the display The menu listing will display the opposite state For example if you have chosen to enable the song alerts the menu listing will read DISABLE as the alerts are currently on so your other option is to turn them off CHANNEL LOCKOUT MENU Press OK to enter the Channel Lockout m
326. rs and airbags e side airbags and Safety Canopy Refer to Seat mounted side airbag system and Safety Canopy system later in this chapter e one or more impact and safing sensors e driver and front passenger safety belt pretensioner e a readiness light and tone e diagnostic module e the electrical wiring which connects the components e Front passenger sensing system Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp Refer to Front passenger sensing system later in this chapter The diagnostic module monitors its own internal circuits and the supplemental airbag electrical system wiring including the impact sensors the system wiring the airbag system readiness light the airbag back up power and the airbag ignitors Front passenger sensing system The front passenger sensing system is designed to meet the regulatory requirements of Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard FMVSS 208 and is designed to disable will not inflate the front passenger s frontal airbag under certain conditions The front passenger sensing system works with sensors that are part of the front passenger s seat and safety belt The sensors are designed to detect the presence of a properly seated occupant and determine if the front passenger s frontal airbag should be enabled may inflate or disabled will not inflate The front passenger sensing system will disa
327. rtant safety precautions A computer system controls the engine s idle revolutions per minute RPM When the engine starts the idle RPM runs higher than normal in order to warm the engine If the engine idle speed does not slow down automatically have the vehicle checked Before starting the vehicle 1 Make sure all vehicle occupants have buckled their safety belts For more information on safety belts and their proper usage refer to the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter 2 Make sure vehicle accessories are off e Make sure the parking brake is set 256 Driving e Make sure the gearshift lever is in P Park 3 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start fy Some warning lights will briefly illuminate See Warning lights and chimes in the Instrument Cluster chapter for more information regarding the warning lights Starting the engine 1 Turn the key to 3 on without turning the key to 4 start If there is difficulty in turning the key rotate the steering wheel until the La key turns freely This condition may occur when e the front wheels are turned e a front wheel is against the curb 2 Turn the key to 4 start then release the key as soon as the engine begins cranking Your vehicle has a computer assisted cranking system 257 Driving that assists in starting the engine After releasing the key from the 4 start position the engine may co
328. ry costly Store an extra programmed key away from the vehicle in a safe place to help prevent any inconveniences Please visit an authorized dealer to purchase additional spare or replacement keys Programming spare keys You can program your own Integrated Keyhead Transmitters or standard SecuriLock coded keys to your vehicle This procedure will program both the engine immobilizer keycode and the remote entry transmitter portion of the IKT to your vehicle Note A maximum of eight coded keys can be programmed to your vehicle only four of these eight can be IKTs with remote entry functionality Tips e Only use Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs or standard SecuriLock keys e You must have two previously programmed coded keys keys that already operate your vehicle s engine and the new unprogrammed key s readily accessible e If two previously programmed coded keys are not available you must take your vehicle to your authorized dealer to have the spare key s programmed Please read and understand the entire procedure before you begin 1 Insert the first previously N 4 programmed coded key into the ignition 2 Turn the ignition from the 1 off position to the 3 on position Keep the ignition in the 3 on position for at least three seconds but no more than 10 seconds 3 Turn the ignition to the 1 off position and remove the first coded key from the ignition 142 Locks and Security 4 After
329. ry system if equipped until the engine temperature gauge crosses into the normal operating range To aid in side window defogging demisting in cold weather 1 Select JZ 2 Press A C 3 Adjust the temperature control to maintain comfort 4 Set the fan to the highest speed 5 Direct the outer instrument panel vents toward the side windows AUXILIARY CLIMATE CONTROL T s Fan speed Turn to select the desired fan speed 2 7s Distributes air through the rear vents 3 AF Distributes air through the rear vents and rear seat floor vents 4 A Distributes air through the rear floor vents 5 Temperature selection Turn to select air temperature for comfort 78 Climate Controls 6 a Rear Passenger side heated seat control if equipped Press to heat the seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 7 REAR LOCK Illuminates when the rear auxiliary climate system is being controlled by the front controls The rear auxiliary climate controls will not work when this is lit 8 ay Rear driver side heated seat control if equipped Press to heat the seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER G The rear defroster control is located on the climate control panel and works to clear the rear window of fog and thin ice The ignition must be on to operate the rear window defroster The rear de
330. s 277 Driving REARVIEW CAMERA SYSTEM IF EQUIPPED The rearview camera system located on the liftgate provides a video image which appears on the navigation system screen of the area behind the vehicle It adds assistance to the driver while reversing or reverse parking the vehicle To use the camera system place the transmission in R Reverse an image will display on the navigation screen The area displayed on the screen may vary according to the vehicle orientation and or road condition e 1 Rear bumper e 2 Red zone e 3 Yellow zone e 4 Green zone e 5 Center line of vehicle Always use caution while backing Objects in the red zone are closest to your vehicle and objects in the green zone are further away Objects are getting closer to your vehicle as they move from the green zone to the yellow or red zones 278 Driving Use the side mirrors and rearview mirror to get better coverage on both sides and rear of the vehicle When shifting out of reverse and into any other gear the image will remain on for a few seconds before it shuts off to assist in parking or trailer hookup After shifting out of R Reverse and into any gear other than P Park the image will remain until the vehicle speed reaches 5 mph 8 km h only if the rear camera delay feature is on or until any navigation radio button is pressed Note The default setting for the rear cam
331. s Wheels and Loading Low Tire Pressure Possible cause Customer Action Required Warning Light Flashing Warning Spare tire in use Your temporary spare tire is in Light use Repair the damaged road wheel and re mount it on the vehicle to restore system functionality For a description of how the system functions under these conditions refer to When your temporary spare tire is installed in this section TPMS If your tires are properly malfunction inflated and your spare tire is not in use and the TPMS warning light still flashes contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible When inflating your tires When putting air into your tires such as at a gas station or in your garage the Tire Pressure Monitoring System may not respond immediately to the air added to your tires It may take up to two minutes of driving over 20 mph 82 km h for the light to turn OFF after you have filled your tires to the recommended inflation pressure How temperature affects your tire pressure The Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS monitors tire pressure in each pneumatic tire While driving in a normal manner a typical passenger tire inflation pressure may increase approximately 2 to 4 psi 14 to 28 kPa from a cold start situation If the vehicle is stationary over night with the outside temperature significantly lower than the daytime temperature the tire pressure may decrease approximately 3 psi 21 kPa for a drop of 30 F
332. s parking garages dense tree foliage and thunderstorms can interfere with your reception Station overload When you pass a ground based broadcast repeating tower a stronger signal may overtake a weaker one and result in an audio mute Unlike AM FM audible static you will hear an audio mute when there is a satellite radio signal interference Your radio display may display NO SIGNAL to indicate the interference SIRIUS satellite radio service SIRIUS Satellite Radio is a subscription based satellite radio service that broadcasts music sports news and entertainment programming A service fee is required in order to receive SIRIUS service Vehicles that are equipped with a factory installed SIRIUS Satellite Radio system include e Hardware and limited subscription term which begins on the date of sale or lease of the vehicle e Use of online media player providing access to all SIRIUS music channels over the internet using any computer connected to the internet U S customers only For information on extended subscription terms contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 Note SIRIUS reserves the unrestricted right to change rearrange add or delete programming including canceling moving or adding particular channels and its prices at any time with or without notice to you Ford Motor Company shall not be responsible for any such programming changes Satellite Radio Electronic Serial Number ESN This 12 digit Satelli
333. s and release to advance to the next chapter In CD MP3 mode press to access the next track When using a flash thumb drive press to access the next track 9 Play Pause Press to play or pause a DVD disc or flash thumb drive track 10 TITLE Press to access the on screen display of the root DVD disc menu 11 STOP Press to stop the current DVD disc or flash thumb drive track 12 q IMS Speaker Headphone Single Dual Play Press to switch between Single Play same media playing through all speakers and Dual Play headphone mode the rear speakers are muted You can also press the 2 and 4 memory presets on the audio system at the same time to perform the same function Note Whenever either headrest system presses this button both systems will automatically go into dual play mode In order to return to single play mode you must press this button on both headrest systems 13 Numeric Keypad Use the numeric controls to enter in a specific CD MP38 track or DVD chapter to be played 14 C Cancel Press to cancel clear the numeric input i e chapter number 53 Entertainment Systems 15 MEDIA for Monitor A In Dual Play mode press MEDIA repeatedly to select from the possible media sources Monitor A Monitor B AM FM1 FM2 SR1 SR2 SR3 satellite radio equipped Disc Jukebox if equipped SYNC if equipped The selected media type will display on the screen When Monitor A is chosen you can also use the auxili
334. s below 40 will decrease the corrosion protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Decreased engine coolant concentrations below 40 will decrease the freeze protection characteristics of the engine coolant and may cause engine damage e Refer to the chart on the coolant container to ensure the coolant concentration in your vehicle will provide adequate protection at the temperatures in which you drive Vehicles driven year round in non extreme climates should use a 50 50 mixture of engine coolant and distilled water for optimum cooling system and engine protection Engine fluid temperature management EcoBoost engine only Your vehicle has been designed to pull a trailer but because of the added load the vehicle s engine may temporarily reach higher temperatures during severe operating conditions such as ascending a long or steep grade while pulling a trailer in hot ambient temperatures At this time you may notice your engine coolant temperature gauge needle move toward the H and the POWER REDUCED TO LOWER TEMP message may appear on the message center You may notice a reduction in the vehicle s speed caused by reduced engine power Your vehicle has been designed to enter this mode if certain high temperature high load conditions take place in order to manage the engine s fluid temperatures The amount of speed reduction will depend on the vehicle loading towing grade ambient temperature
335. s in motion Automatic dimming interior rear view mirror Your vehicle is equipped with an interior rear view mirror which has an auto dimming function The electronic day night mirror will change from the normal high reflective state to the non glare darkened state when bright lights glare reach the mirror When the mirror detects bright light from behind the vehicle it will automatically adjust darken to minimize glare The mirror will automatically return to the normal state whenever the vehicle is placed in R Reverse to ensure a bright clear view when backing up Do not block the sensors on the front and back of the interior rear view mirror since this may impair proper mirror performance Do not clean the housing or glass of any mirror with harsh abrasives fuel or other petroleum based cleaning products EXTERIOR MIRRORS Power side view mirrors WARNING Do not adjust the mirror while the vehicle is in motion To adjust your mirrors 1 Rotate the control clockwise to adjust the right mirror and rotate the control counterclockwise to adjust the left mirror 2 Move the control in the direction you wish to tilt the mirror 3 Return to the center position to lock mirrors in place 103 Driver Controls Heated outside mirrors Li if equipped Both mirrors are heated automatically to remove ice mist and fog when the rear window defrost is activated Do not remove ice from the mirrors with a scrape
336. s located under the instrument panel to the left of the steering wheel The fuses are coded as follows passenger seats Brake transmission shift interlock Turn signals Low beam headlamps eft 296 Roadside Emergencies aaa ol Rating ee CC Keypad Mirror switch Memory module DSM logic Adjustable pedals Power liftgate module Center information display SYNC GPS module Climate control head Screen Liftgate release seats E Horn ce Power fold seats PGT 10A Instrument panel cluster 27 Ignition Switch 297 wdw jai A p Or ae pa bo an ee Roadside Emergencies Location Rating relay coil 35 10A Steering angle sensor Rear park assist Active park assist Heated seat AWD DC AC inverter 41 15A Switch illumination Auto dimming a a Not used spare 43 10A Auxiliary climate control relay Rear window defroster relay Rear wiper Not used spare Wiper relay climate control relay 46 7 5A Occupant classification sensor OCS Passenger airbag deactivation indicator PADI Breaker Power distribution box The power distribution box is located in the engine compartment The power distribution box contains high current fuses that protect your vehicle s main electrical systems from overloads WARNING Always disconnect the battery before servicing high current fuses 298 Roadside Emergencies WARNING To reduce risk of electrical
337. s on the fuel fill inlet may not have properly closed The inlet may have stuck open or debris may be preventing the inlet from fully closing At the next opportunity safely pull off the road turn off the engine open the fuel filler door and remove any visible debris from the fuel fill opening Insert either the fuel fill nozzle or the fuel fill funnel see Refilling with a portable fuel container for funnel location provided with the vehicle several times to dislodge any debris and or allow the inlet to close properly If this action corrects the problem the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message may not reset 363 Maintenance and Specifications immediately It may take several driving cycles for the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message to turn off A driving cycle consists of an engine start up after four or more hours with the engine off followed by city highway driving Continuing to drive with the check fuel fill inlet lamp or CHECK FUEL FILL INLET message on may cause the service engine soon lamp to turn on as well WARNING The fuel system may be under pressure If you hear a hissing sound near the fuel filler door Easy Fuel no cap fuel system do not refuel until the sound stops Otherwise fuel may spray out which could cause serious personal injury bp Choosing the right fuel Use only UNLEADED fuel or UNLEADED fuel blended with a maximum of 10 ethanol Do not use f
338. s the cloth onto the soiled area allow this to set at room temperature for 30 minutes 4 Remove the soaked cloth and if it is not soiled badly use this cloth to clean the area by using a rubbing motion for 60 seconds 5 Following this wipe area dry with a clean white cotton cloth INTERIOR For fabric carpets cloth seats safety belts and seats equipped with side airbags e Remove dust and loose dirt with a vacuum cleaner e Remove light stains and soil with Motorcraft Professional Strength Carpet amp Upholstery Cleaner ZC 54 e If grease or tar is present on the material spot clean the area first with Motorcraft Spot and Stain Remover ZC 14 In Canada use Motorcraft Multi Purpose Cleaner CXC 101 e If a ring forms on the fabric after spot cleaning clean the entire area immediately but do not oversaturate or the ring will set e Do not use household cleaning products or glass cleaners which can stain and discolor the fabric and affect the flame retardant abilities of the seat materials WARNING Do not use cleaning solvents bleach or dye on the vehicle s safety belts as these actions may weaken the belt webbing WARNING On vehicles equipped with seat mounted airbags do not use chemical solvents or strong detergents Such products could contaminate the side airbag system and affect performance of the side airbag in a collision 340 Cleaning LEATHER SEATS IF EQUIPPED Your leather seat
339. s with the removal or installation of the sealant canister consult your Ford Motor Company authorized dealer for assistance Be sure to check the sealant compound s use by date regularly Use By Utiliser avant The use by date is on the lower right hand corner of the label located on the sealant canister bottle The sealant canister should be replaced after four years WHEEL LUG NUT TORQUE SPECIFICATIONS Retighten the lug nuts to the specified torque at 100 miles 160 km after any wheel disturbance tire rotation changing a flat tire wheel removal etc Ib ft 1 2 20 UNF Torque specifications are for nut and bolt threads free of dirt and rust Use only Ford recommended replacement fasteners WARNING When a wheel is installed always remove any corrosion dirt or foreign materials present on the mounting surfaces of the wheel or the surface of the wheel hub brake drum or brake disc that contacts the wheel Ensure that any fasteners that attach the rotor to the hub are secured so they do not interfere with the mounting surfaces of the wheel Installing wheels without correct metal to metal contact at the wheel mounting surfaces can cause the wheel nuts to loosen and the wheel to come off while the vehicle is in motion resulting in loss of control 318 Roadside Emergencies Note Inspect the wheel pilot hole prior to installation If there is visible corrosion in wheel pilot hole remove loos
340. s you o gt SS BB to adjust the quality of the video Video Quelty Seman image for each headrest monitor To CANN tow access Contrast Gamma Soturotion luma Delay Biwo 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press lt gt to highlight the film reel icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 3 Press W to select and enter the Video setup menu 62 Entertainment Systems 4 Press A IV to chose from Sharpness Brightness contrast color gamma hue saturation and luma delay General setup screen exit To exit the setup screen 1 Press lt q P to highlight the X icon A disc will appear beneath the icon signifying it is the current selection 2 Press ENTER on the remote control ahd Here Mow Parental control for the DVD system Your Family Entertainment System FES allows you to have control over the rear seat controls in a few different ways The DVD system is automatically activated when the vehicle ignition is on which allows the rear seat passengers to use the DVD system There are two levels of control of the FES buttons The states are FULL enabled or LOCKED disabled To change the level of control press the memory preset controls 3 and 5 simultaneously on the front audio controls The control level will cycle each time the buttons are pressed simultaneously The three states are described as FULL enabled
341. sarily all at one time In the case of 1 or 2 above the consumer must also notify the manufacturer of the need for the repair of the nonconformity at the following address Ford Motor Company 16800 Executive Plaza Drive Mail Drop 3NE B Dearborn MI 48126 THE BETTER BUSINESS BUREAU BBB AUTO LINE PROGRAM U S ONLY Your satisfaction is important to Ford Motor Company and to your dealer If a warranty concern has not been resolved using the three step 329 Customer Assistance procedure outlined on the first page of the Customer Assistance section you may be eligible to participate in the BBB AUTO LINE program The BBB AUTO LINE program consists of two parts mediation and arbitration During mediation a representative of the BBB will contact both you and Ford Motor Company to explore options for settlement of the claim If an agreement is not reached during mediation and your claim is eligible you may participate in the arbitration process An arbitration hearing will be scheduled so that you can present your case in an informal setting before an impartial person The arbitrator will consider the testimony provided and make a decision after the hearing You are not bound by the decision but should you choose to accept the BBB AUTO LINE decision Ford must abide by the accepted decision as well Disputes submitted to the BBB AUTO LINE program are usually decided within forty days after you file your claim with the BBB B
342. se however and may depart significantly from the norm due to variations in driving habits service practices and differences in road characteristics and climate Traction AAA BC The traction grades from highest to lowest are AA A B and C The grades represent the tire s ability to stop on wet pavement as measured under controlled conditions on specified government test surfaces of asphalt and concrete A tire marked C may have poor traction performance 220 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING The traction grade assigned to this tire is based on straight ahead braking traction tests and does not include acceleration cornering hydroplaning or peak traction characteristics Temperature A B C The temperature grades are A the highest B and C representing the tire s resistance to the generation of heat and its ability to dissipate heat when tested under controlled conditions on a specified indoor laboratory test wheel Sustained high temperature can cause the material of the tire to degenerate and reduce tire life and excessive temperature can lead to sudden tire failure The grade C corresponds to a level of performance which all passenger car tires must meet under the Federal Motor Vehicle Safety Standard No 139 Grades B and A represent higher levels of performance on the laboratory test wheel than the minimum required by law WARNING The temperature grade for this tire is established for a tire that is properly infl
343. ses multiple zones A correct zone setting will eliminate this error Refer to Compass zone adjustment 94 Compass zone adjustment 1 Determine which magnetic zone you are in for your geographic location by referring to the zone map 2 Turn ignition to the on position 3 Press and hold the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together for approximately five seconds until ZONE XX appears in the CID 4 Press and release the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together repeatedly until ZONE XX changes to the correct zone 1 15 in the CID 5 The direction will display after the buttons are released The zone is now updated Compass calibration adjustment Driver Controls 6 39 XX 6 39 NE Perform compass calibration in an open area free from steel structures and high voltage lines For optimum calibration turn off all electrical accessories heater air conditioning wipers etc and make sure all vehicle doors are shut 1 Start the vehicle 95 Driver Controls 2 To calibrate press and hold the 7 and 9 radio preset buttons together for approximately 10 seconds until CAL appears Release the buttons 3 Slowly drive the vehicle in a circle less than 3 mph 5 km h until the CAL display changes to the direction value N S E W etc It may take up to five circles to complete calibration 4 The compass is now calibrated CENTER C
344. shock always replace the cover to the power distribution box before reconnecting the battery or refilling fluid reservoirs If the battery has been disconnected and reconnected refer to the Battery section of the Maintenance and Specifications chapter The high current fuses are coded as follows ae Location Rating 80A Passenger compartment fuse ane ae 80A Passenger compartment fuse C ee Trailer tow brake controller P Mosa SSS 299 Roadside Emergencies Location Rating ee eae pump 11 30A Powertrain control module PCM relay 13 20A Left high intensity discharge HID headlamp Brake on off BOO switch Right HID headlamp Instrument panel power point Console power point Subwoofer amplifier 23 10A PCM keep alive power Canister vent A C clutch Backup relay 27 15A Fuel relay Fuel pump driver module Fuel pump Cooling fan P29 CC Od Notused o O Battery charge trailer tow Auxiliary blower motor Power liftgate Front A C blower 300 Roadside Emergencies Location Rating PCM run start Trailer tow backup lamps Fuel diode One touch integrated start diode Trailer tow park lamp Trailer tow stop turn lamp left Trailer tow stop turn lamp right Backup lamps relay 5 Not used ee Vehicle power 2
345. shut off 294 Fuses and relays 294 Changing tires 302 Temporary mobility kit 309 Wheel lug nut torque 318 Jump starting 319 Wrecker towing 325 Customer Assistance 327 Reporting safety defects U S only 333 Reporting safety defects Canada only 333 Cleaning 334 Maintenance and Specifications 343 Engine compartment 345 Engine oil 349 Battery 352 Engine coolant 354 Fuel information 361 Air filter s 376 Part numbers 378 Maintenance product specifications and capacities 379 Engine data 382 Table of Contents Accessories 386 Ford Extended Service Plan 388 Index 391 All rights reserved Reproduction by any means electronic or mechanical including photocopying recording or by any information storage and retrieval system or translation in whole or part is not permitted without written authorization from Ford Motor Company Ford may change the contents without notice and without incurring obligation Copyright 2009 Ford Motor Company 4 Introduction CONGRATULATIONS Congratulations on acquiring your new Ford Motor Company product Please take the time to get well acquainted with your vehicle by reading this handbook The more you know and understand about your vehicle the greater the safety and pleasure you will derive from driving it For more information on Ford Motor Company and its products visit the following website e In the United States www ford com e In Canada www ford ca e In Mexico www ford com mx
346. sist 0000000000 280 Advance Trac cccccccccsssceeseseees 262 Air cleaner filter 376 378 Air conditioning 68 71 74 manual heating and air conditioning system 00 68 Airbag supplemental restraint SYSTEM cecceeeeee 184 185 193 195 and child safety seats 186 description 185 193 195 disposal ssisziscsssiesesidviestesessaaeeadaa 199 driver airbag 187 194 196 indicator light 193 198 operation wee 187 194 196 passenger airbag 187 194 196 Side airbag siserccriiicredeskin 193 All Wheel Drive AWD driving off road eee 285 Ambient mood lighting 85 AMVEMD siscdesssacdessscvecsetsensdecdetescae 28 Antifreeze see Engine coolant 0 354 Anti lock brake system see Brakes siascisecieisceecssncasersre 260 Anti theft system 140 149 arming the system 00068 149 disarming a triggered SYSTE g csnseit G a2 ceca E set hes 150 Audio system see Radio 28 Automatic transaxle fluid refill capacities 379 fluid specification 0 0 379 Index Automatic transmission driving an automatic OVETCYTIVE ooo eeeeeeeeeeeees 271 273 fluid adding sessment 374 fluid checking 0 0 0 374 Selectshift SST oo 275 Auxiliary input jack Line in 37 B Battery sicisfsdssistscsissieaiesssasieeise 352 acid treating emergencies 352 jumpi
347. sistance call 1 800 665 2006 If you need to arrange roadside assistance for yourself Ford Motor Company will reimburse a reasonable amount for towing to the nearest dealership within 35 miles 56 km To obtain reimbursement information U S Ford Mercury and Lincoln vehicle customers call 1 800 241 3673 Customers will be asked to submit their original receipts Canadian customers who need to obtain reimbursement information call 1 800 665 2006 HAZARD FLASHER CONTROL The hazard flasher control is located on the instrument panel by the radio The hazard flashers will operate when the ignition is in any position or if the key is not in the ignition Press in the flasher control and all front and rear direction signals will flash Press the flasher control again to turn them off Use it when your vehicle is disabled and is creating a safety hazard for other motorists Note With extended use the flasher may run down your battery 293 Roadside Emergencies FUEL PUMP SHUT OFF In the event of a moderate to severe collision this vehicle is equipped with a fuel pump shut off feature that stops the flow of fuel to the engine Not every impact will cause a shut off Should your vehicle shut off after a collision due to this feature you may restart your vehicle by doing the following 1 Turn the ignition switch to the off position 2 Turn the ignition switch to the on position In some instances the vehicle may not restart t
348. sition for 15 seconds without cranking the engine If the service engine soon C indicator blinks eight times it means that the vehicle is not ready for I M testing if the service engine soon Cc indicator stays on solid it means that the vehicle is ready for I M testing 372 Maintenance and Specifications The OBD II system is designed to check the emission control system during normal driving A complete check may take several days If the vehicle is not ready for I M testing the following driving cycle consisting of mixed city and highway driving may be performed 15 minutes of steady driving on an expressway highway followed by 20 minutes of stop and go driving with at least four 30 second idle periods Allow the vehicle to sit for at least eight hours without starting the engine Then start the engine and complete the above driving cycle The engine must warm up to its normal operating temperature Once started do not turn off the engine until the above driving cycle is complete If the vehicle is still not ready for I M testing the above driving cycle will have to be repeated POWER STEERING FLUID EXCEPT ECOBOOST ENGINE Refer to scheduled maintenance information 1 Start the engine and let it run until it reaches normal operating temperature the engine coolant temperature gauge indicator will be near the center of the normal area between H and C 2 While the engine idles turn the steering wheel left and right sev
349. slot of the IKT near the key ring in order to remove the battery cover Note Do not wipe off any grease on the battery terminals on the back surface of the circuit board 2 Remove the old battery Note Please refer to local regulations when disposing of transmitter batteries 3 Insert the new battery Refer to the instructions inside the IKT for the correct orientation of the battery Press the battery down to ensure that the battery is fully seated in the battery housing cavity 4 Snap the battery cover back onto the key Note Replacement of the battery will not cause the IKT to become deprogrammed from your vehicle The IKT should operate normally after battery replacement Replacing lost Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs If you would like to have your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters reprogrammed because you lost one or would like to buy additional 136 Locks and Security IKTs you can either reprogram them yourself or take all IKTs to your authorized dealer for reprogramming How to reprogram your Integrated Keyhead Transmitters IKTs To program a new Integrated Keyhead Transmitter yourself refer to Programming spare keys in the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section of this chapter Note At least two IKTs are required to perform this procedure yourself lIluminated entry The interior lamps and puddle lamps if equipped illuminate when the Integrated Keyhe
350. started e Some messages will reappear after clearing or being reset if a problem or condition is still present and needs your attention e Some messages can be acknowledged and reset by pressing RESET This allows you to use the full message center functionality by clearing the message DRIVER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the driver door is not completely closed PASSENGER DOOR AJAR Displayed when the passenger door is not completely closed REAR LEFT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear left door is not completely closed 22 Instrument Cluster REAR RIGHT DOOR AJAR Displayed when the rear right door is not completely closed PARK BRAKE ENGAGED Displayed when the parking brake is set the engine is running and the vehicle is driven more than 3 mph 5 km h If the warning stays on after the parking brake is released contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible XXX MILES TO E FUEL LEVEL LOW Displayed as an early reminder of a low fuel condition CHECK FUEL FILL INLET Displayed when the fuel fill inlet may not be properly closed Refer to Easy F uel no cap fuel system in the Maintenance and Specifications chapter CHECK BRAKE SYSTEM Displayed when the braking system is not operating properly If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible LIFTGATE AJAR Displayed when the liftgate is not completely closed Press RESET to reset disp
351. stop which may increase the risk of serious injury WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision WARNING Do not leave children unreliable adults or pets unattended in your vehicle Transporting children Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their age height and weight All children are shaped differently The child height age and weight thresholds provided are recommendations or the minimum requirements of law The National Highway Traffic Safety Administration NHTSA provides education and training to ensure that all children ages 0 to 16 are properly restrained in the correct restraint system Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and your pediatrician to make sure your seat is appropriate for your child and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fitting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http www sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc c
352. t adjust a weight distributing hitch to any position where the rear bumper of the vehicle is higher than it was before attaching the trailer Doing so will defeat the function of the weight distributing hitch which may cause unpredictable handling and could result in serious personal injury Safety chains Always connect the trailer s safety chains to the frame or hook retainers of the vehicle hitch To connect the trailer s safety chains cross the chains under the trailer tongue and allow slack for turning corners 251 Tires Wheels and Loading If you use a rental trailer follow the instructions that the rental agency gives to you Do not attach safety chains to the bumper Trailer brakes Electric brakes and manual automatic or surge type trailer brakes are safe if installed properly and adjusted to the manufacturer s specifications The trailer brakes must meet local and Federal regulations WARNING Do not connect a trailer s hydraulic brake system directly to your vehicle s brake system Your vehicle may not have enough braking power and your chances of having a collision greatly increase The braking system of the tow vehicle is rated for operation at the GVWR not GCWR Trailer lamps Trailer lamps are required on most towed vehicles Make sure all running lights brake lights turn signals and hazard lights are working Do not connect trailer lamps directly to your vehicle s tail lamps This can cause da
353. t would prevent proper seat engagement 166 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Do not adjust or release the seat floor latch while vehicle is in motion Do not operate the vehicle with seats in tumbled position Always latch the vehicle seat to the floor whether the seat is occupied or empty If not latched or if the seat is tumbled the seat may cause injury during a sudden stop Second row heated seats if equipped WARNING Persons who are unable to feel pain to the skin because of advanced age chronic illness diabetes spinal cord injury medication alcohol use exhaustion or other physical conditions must exercise care when using the seat heater The seat heater may cause burns even at low temperatures especially if used for long periods of time Do not place anything on the seat that insulates against heat such as a blanket or cushion because this may cause the seat heater to overheat Do not puncture the seat with pins needles or other pointed objects because this may damage the heating element which may cause the seat heater to overheat An overheated seat may cause serious personal injury Note Do not do the following e Place heavy objects on the seat e Operate the seat heater if water or any other liquid is spilled on the seat Allow the seat to dry thoroughly To operate the heated seats e Press the button located on the rear of the floor console once to 4y activate high heat e Press twice to a
354. tatistics based on U S data Reasons given Consider Crashes are rare 36700 crashes occur every day The more events we drive the more we are exposed to rare events even for good drivers 1 in 4 of us will be seriously injured in a crash during our lifetime Tm not going far 3 of 4 fatal crashes occur within 25 miles 40 km of home Belts are We design our safety belts to enhance uncomfortable comfort If you are uncomfortable try different positions for the safety belt upper anchorage and seatback which should be as upright as possible this can improve comfort T was in a hurry Prime time for an accident Belt Minder reminds us to take a few seconds to buckle up Safety belts don t Safety belts when used properly reduce work risk of death to front seat occupants by 45 in cars and by 60 in light trucks Traffic is light Nearly 1 of 2 deaths occur in single vehicle crashes many when no other vehicles are around Belts wrinkle my Possibly but a serious crash can do much clothes more than wrinkle your clothes particularly if you are unbelted The people I m with Set the example teen deaths occur 4 times don t wear belts more often in vehicles with TWO or MORE people Children and younger brothers sisters imitate behavior they see T have an airbag Airbags offer greater protection when used with safety belts Frontal airbags are not design
355. tback WARNING Do not drive the vehicle when the third row seat is rotated backwards During a sudden stop the safety belts are not functional in this position and during a sudden J stop the third row seat can rapidly tip back to the forward j position all of which may result in serious injury SAFETY RESTRAINTS Personal Safety System The Personal Safety System provides an improved overall level of frontal crash protection to front seat occupants and is designed to help further reduce the risk of airbag related injuries The system is able to analyze different occupant conditions and crash severity before activating the appropriate safety devices to help better protect a range of occupants in a variety of frontal crash situations Your vehicle s Personal Safety System consists of e Driver and passenger dual stage airbag supplemental restraints e Front outboard safety belts with pretensioners energy management retractors first row only and safety belt usage sensors e Driver s seat position sensor e Front passenger sensing system e Passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp 171 Seating and Safety Restraints e Front crash severity sensor e Restraints Control Module RCM with impact and safing sensors e Restraint system warning light and back up tone e The electrical wiring for the airbags crash sensor s safety belt pretensioners fro
356. te Serial Number is needed to activate modify or track your satellite radio account You will need this number when communicating with SIRIUS While in Satellite Radio mode you can view this number on the radio display by pressing the SIRIUS and Preset 1 buttons at the same time 44 ACQUIRING SAT FAULT INVALID CHNL UNSUBSCRIBED NO TEXT NO TEXT Entertainment Systems Radio Display Action Required Radio requires more than two seconds to produce audio for the selected channel Internal module or system failure present Channel no longer available Subscription not available for this channel Artist information not available Song title information not available No action required This message should disappear shortly If this message does not clear within a short period of time or with an ignition key cycle your receiver may have a fault See your authorized dealer for service This previously available channel is no longer available Tune to another channel If the channel was one of your presets you may choose another channel for that preset button Contact SIRIUS at 1 888 539 7474 to subscribe to the channel or tune to another channel Artist information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly Song title information not available at this time on this channel The system is working properly 45 Entertainment Systems Radio Display
357. ter alone without engine coolant can cause engine damage from corrosion overheating or freezing e Do not use alcohol methanol brine or any engine coolants mixed with alcohol or methanol antifreeze coolant Alcohol and other liquids can cause engine damage from overheating or freezing e Do not add extra inhibitors or additives to the coolant These can be harmful and compromise the corrosion protection of the engine coolant For vehicles with overflow coolant systems with a non pressurized cap on the coolant recovery system add coolant to the coolant recovery reservoir when the engine is cool Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the FULL COLD level For all other vehicles which have a coolant degas system with a pressurized cap or if it is necessary to remove the coolant pressure relief cap on the radiator of a vehicle with an overflow system follow these steps to add engine coolant WARNING To reduce the risk of personal injury make sure the engine is cool before unscrewing the coolant pressure relief cap The cooling system is under pressure steam and hot liquid can come out forcefully when the cap is loosened slightly Add the proper mixture of coolant and water to the cooling system by following these steps 1 Before you begin turn the engine off and let it cool 2 When the engine is cool wrap a thick cloth around the coolant pressure relief cap on the coolant reservoir a translucent plastic bottle S
358. terials may affect transmission operation and result in damage to internal transmission components AIR FILTER Refer to scheduled maintenance information for the appropriate intervals for changing the air filter element When changing the air filter element use only the air filter element listed Refer to Motorcraft part numbers in this chapter WARNING To reduce the risk of vehicle damage and or personal burn injuries do not start your engine with the air cleaner removed and do not remove it while the engine is running 376 Maintenance and Specifications Changing the air filter element 3 5L V6 3 5L V6 EcoBoost 1 Release the clamps that secure the air filter housing cover 2 Carefully separate the two halves of the air filter housing 3 Remove the air filter element from the air filter housing 4 Wipe the air filter housing and cover clean to remove any dirt or debris and to ensure good sealing 5 Install a new air filter element Be careful not to crimp the filter element edges between the air filter housing and cover This could cause filter damage and allow unfiltered air to enter the engine if not properly seated 377 Maintenance and Specifications 6 Replace the air filter housing cover and secure the clamps Be sure that the air cleaner cover tabs are engaged into the slots of the air cleaner housing Note Failure to use the correct air filter element may result in severe
359. that the top of the head restraint is even with the top of your head and positioned as close as possible to the back of your head For occupants of extremely tall stature adjust the head restraint to its full up position 153 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING To minimize the risk of neck injury in the event of a crash head restraints must be installed properly Adjusting the front manual seat if equipped WARNING Never adjust the driver s seat or seatback when the vehicle is moving WARNING Always drive and ride with your seatback upright and the lap belt snug and low across the hips Lift handle to move seat forward or backward Pull lever up to adjust seatback WARNING Before returning the seatback to its original position make sure that cargo or any objects are not trapped behind the seatback After returning the seatback to its original position pull on the seatback to ensure that it has fully latched An unlatched seat may become dangerous in the event of a sudden stop or collision 154 Seating and Safety Restraints Using the manual lumbar support if equipped The lumbar control is located on the side of the seat cushion 7 Turn to adjust lumbar support Rotate the lumbar forward to adjust O h firmness Rotate the lumbar rearward to J adjust softness Folding down the front passenger seatback The front passenger seatback can be folded to a horizontal position to make room for
360. the doors along the side window opening The Safety Canopy system is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the side crash sensor to close an electrical circuit that initiates Safety Canopy inflation or when a certain likelihood of a rollover event is detected by the rollover sensor The Safety Canopy is mounted to roof side rail sheet metal behind the headliner above each row of seats In certain lateral collisions or rollover events the Safety Canopy system will be activated regardless of which seats are occupied The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate between the side window area and occupants to further enhance protection provided in side impact collisions and rollover events The fact that the Safety Canopy did not activate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation The Safety Canopy is designed to inflate in certain side impact collisions or rollover events not in rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficient lateral deceleration or rollover CUG 197 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING If the Safety Canopy system has deployed the Safety Canopy will not function again unless replaced The Safety Canopy system including the A B C and D pillar trim and headliner must be inspected and serviced by
361. the TPMS sensor for damage WARNING The use of tire sealants may damage your Tire Pressure Monitoring System and should only be used if it is supplied with your vehicle as part of the original temporary mobility kit WARNING Refer to Tire pressure monitoring system TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter for important information If the tire pressure monitor sensor becomes damaged it will no longer function Dissimilar spare tire wheel information WARNING Failure to follow these guidelines could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control injury or death If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel then it is intended for temporary use only This means that if you need to use it you should 302 Roadside Emergencies replace it as soon as possible with a road tire wheel that is the same size and type as the road tires and wheels that were originally provided by Ford If the dissimilar spare tire or wheel is damaged it should be replaced rather than repaired A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels and can be one of three types 1 T type mini spare This spare tire begins with the letter T for tire size and may have Temporary Use Only molded in the sidewall 2 Full size dissimilar spare with label on wheel This spare tire has a label on the wheel that states THIS TIRE AND WHEEL FO
362. the air temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This control also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged 10 ay Driver heated seat if equipped Press to control the driver heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 11 Q Power Press to activate deactivate the climate control system When the system is off outside air is prevented from entering the vehicle The climate status in the touchscreen will also be turned off 12 QW Defrost Distributes outside air through the windshield defroster vents and de mister vents Can be used to clear the windshield of fog and thin ice The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging Press this button again to return to the previous air flow selection 75 Climate Controls TOUCHSCREEN FUNCTIONS CLIMATE Front Zone Driver ay Oo Passenger oor I E eor JIC JC JCA Temperature Fan Speed Temperature CV JC IC ICV amp Emax ac 6 DuaL Temperature conversion To switch between Fahrenheit and Celsius refer to Message center in the Driver Controls chapter Front Zone Press to activate the touchscreen controls for the front climate system Temperature Press the up and down arrows on the left side of the screen to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the driver side of the vehicle This con
363. the outboard bolster of the driver and front passenger seatbacks e A special seat cover designed to allow airbag deployment e The same warning light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags e Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors one on each side of the vehicle e Crash sensors located on the C pillars one sensor on each pillar on each side of the vehicle Side airbags in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision The side airbags are fitted on the outboard side of the seatbacks of the front seats In certain lateral collisions the airbag on the side affected by the collision will be inflated The airbag was designed to inflate between the door panel and occupant to further enhance the protection provided occupants in side impact collisions The airbag SRS is designed to activate when the vehicle sustains lateral deceleration sufficient to cause the sensors to close an electrical circuit that initiates airbag inflation 194 Seating and Safety Restraints The fact that the airbags did not inflate in a collision does not mean that something is wrong with the system Rather it means the forces were not of the type sufficient to cause activation Side airbags are designed to inflate in side impact collisions not roll over rear impact frontal or near frontal collisions unless the collision causes sufficie
364. the seat back reclined too far can take off weight from the seat cushion and affect the decision of the passenger sensing system resulting in serious injury or death in a crash Always sit upright against your seatback with your feet on the floor WARNING To reduce the risk of possible serious injury Do not hang objects off seat back or stow objects in the seatback map pocket if equipped when a child is in the front passenger seat Do not place objects underneath the front passenger seat or between the seat and the center console if equipped Check the passenger airbag off or pass airbag off indicator lamp for proper airbag status Refer to Front passenger sensing system in the Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS section for additional details Failure to follow these instructions may interfere with the front passenger seat sensing system 156 Seating and Safety Restraints Move the front of the control up or down to tilt the seat cushion Move the rear of the control up or down to raise or lower the seat cushion Move the control in the directions shown to move the seat forward or backward Press the control to recline the seatback forward or rearward ics yuy UUU gt 157 Seating and Safety Restraints Using the power lumbar support if equipped The power lumbar control is located on the outboard side of the seat Press the forward side of the control to adjust firmness Press
365. the tire and is not visible unless the tire is removed The pressure sensor is located opposite 180 degrees from the valve stem Care must be taken when changing the tire to avoid damaging the sensor It is recommended that you always have your tires serviced by an authorized dealer The tire pressure should be checked periodically at least monthly using an accurate tire gauge refer to Inflating your tires in this chapter 237 Tires Wheels and Loading Understanding your Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS The Tire Pressure Monitoring System measures pressure in your four road tires and sends the tire pressure readings to your vehicle The Low Tire Pressure Warning Lamp will turn ON if the tire pressure is significantly low Once the light is illuminated your tires are under inflated and need to be inflated to the manufacturer s recommended tire pressure Even if the light turns ON and a short time later turns OFF your tire pressure still needs to be checked Visit www checkmytires org for additional information When your temporary spare tire is installed When one of your road tires needs to be replaced with the temporary spare the TPMS system will continue to identify an issue to remind you that the damaged road wheel tire needs to be repaired and put back on your vehicle To restore the full functionality of the Tire Pressure Monitoring System have the damaged road wheel tire repaired and remounted on your v
366. the top gears occurs Unnecessary shifting of this type could result in reduced fuel economy Warming up a vehicle on cold mornings is not required and may reduce fuel economy Resting your foot on the brake pedal while driving may reduce fuel economy Combine errands and minimize stop and go driving Maintenance Keep tires properly inflated and use only recommended size Operating a vehicle with the wheels out of alignment will reduce fuel economy Use recommended engine oil Refer to Maintenance product specifications and capacities in this chapter Perform all regularly scheduled maintenance items Follow the recommended maintenance schedule and owner maintenance checks found in scheduled maintenance information Conditions Heavily loading a vehicle or towing a trailer may reduce fuel economy at any speed 369 Maintenance and Specifications e Carrying unnecessary weight may reduce fuel economy approximately 1 mpg 0 4 km L is lost for every 400 lb 180 kg of weight carried e Adding certain accessories to your vehicle for example bug deflectors rollbars light bars running boards ski racks may reduce fuel economy e Using fuel blended with alcohol may lower fuel economy e Fuel economy may decrease with lower temperatures during the first 8 10 miles 12 16 km of driving e Driving on flat terrain offers improved fuel economy as compared to driving on hilly terrain e Transmissions give their best fuel econ
367. the vehicle s underbody structure 250 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the certification label WARNING Towing trailers beyond the maximum recommended gross trailer weight exceeds the limit of the vehicle and could result in engine damage transmission damage structural damage loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover and personal injury Preparing to tow Use the proper equipment for towing a trailer and make sure it is properly attached to your vehicle Contact your authorized dealer or a reliable trailer dealer as soon as possible if you require assistance Hitches Do not use hitches that clamp onto the vehicle bumper Use a load carrying hitch You must distribute the load in your trailer so that 10 15 of the total weight of the trailer is on the tongue Weight distributing hitch When hooking up a trailer using a load equalizing hitch always use the following procedure 1 Park the unloaded vehicle on a level surface With the ignition on and all doors closed allow the vehicle to stand for several minutes so that it can level 2 Measure the height of a reference point on the front and rear bumpers at the center of the vehicle 3 Attach the trailer to the vehicle and adjust the hitch equalizers so that the front bumper height is within 12 13 mm of the reference point After proper adjustment the rear bumper should be no higher than in Step 2 WARNING Do no
368. ther information on selecting a satellite radio category SATELLITE RADIO MENU Press MENU when satellite radio mode is active to access Press OK to enter into the satellite radio menu Press A SEEK v to cycle through the following options e CATEGORY MENU Press OK to enter category mode Press A SEEK v to scroll through the list of available SIRIUS channel Categories Pop Rock News etc Press OK when the desired category appears in the display After a category is selected press A SEEK v to search for that specific category of channels only i e ROCK You may also select CATEGORY ALL to seek all available SIRIUS categories and channels Press OK to close and return to the main menu e SONG SEEK MENU Press OK to enter song seek menu Press A SEEK v to scroll through the following options a SAVE THIS SONG Press OK to save the currently playing song s title in the system s memory If you try to save something other than a song CANT SAVE will appear in the display When the chosen song is playing on any satellite radio channel the system will alert you with an audible prompt Press OK while SONG ALERT is in the display and the system will take you to the channel playing the desired song You can save up to 20 song titles If you attempt to save more than 20 34 MENU Entertainment Systems titles the display will read REPLACE SONG Press OK to access the saved titles and press A SEEK vy to cycle th
369. tion is used to contact customers if a tire defect requires a recall Tire replacement requirements Your vehicle is equipped with tires designed to provide a safe ride and handling capability WARNING Only use replacement tires and wheels that are the same size load index speed rating and type such as P metric versus LT metric or all season versus all terrain as those originally provided by Ford The recommended tire and wheel size may be found on either the Safety Compliance Certification Label or the Tire Label which is located on the B Pillar or edge of the driver s door If this information is not found on these labels then you should contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Use of any tire or wheel not recommended by Ford can affect the safety and performance of your vehicle which could result in an increased risk of loss of vehicle control vehicle rollover personal injury and death Additionally the use of non recommended tires and wheels could cause steering suspension axle or transfer case power transfer unit failure If you have questions regarding tire replacement contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible 226 Tires Wheels and Loading WARNING When mounting replacement tires and wheels you should not exceed the maximum pressure indicated on the sidewall of the tire to set the beads without additional precautions listed below If the beads do not seat at the maximum pressure indicated re lubr
370. tivate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C G7 defrost and yd floor defrost 4 Passenger temperature Press to activate separate passenger temperature control and increase decrease the air temperature on the passenger side of the vehicle 74 Climate Controls 5 a Passenger heated seat if equipped Press to control the passenger heated seat Refer to Heated seats in the Seating and Safety Restraints chapter for more information 6 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle when used with A C and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except Y defrost Recirculation may turn off automatically in all airflow selections except MAX A C T Ei Fan speed control Press to decrease increase the fan speed 8 AUTO Press to engage full automatic operation Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 9 Driver temperature Press to increase decrease
371. to evenly distribute the load as well as maintain a low center of gravity Loaded vehicles with higher centers of gravity may handle differently than unloaded vehicles Extra precautions such as slower speeds and increased stopping distance should be taken when driving a heavily loaded vehicle When the rail system is loaded check the tightness of the load before driving and at each fuel stop 125 Locks and Security KEYS Your vehicle is equipped with two Integrated Keyhead Transmitters CKTs The IKT functions as both a programmed ignition key that operates all the locks and starts the vehicle and the transmitter portion functions as the remote entry transmitter Vehicles with a power liftgate will have a four button IKT GN GN while vehicles without a power liftgate will have a three button IKT V Y O Y a CS Your IKTs are programmed to your vehicle using a non programmed key will not permit your vehicle to start If you lose your authorized dealer supplied IKTs replacement IKTs are available through your authorized dealer Standard SecuriLock keys without remote entry transmitter functionality can also be purchased from your authorized dealer if desired Always carry a spare key with you in case of an emergency For more information regarding programming replacement IKTs refer to the SecuriLock passive anti theft system section later in this chapter Note Your vehicle s IKTs were oe issued w
372. to the transmission and cause internal transmission damage Once through the water always dry the brakes by moving your vehicle slowly while applying light pressure on the brake pedal Wet brakes do not stop the vehicle as quickly as dry brakes 291 Roadside Emergencies ROADSIDE ASSISTANCE Getting roadside assistance To fully assist you should you have a vehicle concern Ford Motor Company offers a complimentary roadside assistance program This program is separate from the New Vehicle Limited Warranty The service is available e 24 hours seven days a week e for the coverage period listed on the Roadside Assistance Card included in your Owner Guide portfolio Roadside assistance will cover e a flat tire change with a good spare except vehicles that have been supplied with a tire inflation kit e battery jump start e lock out assistance key replacement cost is the customer s responsibility fuel delivery Independent Service Contractors if not prohibited by state local or municipal law shall deliver up to 2 0 gallons 7 5L of gasoline or 5 0 gallons 18 9L of diesel fuel to a disabled vehicle Fuel delivery service is limited to two no charge occurrences within a 12 month period e winch out available within 100 feet 80 5 meters of a paved or county maintained road no recoveries e towing Ford Mercury Lincoln eligible vehicle towed to an authorized dealer within 35 miles 56 km of the disableme
373. to the same playing media over the front and rear speakers When the DVD system is on and in single play the same source will play through all vehicle speakers 57 Entertainment Systems Dual Play Dual play is when the rear seat passengers choose to listen to a different playing media than the front seat passengers With the DVD and rear seat controls turned on the rear seat passengers may choose to listen to Monitor A Monitor B AM FM1 FM2 SR1 SR2 SR3 satellite radio if equipped Disc Jukebox if equipped or SYNC if equipped While the front speakers play the chosen selection for the front audio system the rear seat passengers can listen to another over the headphones The headphone icon will appear in the display indicating that the headphones are active You can access dual play mode in any of the following ways e If your vehicle is equipped with a touchscreen system a Ensure that the vehicle ignition is turned on Inserting a DVD into the system will automatically activate dual play mode b Press the RADIO or MEDIA hard button Select the Rear Zone tab on the touchscreen and select On for the headphones and Enabled for the rear controls To return to single zone select Off for the headphones If your vehicle is equipped with a non touchscreen system a Press the headphone speaker AQ t button on the remote control or DVD system Press again on both headrest systems to return to singl
374. ton e or pressing the panic button on the remote entry transmitter The feature will continue to operate until the vehicle runs out of power 198 Seating and Safety Restraints Disposal of airbags and airbag equipped vehicles including pretensioners Contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible Airbags MUST BE disposed of by qualified personnel SAFETY RESTRAINTS FOR CHILDREN See the following sections for directions on how to properly use safety restraints for children Also see Airbag supplemental restraint system SRS in this chapter for special instructions about using airbags Important child restraint precautions WARNING Always make sure your child is secured properly in a device that is appropriate for their height age and weight Child safety restraints must be purchased separately from the vehicle Failure to follow these instructions and guidelines may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child WARNING All children are shaped differently The Recommendations for Safety Restraints are based on probable child height age and weight thresholds from NHTSA and other safety organizations or are the minimum requirements of law Ford recommends checking with a NHTSA Certified Child Passenger Safety Technician CPST and consult your pediatrician to make sure your child seat is appropriate for your child and is compatible with and properly installed in the vehicle To locate a child seat fi
375. ton on the DVD system and then press Play to begin to play the disc To play an auxiliary source through the DVD system The DVD system can be used to connect and play auxiliary electronic devices game systems personal camcorders video cassette recorders etc and to connect to and access certain files through your USB port 1 On the front of each monitor located behind the left trim cover panel is the headphone input jack 5 This headphone will listen to C10 m the media selected through that PE nn monitor When you need to make any adjustments to the media volume etc ensure that the monitor A source is highlighted 48 Entertainment Systems e USB port 4 To access ensure that the monitor is already selected as the media source Monitor A or Monitor B Then plug in your flash thumb drive and it will automatically begin to play The system will try to play whatever file it comes to first slideshow of pictures etc If it is a supported file type it will play If it is not supported CAN T PLAY will appear in the monitor Scroll through the contents on the rest of the drive using the arrow keys on the DVD headrest or remote Press SEL to confirm a selection Each headrest system automatically recognizes the audio and video files that are stored and provides a menu from which to choose the desired selection e Wired headphone jack 5 Use for dual play mode 2 Connect a
376. touch operation press the control a second time To open the multi panel Vista Roof Press and release the SLIDE control the roof will open automatically Press the switch again to stop the roof WARNING When closing the multi panel Vista Roof you should verify that it is free of obstructions and ensure that children and or pets are not in the proximity of the roof opening To close the multi panel Vista Roof Pull and release the SLIDE control the roof will close automatically Press the switch again to stop the roof 108 Driver Controls Bounce back When an obstacle has been detected in the roof opening as the roof is closing the roof will automatically open and stop at a prescribed position Bounce back override To override bounce back function pull and hold the SLIDE switch within two seconds of a bounce back event The closing force will begin to increase each time the roof is closed for the first three closing cycles with bounce back active For example Bounce back can be used to overcome the resistance of ice on the roof or seals To vent the multi panel Vista Roof Press and release the TILT control the roof will move to the vent position automatically from any roof position Press the switch again to stop the roof Pull and hold the TILT control to close the roof The multi panel Vista Roof has a built in sliding shade that can be manually opened or closed when the glass panel is shut
377. traints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts While you are fastened in the safety belt the combination lap shoulder belt adjusts to your movement However if you brake hard turn hard or if your vehicle receives an impact of 5 mph 8 km h or more the safety belt will become locked and help reduce your forward movement Energy management feature front outboard e This vehicle has a safety belt system with an energy management feature at the front seats to help further reduce the risk of injury in the event of a head on collision e The energy management feature has a retractor assembly that is designed to extend the safety belt webbing in a controlled manner This helps reduce the belt force acting on the user s chest 176 Seating and Safety Restraints WARNING Failure to inspect and replace if necessary the belt and retractor assembly after an accident could increase the risk of injury in a collision All safety restraints in the vehicle are combination lap and shoulder belts All of the passenger combination lap and shoulder belts have three types of locking modes described below Vehicle sensitive mode This is the normal retractor mode which allows free shoulder belt length adjustment to your movements and locking in response to vehicle movement For example if the driver brakes suddenly or turns a corner sharply or the vehicle receives an impact of approximately 5 mph 8 km h or more the combinati
378. transmitter by other than an authorized service facility could void authorization to use the equipment MANUAL LIFTGATE The liftgate area is only intended for cargo not passengers You can open and close the liftgate from outside the vehicle The liftgate cannot be opened from the cargo area Note In the event of a loss of power the latch can be accessed and released from the inside using the access panel on the liftgate trim 119 Driver Controls To open the liftgate press the control button located in the top of the liftgate pull cup handle to unlatch the liftgate then pull on the outside handle to access the cargo area e Do not open the liftgate in a garage or other enclosed area with a low ceiling If the liftgate is opened the liftgate could be damaged against a low ceiling e Do not leave the liftgate open while driving Doing so could cause serious damage to the liftgate and its components as well as allowing carbon monoxide to enter the vehicle WARNING Make sure that the liftgate door is closed to prevent exhaust fumes from being drawn into the vehicle This will also prevent passengers and cargo from falling out If you must drive with the liftgate door open keep the vents open so outside air comes into the vehicle POWER LIFTGATE IF EQUIPPED You can power open or close the liftgate with the following controls e instrument panel control button e integrated keyhead transmitter button e o
379. trol also adjusts the passenger side temperature when dual zone operation is disengaged Press the up and down arrows on the right side of the screen to increase decrease the airflow temperature for the passenger side of the vehicle e 7i Distributes air through the instrument panel vents e lt H Distributes air through the instrument panel vents floor vents rear seat floor vents and de mister vents e Distributes air through the floor vents rear seat floor vents e Distributes air through the windshield defroster vents de mister vents floor vents and rear seat floor vents The system will automatically provide outside air to reduce window fogging To return to full automatic control press AUTO on the main bezel Fan Speed Press to decrease increase the fan speed Dual Press to activate deactivate separate driver and passenger temperature controls 76 Climate Controls Max A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press MAX A C again for normal operation CLIMATE Rear Zone CA Temperature Fan Speed Rear Zone Power Press to activate deactivate the rear climate system Rear Zone Press to activate the touchscreen controls for the rear climate system Rear Control Press t
380. ts 4 A C Press to activate deactivate air conditioning Use with recirculated air to improve cooling performance and efficiency A C engages automatically in MAX A C G7 defrost and GA floor defrost 5 AUTO Press to engage automatic temperature control Select the desired temperature using the temperature control The system will automatically determine fan speed airflow location A C on or off and outside or recirculated air to heat or cool the vehicle to reach the desired temperature 6 MAX A C Distributes recirculated air through the instrument panel vents to cool the vehicle This re cooling of the interior air is more economical and efficient Recirculated air may also help reduce undesirable odors from entering the vehicle Press the MAX A C button again for normal A C operation 7 Recirculated air Press to activate deactivate air recirculation in the vehicle Recirculated air may reduce the amount of time needed to cool down the interior of the vehicle and may also help reduce undesired odors from reaching the interior of the vehicle Recirculated air engages automatically when MAX A C is selected or can be engaged manually in any airflow mode except 7 defrost When the ignition switch is turned off and back on the climate system will return to the recirculated air mode only if the A C button LED is illuminated and the air distribution selection is either panel or 4 panel floor Recirculation may turn of
381. tting station and CPST contact the NHTSA toll free at 1 888 327 4236 or on the internet at http www nhtsa dot gov In Canada check with your local St John Ambulance office for referral to a CPST or for further information contact your provincial ministry of transportation your local St John Ambulance office at http Awww sfa ca or Transport Canada at 1 800 333 0371 http www tc gc ca Failure to properly restrain children in safety seats made especially for their height age and weight may result in an increased risk of serious injury or death to your child 199 Seating and Safety Restraints Recommendations for Safety Restraints for Children Recommended Ooo Child size height weight or age restraint type children Children weighing 40 lb 18 kg or less generally age four or younger Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a child safety seat generally children who are less than 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall are greater than age four 4 and less than age twelve 12 and between 40 Ib 18 kg and 80 lb 86 kg and upward to 100 lb 45 kg if recommended by your child restraint manufacturer Children who have outgrown or no longer properly fit in a belt positioning booster seat generally children who are at least 4 feet 9 inches 1 45 meters tall or greater than 80 Ib 86 kg or 100 Ib 45 kg if recommended by child restraint manufacturer Use a child safety seat someti
382. tures Anti lock braking RSC and ESC will continue to function during the cool down period The Engine Traction Control and Brake Traction Control system may be deactivated in certain situations See the Switching off Traction Control section following Electronic Stability Control ESC Electronic Stability Control ESC may enhance your vehicle s directional stability during adverse maneuvers for example when cornering severely or avoiding objects in the roadway ESC operates by applying brakes to one or more of the wheels individually and if necessary reducing engine power if the system detects that the vehicle is about to skid or slide laterally 264 Driving During Electronic Stability Control events the sliding car icon f in the instrument cluster will flash Certain adverse driving maneuvers may activate the Electronic Stability Control system which include but are not limited to e Taking a turn too fast e Maneuvering quickly to avoid an accident pedestrian or obstacle e Driving over a patch of ice or other slippery surfaces e Changing lanes on a snow rutted road e Entering a snow free road from a snow covered side street or vice versa e Entering a paved road from a gravel road or vice versa e Cornering while towing a heavily loaded trailer refer to Trailer towing in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter Roll Stability Control RSC Roll Stability Control RSC may help to maintain roll st
383. ty Canopy system included recommended testing procedures that were developed by a group of automotive safety experts known as the Side Airbag Technical Working Group These recommended testing procedures help reduce the risk of injuries related to the deployment of side airbags including the Safety Canopy The Safety Canopy system consists of the following e An inflatable nylon curtain with a gas generator concealed behind the headliner and above the doors one on each side of vehicle e A headliner designed to flex open above the side doors to allow Safety Canopy deployment e The same readiness airbag light electronic control and diagnostic unit as used for the front airbags 196 Seating and Safety Restraints e Two crash sensors mounted in the front doors one on each side of the vehicle e Two crash sensors located at the C pillar behind the rear doors one on each side of the vehicle e Rollover sensor in the restraints control module RCM The Safety Canopy system in combination with safety belts can help reduce the risk of severe injuries in the event of a significant side impact collision or rollover event Children 12 years old and under should always be properly restrained in the second or third row seats The Safety Canopy will not interfere with children restrained using a properly installed child or booster seat because it is designed to inflate downward from the headliner above
384. uel ethanol E85 diesel methanol leaded fuel or any other fuel The use of leaded fuel is prohibited by law and could damage your vehicle Your vehicle was not designed to use fuel or fuel additives with metallic compounds including manganese based additives Note Use of any fuel other than those recommended may cause powertrain damage a loss of vehicle performance and repairs may not be covered under warranty Octane recommendations 3 5L V6 engine Your vehicle will run normally on 87 octane regular fuel Premium fuel will provide improved performance 3 5L V6 EcoBoost engine Your vehicle is designed to run on regular fuel with an octane rating of 87 or higher For best overall performance premium fuel with an octane 364 Maintenance and Specifications rating of 91 or higher is recommended The performance gained by using premium fuel will be most noticeable in hot weather or in severe duty applications such as towing a trailer Some stations offer fuels posted as Regular with an octane rating below 87 particularly in high altitude areas Fuels with octane levels below 87 are not recommended for either engine Do not be concerned if your engine sometimes knocks lightly However if it knocks heavily while you are using fuel with the recommended octane rating see your authorized dealer to prevent any engine damage Fuel quality If you are experiencing starting rough idle or hesitation driveability problems tr
385. ument Cluster TIRE PRESSURE SENSOR FAULT Displayed when a tire pressure sensor is malfunctioning or your spare tire is in use For more information on how the system operates under these conditions refer to Tire Pressure Monitoring System TPMS in the Tires Wheels and Loading chapter If the warning stays on or continues to come on contact your authorized dealer as soon as possible POWER STEERING ASSIST FAULT The power steering system has disabled power steering assist due to a system error service is required SERVICE POWER STEERING The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service SERVICE POWER STEERING NOW The power steering system has detected a condition that requires service immediately OIL LIFE CHANGE SOON Displayed when the engine oil life remaining is 10 or less OIL CHANGE REQUIRED Displayed when the oil life left reaches 0 INTKEY COULD NOT PROGRAM Displayed when an attempt is made to program a fifth integrated key to the remote key entry system For more information on integrated key refer to the Locks and Security chapter in this manual TRAILER SWAY REDUCE SPEED if equipped Displayed when the trailer sway control has detected trailer sway For more information refer to the Driving chapter for more information ACTIVE PARK FAULT if equipped Displayed when a fault has occurred with the active park assist system Refer to Active park assist in the D
386. upant can still activate the Belt Minder feature Note If you are using MyKey the Belt Minder warning will not expire Refer to MyKey in the Locks and security chapter The driver s and front The Belt Minder feature will not passenger s safety belts are activate buckled before the ignition switch is turned to the on position or less than 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the ignition switch has been turned to on The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt is not the safety belt warning light buckled when the vehicle has illuminates and the warning chime reached at least 3 mph sounds for six seconds every 5 km h and 1 2 minutes have 30 seconds repeating for elapsed since the ignition approximately five minutes or until switch has been turned to on the safety belts are buckled The driver s or front The Belt Minder feature is activated passenger s safety belt becomes the safety belt warning light unbuckled for approximately illuminates and the warning chime one minute while the vehicle is sounds for six seconds every traveling at least 3 mph 30 seconds repeating for 5 km h and more than approximately five minutes or until 1 2 minutes have elapsed since the safety belts are buckled the ignition switch has been turned to on 181 Seating and Safety Restraints The following are reasons most often given for not wearing safety belts All s
387. ur vehicle has been operated for an extended period at high speeds in city traffic during hot weather or pulling a trailer the vehicle should be turned off for about 30 minutes to allow fluid to cool before checking 1 Drive the vehicle 20 miles 80 km or until it reaches normal operating temperature 2 Park the vehicle on a level surface and engage the parking brake 3 With the parking brake engaged and your foot on the brake pedal start the engine and move the gearshift lever through all of the gear ranges Allow sufficient time for each gear to engage 4 Latch the gearshift lever in P Park and leave the engine running 5 Remove the dipstick wiping it clean with a clean dry lint free rag If necessary refer to Identifying components in the engine compartment in this chapter for the location of the dipstick For vehicles with the EcoBoost engine move the air filter assembly aside to access the transmission dipstick See Changing the air filter element for more information 374 Ce Maintenance and Specifications 6 Install the dipstick making sure it is fully seated in the filler tube 7 Remove the dipstick and inspect the fluid level The fluid should be in the designated areas for normal operating temperature Low fluid level Do not drive the vehicle if the fluid level is at the bottom of the dipstick Correct fluid level The transmission fluid should be checked at normal operating temperature 1
388. ur vehicle may be equipped with a dissimilar spare tire wheel A dissimilar spare tire wheel is defined as a spare tire and or wheel that is different in brand size or appearance from the road tires and wheels If you have a dissimilar spare tire wheel it is intended for temporary use only and should not be used in a tire rotation Note After having your tires rotated inflation pressure must be checked and adjusted to the vehicle requirements INFORMATION CONTAINED ON THE TIRE SIDEWALL Both U S and Canada Federal regulations require tire manufacturers to place standardized information on the sidewall of all tires This information identifies and describes the fundamental characteristics of the tire and also provides a U S DOT Tire Identification Number for safety standard certification and in case of a recall 230 Tires Wheels and Loading Information on P type tires P215 65R15 95H is an example of a tire size load index and speed rating The definitions of these items are listed below Note that the tire size load index and speed rating for your vehicle may be different from this example 1 P Indicates a tire designated by the Tire and Rim Association T amp RA that may be used for service on cars SUVs minivans and light trucks Note If your tire size does not begin with a letter this may mean it is designated by either ETRTO European Tire and Rim Technical Organization or JATMA Japan Tire Manufactur
389. urer s instructions The importance of shoulder belts Using a booster without a shoulder belt increases the risk of a child s head hitting a hard surface in a collision For this reason you should never use a booster seat with a lap belt only It is generally best to use a booster seat with lap shoulder belts in the back seat Move a child to a different seating location if the shoulder belt does not stay positioned on the shoulder during use Follow all instructions provided by the manufacturer of the booster seat WARNING Never place or allow a child to place the shoulder belt under a child s arm or behind the back because it reduces the protection for the upper part of the body and may increase the risk of injury or death in a collision 216 Seating and Safety Restraints Child restraint and safety belt maintenance Inspect the vehicle safety belts and child safety seat systems periodically to make sure they work properly and are not damaged Inspect the vehicle and child seat safety belts to make sure there are no nicks tears or cuts Replace if necessary All vehicle safety belt assemblies including retractors buckles front safety belt buckle assemblies buckle support assemblies slide bar if equipped shoulder belt height adjusters if equipped shoulder belt guide on seatback if equipped child safety seat LATCH and tether anchors and attaching hardware should be inspected after a collision Refer to the chil
390. uthorized dealer in order to aid in troubleshooting the problem Unlocking the doors two stage unlock f 1 Press aa and release to unlock the driver s door Note The interior lamps and parking lamps will illuminate 133 Locks and Security 2 Press and release again within three seconds to unlock all the doors The remote entry system activates the illuminated entry feature this feature turns on the lamps for 25 seconds or until the ignition is turned to the on position The battery saver feature will turn off the lamps 10 minutes after the ignition is turned to the off position Two stage unlocking may be disabled or re enabled by simultaneously pressing the M and controls on the IKT for four seconds disabling two stage unlock allows all vehicle doors to unlock simultaneously The parking lamps will flash twice to indicate that two stage unlock was enabled or disabled Locking the doors amp 1 Press al and release to lock all the doors The parking lamps will illuminate 2 Press and release again within three seconds to confirm that all the doors are closed Note The doors will lock again the horn will chirp and the turn lamps will illuminate if all the doors and liftgate are closed Note If any door or the liftgate is not closed the horn will chirp twice and the lamps will not flash Opening the power liftgate if equipped 5 Press 5 twice within three seconds to fully unlatch and open the liftgate
391. utomotive fuels can cause serious injury or death if misused or mishandled WARNING Gasoline may contain benzene which is a cancer causing agent Observe the following guidelines when handling automotive fuel e Extinguish all smoking materials and any open flames before refueling your vehicle e Always turn off the vehicle before refueling e Automotive fuels can be harmful or fatal if swallowed Fuel such as gasoline is highly toxic and if swallowed can cause death or permanent injury If fuel is swallowed call a physician immediately even if no symptoms are immediately apparent The toxic effects of fuel may not be visible for hours e Avoid inhaling fuel vapors Inhaling too much fuel vapor of any kind can lead to eye and respiratory tract irritation In severe cases excessive or prolonged breathing of fuel vapor can cause serious illness and permanent injury 361 Maintenance and Specifications e Avoid getting fuel liquid in your eyes If fuel is splashed in the eyes remove contact lenses if worn flush with water for 15 minutes and seek medical attention Failure to seek proper medical attention could lead to permanent injury e Fuels can also be harmful if absorbed through the skin If fuel is splashed on the skin and or clothing promptly remove contaminated clothing and wash skin thoroughly with soap and water Repeated or prolonged skin contact with fuel liquid or vapor causes skin irritation e Be particular
392. utside liftgate control button e control button in the rear cargo area Note The liftgate movement direction can be reversed with a second press of the instrument panel or the rear cargo area control button or a second double press of the integrated keyhead transmitter button Opening and Closing the power liftgate WARNING Make sure all persons are clear of the power liftgate area before using the power liftgate control WARNING Keep keys out of reach of children Do not allow children to play near an open or moving power liftgate 120 Driver Controls The liftgate will only operate with the vehicle in P Park When the liftgate is being power closed a chime will sound three times as the liftgate begins to power close A single chime indicates a problem with the close request caused by e the ignition is in on and the transmission is not in Park e or the battery voltage is below the minimum operating voltage e or the vehicle speed is at or above 3 mph 5 km h If the liftgate reverses and starts to close after a open request a fast continuous chime indicates excessive load on the gate or a possible strut failure If any excessive load is removed and you still have a faster chime have the system serviced immediately by your authorized dealer Do not attempt to manually force the liftgate to travel faster than the power system will permit This will activate the obstacle detection feature Note Cycling the ignition prio
393. ve The normal driving position for the best fuel economy Transmission operates in gears one through six 273 Driving M Manual with Grade Assist Initially moving the lever to M Manual activates grade assist and cancels Overdrive Grade Assist e Provides additional grade engine braking and extends lower gear operation on uphill climbs for hilly terrain or mountainous areas e Provides additional engine braking through the automatic transmission shift strategy which reacts to vehicle inputs vehicle acceleration accelerator pedal brake pedal and vehicle speed e Allows the transmission to select gears that will provide the desired engine braking based on the vehicle inputs mentioned above This will increase engine RPM during engine braking e The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster is illuminated L2 Grade assist is designed to aid the oo driver with optimal gear selection in hilly terrain or mountainous areas but is not intended for normal operation It is recommended that you return to O D overdrive mode on flat terrain to provide the best fuel economy and transmission function To return to normal D Drive position with O D move the shift lever back from M Manual to D Drive e The grade assist lamp in the instrument cluster will not be illuminated e The transmission will operate in gears one through six 274 Driving Understanding your SelectShift Automatic Transmission S
394. ver the DVD system and selecting OFF will turn off control for the rear seat passengers When accessing radio or satellite radio media sources in dual play mode press SEL on the DVD headrest A system when the desired selection appears in the screen and then press lt q Pl to reverse advance through any saved presets When accessing SYNC in dual play mode press SEL on DVD SYNC LINE IN headrest monitor A when SYNC usB appears on the screen then press A y to scroll through SYNC media options of USB Bluetooth Line in auxiliary audio mode and Exit Supported USB devices To help ensure compatibility the DVD system has been tested with most brands of flash thumb devices and most common personal audio players Setup menu options To access the set up menu first select the desired headrest monitor system by pressing MON A or MON B Then press SETUP on the remote control Note This is the only way to gain access to the Setup menu options You cannot access from the monitor headrest controls Note On any of the following screens press d al to access the previous next menu level 59 Entertainment Systems Aspect ratio TV display type This screen allows you to select the viewing size and shape of the video displayed on the LCD screen This is disc dependent feature To access si Quality 1 Press SETUP on the remote to access the menu options 2 Press A gt to highlight the monit
395. ver while pulling the gearshift lever out of the P Park position and into the N Neutral position 6 Install the trim panel 2 and chrome ring 1 in reverse order 7 Apply brake pedal start the vehicle and release the parking brake See your authorized dealer as soon as possible if this procedure is used WARNING Do not drive your vehicle until you verify that the brakelamps are working WARNING Always set the parking brake fully and make sure the gearshift is latched in P Park Turn the ignition to the off position and remove the key whenever you leave your vehicle WARNING If the parking brake is fully released but the brake warning lamp remains illuminated the brakes may not be working properly See your authorized dealer AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION OPERATION Automatic Transmission Adaptive Learning Your transmission is equipped with an adaptive learning strategy found in the vehicle computer This feature is designed to increase durability and provide consistent shift feel over the life of the vehicle A new vehicle or transmission may have firm and or soft shifts This operation is considered normal and will not affect function or durability of the transmission Over time the adaptive learning process will fully update transmission operation Additionally whenever the battery is disconnected or a new battery installed the strategy must be relearned 270 Driv
396. versatile also make it handle differently than an ordinary passenger car 219 Tires Wheels and Loading INFORMATION ABOUT UNIFORM TIRE QUALITY GRADING Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires The Quality grades can be found where applicable on the tire sidewall between tread shoulder and maximum section width For example e Treadwear 200 Traction AA Temperature A These Tire Quality Grades are determined by standards that the United States Department of Transportation has set Tire Quality Grades apply to new pneumatic passenger car tires They do not apply to deep tread winter type snow tires space saver or temporary use spare tires light truck or LT type tires tires with nominal rim diameters of 10 to 12 inches or limited production tires as defined in Title 49 Code of Federal Regulations Part 575 104 c 2 U S Department of Transportation Tire quality grades The U S Department of Transportation requires Ford Motor Company to give you the following information about tire grades exactly as the government has written it Treadwear The treadwear grade is a comparative rating based on the wear rate of the tire when tested under controlled conditions on a specified government test course For example a tire graded 150 would wear one and one half 14 times as well on the government course as a tire graded 100 The relative performance of tires depends upon the actual conditions of their u
397. void sharp turns and abrupt maneuvers e Drive at safe speeds for the conditions e Keep tires properly inflated e Never overload or improperly load your vehicle and e Make sure every passenger is properly restrained WARNING In a rollover crash an unbelted person is significantly more likely to die than a person wearing a seat belt All occupants must wear seat belts and children infants must use appropriate restraints to minimize the risk of injury or ejection Study your Owner s Guide for specific information about equipment features instructions for safe driving and additional precautions to reduce the risk of an accident or serious injury VEHICLE CHARACTERISTICS All Wheel Drive AWD System if equipped Your vehicle may be equipped with a full time All Wheel Drive AWD system With the AWD option power will be delivered to the front wheels and distributed to the rear wheels as needed This increases traction which may enable you to safely drive over terrain and road conditions that a conventional two wheel drive vehicle cannot The AWD system is active all the time and requires no input from the operator 218 Tires Wheels and Loading Note Your AWD vehicle is not intended for off road use The AWD feature gives your vehicle some limited off road capabilities in which driving surfaces are relatively level obstruction free and otherwise similar to normal on road driving conditions Operating your vehicle under other
398. walls of the refrigerator is normal AUXILIARY POWER POINT 12VDC Power outlets are designed for accessory plugs only Do not insert any other object in the power outlet as this will damage the outlet and blow the fuse Do not hang any type of accessory or accessory bracket from the plug Improper use of the power outlet can cause damage not covered by your warranty 98 Driver Controls Auxiliary power points can be found in the following locations Near the floor in the front console bin on the passenger s side In the center console utility compartment On the rear of the center console accessible from the rear seats e In the rear cargo area on the right trim panel Do not use the power point for operating the cigarette lighter element if equipped To prevent the fuse from being blown do not use the power point s over the vehicle capacity of 12 VDC 180W If the power point or cigar lighter socket is not working a fuse may have blown Refer to Fuses and relays in the Roadside Emergencies chapter for information on checking and replacing fuses To have full capacity usage of your power point the engine is required to be running to avoid unintentional discharge of the battery To prevent the battery from being discharged e do not use the power point longer than necessary when the engine is not running e do not leave battery chargers video game adapters computers and other devices plugged in overnight or when the ve
399. wing vehicles braking system is rated for operation at GVWR not at GCWR Separate functional brakes should be used for safe control of towed vehicles and for trailers where the GCW of the towing vehicle plus the trailer exceed the GVWR of the towing vehicle The GCW must never exceed the GCWR Maximum Loaded Trailer Weight is the highest possible weight of a fully loaded trailer the vehicle can tow It assumes a vehicle with only mandatory options no cargo internal or external a tongue load of 10 15 conventional trailer and driver only 150 lb 68 kg Consult your authorized dealer or the RV and Trailer Towing Guide provided by your authorized dealer for more detailed information WARNING Do not exceed the GVWR or the GAWR specified on the Safety Compliance Certification Label WARNING Do not use replacement tires with lower load carrying capacities than the original tires because they may lower the vehicle s GVWR and GAWR limitations Replacement tires with a higher limit than the original tires do not increase the GVWR and GAWR limitations WARNING Exceeding any vehicle weight rating limitation could result in serious damage to the vehicle and or personal injury 247 Tires Wheels and Loading Steps for determining the correct load limit 1 Locate the statement The combined weight of occupants and cargo should never exceed XXX kg or XXX Ibs on your vehicle s placard 2 Determine the combined we
400. with sealing compound and air Preparation Park the vehicle in a safe level and secure area away from moving traffic Turn the hazard lights on Apply the parking brake and turn the engine off Inspect the flat tire for visible damage Sealant compound contains latex To avoid any allergic reactions use the non latex gloves located in the accessory box on the underside of the temporary mobility kit housing Do not remove any foreign object that has pierced the tire If a puncture is located in the tire sidewall stop and call roadside assistance 1 Remove the valve cap from the tire valve 2 Unwrap the clear tube from the compressor housing 3 Remove the tube cap and fasten the metal connector of the tube to the tire valve turning clockwise Make sure the connection is tightly fastened 312 Roadside Emergencies 4 Plug the power cable into the 12V power point in the vehicle 5 Remove the warning sticker found on the canister and place it on the top of the instrument panel or the center of the dash 6 Start the engine only if the vehicle is outdoors or ina well ventilated area 7 Turn dial 1 counterclockwise to the sealant position Turn on the kit by pressing the or off button 2 8 Inflate the tire to the pressure listed on the tire label located on the driver s door or the door jam area 313 Roadside Emergencies Note When the sealing compound is first added into the tire the
401. y To open the refrigerator freezer flip the console lid forward and then lift off the refrigerator freezer cover Be sure to replace the cover after you are done using the refrigerator freezer This will help it maintain a more consistent cooling temperature 97 Driver Controls Refrigerator Briefly press and hold the COOL side of the control The indicator light on the cool side of the switch will illuminate and the indicator light on the freeze side will glow when the refrigerator is active When in cool mode the temperature will cool to approximately 41 F 5 C Briefly press and hold COOL again to turn off the refrigerator or briefly press and hold FREEZE to switch over to freezer mode L L FREEZE COOL Freezer Briefly press and hold the FREEZE side of the control and both indicator lights will illuminate when the freezer is active When in freeze mode the temperature will cool to approximately 23 F 5 C Press FREEZE again to turn off the freezer or press COOL to switch over to refrigerator mode When the vehicle is turned off the refrigerator freezer will also turn off and will turn back on to the last used mode freeze or cool once the vehicle is restarted Cleaning and maintenance The refrigerator freezer is maintenance free but you can clean the inside of the unit and the cover with a mild soap and water solution when needed Note Under certain conditions condensation on the inside
402. y through any paired and connected cell phone disclose to emergency services that the vehicle has been in a crash involving the deployment of an airbag or in certain vehicles the activation of the fuel pump shut off Certain versions or updates to 911 Assist may also be capable of electronically or verbally disclosing to 911 operators the vehicle location and or other details about the vehicle or crash to assist 911 operators to provide the most appropriate emergency services If you do not want to disclose this information do not activate the feature See your SYNC supplement for more information Additionally when you connect to Traffic Directions and Information if equipped U S only the service uses GPS technology and advanced vehicle sensors to collect the vehicle s current location travel direction and speed vehicle travel information only to help provide you with the directions traffic reports or business searches you request If you do not want Ford or its vendors to receive this information do not activate the service Ford Motor Company and the vendors it uses to provide you with this information do not store your vehicle travel information For more information see Traffic Directions and Information Terms and Conditions See your SYNC supplement for more information Introduction CELL PHONE USE The use of Mobile Communications Equipment has become increasingly important in the conduct of business and
403. y a different brand of unleaded gasoline If the problems persist see your authorized dealer Do not add aftermarket fuel additive products to your fuel tank It should not be necessary to add any aftermarket products to your fuel tank if you continue to use high quality fuel of the recommended octane rating These products have not been approved for your engine and could cause damage to the fuel system Repairs to correct the effects of using an aftermarket product in your fuel may not be covered by your warranty Many of the world s automakers approved the World Wide Fuel Charter that recommends gasoline specifications to provide improved performance and emission control system protection for your vehicle Gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter should be used when available Ask your fuel supplier about gasolines that meet the World Wide Fuel Charter Cleaner air Ford endorses the use of reformulated cleaner burning gasolines to improve air quality per the recommendations in the Choosing the right fuel section Running out of fuel Avoid running out of fuel because this situation may have an adverse effect on powertrain components 365 Maintenance and Specifications If you have run out of fuel e You may need to cycle the ignition from off to on several times after refueling to allow the fuel system to pump the fuel from the tank to the engine On restarting cranking time will take a few seconds longer than
404. y and keep out of children s reach Grasp the bulb only by its plastic base and do not touch the glass The oil from your hand could cause the bulb to break the next time the headlamps are operated Install the new bulb s in reverse order Replacing HID headlamp bulbs if equipped The headlamps on your vehicle use a high intensity discharge source These lamps operate at a high voltage When the bulb is burned out the bulb and starter capsule assembly must be replaced by your authorized dealer Replacing front parking lamp turn signal bulbs 1 Make sure headlamp switch is in the off position then open the hood 2 Reach behind the headlamp assembly to access the bulb sockets and connectors 3 Remove the bulb socket by turning it counterclockwise and pulling it straight out 4 To remove the bulb pull it straight out of the bulb socket Install the new bulb s in reverse order 88 Lights Replacing rear stop park turn backup and side marker lamp bulbs non LED The stop tail turn backup and side marker lamp bulbs are located in the tail lamp assembly Note Your vehicle may be equipped with a stop park turn and side marker lamp assemblies containing integral multiple light emitting diodes LED If replacement is required see your authorized dealer e 1 Backup lamp e 2 Stop park turn signal lamp e 8 Side marker lamp e 4 Supplemental tail
405. yKey with Remote Start Systems section e Key in the ignition is a MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section 147 Locks and Security Potential Causes Cannot disable MyKey e Key in the ignition is a MyKey e No MyKeys are programmed to the vehicle Refer to Create a MyKey section e Vehicle has been started using a remote start system that is programmed as MyKey Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Lost the only Admin key e Purchase a new key from your authorized dealer Lost any key e For programming spare keys refer to the Programming spare keys section in this chapter I accidentally programmed all e Vehicle has a remote start system keys as MyKeys that is recognized as an Admin key Refer to the Using MyKey with Remote Start Systems section to reset all MyKeys as Admin keys MyKey Programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed includes one additional key to the vehicle as a MyKey e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to MyKey with Remote Start Systems section Admin Keys Programmed total e Unknown key has been programmed includes one additional key to the vehicle as Admin key e Vehicle is equipped with a remote start system Refer to MyKey with

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents

Coastal Shower Doors L31IL15.69P-A Installation Guide  z4002 ing.qxp - Spencer Italia S.r.l.  Sencor SPV 2750  de en fr - VDW GmbH  ピュアハンドⅡ AS-200 アルコール手指消毒器  MANUAL DE OPERACIÓN  Jabra Link 14201-41  Samsung ES9 Uživatelská přiručka  

Copyright © All rights reserved. Failed to retrieve file